P - Link I - Install&Service - Manual

Konica Print Management System Printlink
Printlink
INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL
CODE NO IV : 0296 ID : 0297 HG: 0298 DV : 0299 IN : 0306 OD: 0307
Blank page
Preface
Printlink accumulates image data obtained from devices required for diagnostics such as CT, MRI, DSA, ultrasonic, and nuclear medical science, and outputs the image data to the laser imager. This service manual describes how Printlink can be used safely and accurately by the user. This product is fully compliant with the applied electrical device EMC standards "IEC 60601-1-2 (1993 version)".
Features
1. Backs up the laser imager 2. Expands multi-modality 3. Expands the connected imager 4. Compact controllers 5. Large image memory capacity 6. Interrupts or prioritizes printing upon emergency 7. Interpolation process of the image suitable per modality 8. Sets LUT per modality 9. Prints time and date per modality 10. Invokes and prints a printed page image 11. Erases a page, erases individual frames, and overwrites 12. Sets print conditions per modality 13. Prints by rotating 90 degrees per format 14. Produces slide size 15. Mixes format 16. Toshiba Ethernet input and DICOM input/output
Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12
Precautions on Service and Installment of Printlink

Before servicing and installing the Printlink, read the following items and understand them well.
1. Precautions upon servicing Printlink

(1) To prevent any accidents, do not service the Printlink unless properly trained and authorized by the manufacturer. (2) When approaching drive parts such as a fan, be careful not to get a part of your body or clothes caught in them. (3) Electrostatic charge may cause damage to the electronic circuits of the Printlink. Be cautious when handling the main unit or other electronic parts removed during service operation. Use a grounding strap whenever handling the circuit board. (4) Make sure that the main power is turned off whenever the electric board, connectors, or cables are pulled out from or attached to the unit. It is strictly prohibited to do any engineering work without the main power being turned off. Doing so may cause serious injury. (5) To operate or adjust the Printlink in any way other than instructed by this manual may cause exposure to harmful radiation, and is strictly prohibited. (6) Work properly and safely according to the Caution Labels. (7) The Printlink incorporates a lithium battery. Improper replacement of the battery may cause damage. Only a technical service engineer is allowed to replace it. (8) Do not remove the covers unless properly trained and authorized by the manufacturer.
2. Precautions against electric shock

(1) Precautions against high voltage High voltage is supplied to the device with this system. Observe the following precautions in order to prevent the risk of electric shock. The risk of electric shock exists when touching the high voltage section of the device cover by hand. (2) Precautions against supplied voltage The supplied voltage of the devices configuring this system is 100VAC. Observe the following precautions in order to prevent the risk of electric shock. Install the devices in a location where it is not exposed to water. Confirm that the ground wires are connect securely. Confirm that all cables are connected properly with no damages.
3. Precautions upon installing Printlink

(1) Install the system in a location where it is not exposed to water. (2) Install the system in a location where there is no likelihood of it being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, drafts, direct sunlight, dust, or air containing salt or sulfur, etc. (3) Install the system in a stable environment. Do not install it on an inclined surface or a location that can be easily affected by vibration or shock (4) Do not install the system in a location where chemical agents are stored or where chemical gases may generate. (5) Check the voltage and frequency of the power source and be sure they match those indicated in the specification. (6) The capacity of the outlet should be more than sufficient for the consumed power. (7) The power cable and communication cable must be connected in order to operate the Printlink system. Connect the cables properly and set them clear from the path so that no one will stumble and disconnect the cables. (8) Connect the power cable securely to an outlet that has a ground terminal. If a ground terminal does not exist on the outlet, add one on and connect it securely. (9) Printlink is equipped with vents to draw in and exhaust air in order to prevent internal temperature from rising. Please be sure that these vents are not blocked.
* If this page becomes dirty, rendering it illegible, please purchase (at charge) a new service manual.
Precautions Upon Installation and Usage

4. Confirmation and precautions prior to using Printlink
(1) Confirm that the power cable is not damaged. (2) Confirm that the ground terminal is grounded securely. (3) Confirm that all cables, etc. are connected properly and securely. (4) Confirm that there are no cracks in the controller LCD. (5) Confirm that Printlink is operating normally and steadily. (6) Printlink is equipped with vents to draw in and exhaust air in order to prevent internal temperature from rising. Please be sure that these vents are not blocked.
5. Precautions upon using the controller LCD

(1) Be sure to use your fingers to operate the touch panel of the LCD. If a hard and sharp object such as a pen is used, it may scratch or crack the panel. Also, the display section is made of glass so please avoid applying strong mechanical shock. (2) If the LCD section is damaged and liquid leaks out, be careful not to contain the liquid in the mouth. If the liquid sticks to the skin or clothes, wash it with soap immediately. (3) Operating the system with a crack in the glass portion of the LCD is very dangerous. Do not use the system in this condition.
6. Precautions regarding the location and method of storing Printlink for a certain length of time
(1) Turn OFF the power switch according to the specified procedure. (2) Disconnect cables, etc. properly. (3) Note the following points when storing Printlink. Store in a location where it is not exposed to water. Store in a location where there is no likelihood of it being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, drafts, direct sunlight, dust, or containing salt or sulfur, etc. Store in a stable environment. Do not store it on an inclined surface or a location that can be easily affected by vibration or shock. Do not store in a location where chemical agents are stored or where chemical gases may generate. (4) Clean the accessories and cables and store them neatly. (5) Clean all parts so that they can be used without any hindrance the next time.
7. Precautions upon using Printlink that was stored for a certain length of time
(1) Confirm that the power cable is not damaged. (2) Confirm that the ground terminals are grounded securely. (3) Confirm that all cables, etc. are connected properly and securely. (4) Confirm that there are no cracks in the controller LCD. (5) Confirm that Printlink is operating normally and steadily. (6) When using Printlink with other devices, there is a risk of inflicting danger or diagnostic errors. Therefore, operate the system with extra care in such situations. (7) Printlink is equipped with vents to draw in and exhaust air in order to prevent internal temperature from rising. Please be sure that these vents are not blocked.
Precautions Upon Installation and Usage

8. Use of Ethernet Terminal
The Ethernet Terminal should be used exclusively for Ethernet connection. Never use for Telephone connections.
9. Disposal of Printlink
This product is subject to industrial waste regulation. The internal lead batteries can be hazardous and must be disposed of properly. Please ask an assigned waste disposer regarding the disposal of this product. The internal lead batteries are charged automatically after the power supply is turned on. If the battery must be replaced, contact your Konica representative.
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
CAUTION LABELS
Caution labels imply the degree of the risk which may arise from incorrect use of this product. There are 3 degree of caution labels, and each is used depending on the level of risk and damage caused by incorrect use and mishandling. DANGER :Failure to avoid this risk implies the imminent danger level which may lead to serious injury including a loss of life.
WARNING :Failure to avoid the risk implies the danger level which may lead to serious injury including a loss of life. CAUTION :Failure to avoid the risk implies the danger level which may lead to moderate damage or light injury. Also it is used when only a damage to property is expected.
Risk of the damage High Loss of life or serious injury (Damage is serious) DANGER WARNING or CAUTION CAUTION Low WARNING
Bodily injury (and damage to property) Moderate damage or light injury (Damage is light) Damage to property omly
CAUTION
NOTE : Serious injury means a loss of eyesight,burns(high or low temperature),electric shock, fracture, intoxication, which causes you an after-effect or a necessity to be hospitalized and/or hospital recuperation for a long period. Damage means burns or electric shock which does not cause a necessity to be hospitalized and/or hospital recuperation for a long period. Physical damage means a damage to a kind of structure or its contents, livestock, and pets.
CAUTION LABELS
Warning and Caution indication. (1) Notes on Warning level is described on the label of item VI in the related pages. (2) Notes on Caution level is described on the label of item VI in the related pages or indicated as below.
CAUTION
1) Warning and Caution indication

Mark Meaning
Warning
This implies the loss of life or serious injury if the device is mishandled.
Caution
This implies the moderate light injury or physical damage alone if the device is mishandled.
2) Symbol Mark
Mark Meaning This denotes a prohibition or an order;Warning or Caution. (Prohibition Mark)
(Caution or Warning Mark)
This denotes a compulsory order or a direction. (Compulsory order)
This product is classified as below. Classification based on the kind of protection for the electric shock. A power supply device for commercial use outside. Class 1 device. Classification based on the degree of protection for the water intrusion which may lead to danger. Ordinary Device. (Enclosed device without protection against ingress of water. IPX0) Classification based on the degree of safety if this product is used in the environment where an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with air or an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with oxygen or nitrogen monoxide is present. This product is not suitable for use in the environment where an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with air or an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with oxygen or nitrogen monoxide is present. Classification based on the operation mode. Continuous operation.
INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

1. Printlink Overview
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features......................................................................................................................................................1-1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................1-2 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................1-3 Circuit Boards and Cables.........................................................................................................................1-5
2. Cabinet (Detaching Covers)

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Names of Cabinet Sections .......................................................................................................................2-1 Description of Cabinet Sections................................................................................................................2-2 Detaching Outer Cover Panels ..................................................................................................................2-4 Connecting Diagnostic Devices and Imagers............................................................................................2-5 Replacing the Battery and Fuse.................................................................................................................2-7
3. Power Unit and Internal Boards

3.1 3.2 3.3 Main Board................................................................................................................................................3-1 Hard Disk ..................................................................................................................................................3-7 Diagram of Printlink Internal Connection.................................................................................................3-9
4. Setting the Imager

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Setting the Li-7, 7A, and 8........................................................................................................................4-1 Setting the Li-21........................................................................................................................................4-5 Setting the Li-10A .....................................................................................................................................4-8 Setting the Li-62P....................................................................................................................................4-11 Setting the DryPro ...................................................................................................................................4-13
5. Setting the Network and the Internal Section of the Main Unit
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Setting the Network...................................................................................................................................5-2 Setting the Install PC.................................................................................................................................5-3 Setting the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway....................................................................5-4 Setting the HD Remaining Space and Log Data Mode ............................................................................5-7
6. Using the Installation Software

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 Operating Environment .............................................................................................................................6-1 Connection.................................................................................................................................................6-1 Startup and Exit .........................................................................................................................................6-1 Functional Description ..............................................................................................................................6-1 Compatibility of the Maintenance Software ...........................................................................................6-24 Error Message..........................................................................................................................................6-25
7. Setting the Input I/F

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 Common Items for All Input .....................................................................................................................7-1 Setting Each Input .....................................................................................................................................7-2 Setting Toshiba Ether Input.......................................................................................................................7-3 Setting the DICOM PRINT Input .............................................................................................................7-6 Setting the DICOM STORAGE Input.......................................................................................................7-8
8. Setting the Video I/F

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................8-1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................8-1 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................8-1 Description of Each Part and Its Setting ...................................................................................................8-3 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board........................................................8-12 Adjusting the Board ................................................................................................................................8-16
9. Setting the Digital I/F

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................9-1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................9-1 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................9-1 Description of Each Part and Its Setting ...................................................................................................9-2 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board..........................................................9-6 Checking the Transfer Signal of the Digital I/F........................................................................................9-9 Adjusting the Board ................................................................................................................................9-11 Setting the Memory Capacity of the Driver............................................................................................9-14
10. Setting the Digital Video I/F

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................10-1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................10-1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................10-2 Description of Each Part and Its Setting .................................................................................................10-2 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board........................................................10-9 Adjusting the Board ..............................................................................................................................10-11
11. Setting the Video HG I/F

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................11-1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................11-1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................11-1 Description of Each Part and Its Setting .................................................................................................11-2 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board......................................................11-10 Adjusting the Board ..............................................................................................................................11-15
12. Setting the Output I/F

12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 Common Items for All Output ................................................................................................................12-1 Output Settings ........................................................................................................................................12-5 HSTP Output Settings .............................................................................................................................12-6 DICOM PRINT Output Settings .............................................................................................................12-8 DICOM STORAGE Output Settings ....................................................................................................12-10
13. Additional Functions

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 Multi-clients ............................................................................................................................................13-1 Network Controller Default Function .....................................................................................................13-4 Printlink-OD Backup...............................................................................................................................13-5 Bit Conversion.........................................................................................................................................13-7 STRETCH (Equating different image sizes in the same page) ............................................................13-13 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINT................................................................................................13-15
14. Setting the Route 15. Saving and Sending Data

15.1 15.2 Saving and Sending Data ........................................................................................................................15-1 Procedures for Reinstallation ..................................................................................................................15-2
16. Controller (keypad) Settings

16.1 16.2 16.3 Setting jumpers........................................................................................................................................16-1 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen ............................................................................16-2 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen of the Network Controller ...............................16-10
17. Host Controller Settings

17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 Parts Required for Installation.................................................................................................................17-1 How to Connect Cables and Set Jumpers ...............................................................................................17-2 Configuration of Host Controller ............................................................................................................17-6 Printlink Host Controller Settings ...........................................................................................................17-9
18. System Layout Example

18.1 18.2 Set the Route for Input Printlink, Imager, and Filing Device.................................................................18-2 Route ID Settings ....................................................................................................................................18-7
19. Setting the Character Recognition

19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 Character Recognition .............................................................................................................................19-1 Algorithm of Character Recognition.......................................................................................................19-1 Limitations of Character Recognition .....................................................................................................19-1 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data .............................................................................19-2 Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software Operation Description .................................................19-4 Procedure for Settings of Character Recognition .................................................................................19-12 Outline of Preliminary Research of Character Strings To Be Recognized and Settings of Character Recognition System ..................19-13 19.8 Settings for Printlink .............................................................................................................................19-16 19.9 Settings of Environment of Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software........................................19-18 19.10 Settings of Data with Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software .................................................19-22 19.11 Returning Environment of Printlink......................................................................................................19-55 19.12 Setting and Operating Controller ..........................................................................................................19-56
Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver. 1.1 2001.3
20.Upgrading Printlink
20.1 20.2 Printlink Software Overview ...................................................................................................................20-1 Upgrading/Downgrading Printlink Software ..........................................................................................20-1
21. Error Code Table

21.1 21.2 21.3 Error Code Overview ..............................................................................................................................21-1 Error Log and Event Log ........................................................................................................................21-1 Recorded Contents of Log ......................................................................................................................21-3
22. Troubleshooting
22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 Troubleshooting on Startup and Connection...........................................................................................22-1 Troubleshooting on Operations ...............................................................................................................22-1 Troubleshooting on Image Quality..........................................................................................................22-2 Using Backup Imager..............................................................................................................................22-2 Others ......................................................................................................................................................22-2
Appendix
Blank page
Blank page
Network Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 1 Printlink -IV
Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 2
Printlink -ID Printlink -OD Imager Controller
Imager 1
Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 3
Printlink -DV
Imager 2
Printlink Network Controller Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 4 Printlink -HG Printlink -OD Imager Controller Imager 3
Diagnostic Device 5 Printlink -IN Printlink Network Controller
Printlink Network Controller
Diagnostic Device 16
Filing System
Fig. 1.1 Printlink System
1.1 Features
In the Printlink System, image data is accumulated by Printlink-IV, ID, DV, HG, or IN which is connected to a diagnostic device and is transferred directly to the imager or filing system via the network. For imagers which have no network I/F, data is transferred via Printlink-OD using a digital I/F. Printlink-IV, ID, DV, HG can transfer images to a maximum of 8 imagers, filing systems, or Printlink-ODs. The transfer of images to Printlink-OD is made by using the controller which comes with Printlink-OD. With Printlink-OD, a maximum of 16CH of Printlink input can be connected. Furthermore, with Printlink-IN, a maximum of 8 imagers, filing systems, or diagnostic devices can be connected for input and output combined.
1-1
1.2 Specifications
Model Name Imager Connection Interface Image Memory Capacity Multi-Modalities Format : Printlink : Li-21, Li-7, Li-7A, Li-8, Li-10A, Li-1417D, Li-1417DH, Li-62P, DRYPRO722 : Video / Digital / High-Speed Video / Digital Video / Network : 4GB / 8GB : Expandable with additional Printlink : 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24, 25, 30, 35, 36, 42, 48, and mixed format. (Some formats cannot be performed depending on the connected imager, the number of pixel data, or the film size.) Test Pattern Interpolation Process Image Rotation Exposure Condition Border Process Image Frame Setting Negative/Positive Inversion Erasing Memory Random Exposure Host Control Character Input Function Copy Function Controller Outer Dimensions Weight Power Source Power Consumption of Main Unit Operating Environment Storage Environment Magnetic Resistance Heat Generation Options : Built in with SMPTE pattern. : Capable : 90 degree rotation : Capable of setting 8 channels for contrast, density, image frame and its polarity, interpolation, format, and border. : Selectable between black and transparent. : Selectable between frame and frameless image. : Function exists for inverting negative and positive images. : Memory can be erased per frame at random or for one entire page. : Capable : Connectable depending on the device. : Date, messages, etc. can be printed in margins. : Up to 99 copies of original data. : LCD with backlight. : Width 210mm x Depth 480mm x Height 450mm : Approx. 15kg : 100V AC+-10%, 50/60Hz : 100W : 15 to 30C, 30 to 75% RH (with no condensation) : -10 to 50C, 10 to 85% RH (with no condensation) : 0.5mT or less : 100W/h : Various host controls, local switches, coaxial interface cable, hub, card reader.
* Please acknowledge that the above specifications may change without prior notice.
1-2
1.3 Block Diagram

1.3.1 Configuration
Main board PCI Back Plane I/F Video IF (60MHz) Video IF-HG (130MHz) Digital Video IF Digital Input IF Digital Output IF Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Controller LAN Card Power Unit
1.3.2 Block diagram of the entire system
HDD 4GB/8GB
PCI Bus
IDE
LAN Card 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Controller
Memory 32MBx2
Serial Diagnostic Device Power Unit Input I/F Power Source 100VAC
Fig. 1.2 Printlink-IV, -ID, -HG, -DV Block Diagram
1-3
HDD 4GB/8GB
PCI Bus
IDE
Network Controller
Memory 32MBx2
Serial
Power Unit
Power Source 100VAC
Fig. 1.3 Printlink-IN Block Diagram
HDD 4GB/8GB
PCI Bus
IDE Network Controller
Memory 32MBx4
Imager Controller Serial
Imager Output IF
Power Unit
Power Source 100VAC
Fig. 1.4 Printlink-OD Block Diagram
1-4
1.4 Circuit Boards and Cables

Main Board Video I/F Video I/F HG Digital I/F Input Digital I/F Output Digital Video I/F LAN Card Main Memory Board HDD Controller Network Controller Internal Cable D37IN Internal Cable D37OUT Internal Cable 12bit Printlink-Imager Cable Model No. ADP-202-10 Part No. 029620000A Part No. 029830000A Part No. 029730000A Part No. 030730000A (Board No. 029730000A) Part No. 029930000A Part No. Ether Express Pro 100 plus Model No. ADP-169 Model No. WDAC24300 Part No. 029620000A Part No. 030620000A Part No. 012585000A Part No. 016285000A Part No. 0309WD000A Part No. 0431WD000A
The LAN Card and HDD change from the following models: PRINTLINK-IV PRINTLINK-ID PRINTLINK-IN PRINTLINK-OD PRINTLINK-HG PRINTLINK-DV LAN Card HDD 02960265 or later 02970241 or later 03060147 or later 03070201 or later 02980056 or later 02990051 or later Part No. LA100-PCI-T V3 Model No. ST38421A
1-5
Blank page

2.1 Names of Cabinet Sections
(2) RESET Button
(1) Ventilation Slot

RESET E_STOP RESET E_STOP
(3) E_STOP Button
(4) Front Cover
Fig. 2.1 Front Panel (1)
Fig. 2.2 Front Panel (2)
(6) Cooling Fan
(5) Breaker Switch for Power Source (7) AC Input Terminal
(8) Host Controller Output Terminal (10) Ethernet Terminal
(9) Printlink Controller Input Terminal
(11) Digital Input Terminal / Video Input Terminal * The terminal changes depending on the board.
(12) Production No.
(13) Rubber Support
Fig. 2.3 Rear Panel
2-1
(14) READY Switch
POWER
(15) Power LED (16) HDD LED (17) Status LED
Fig. 2.4 Top Panel
2.2 Description of Cabinet Sections

(1) Ventilation Slot This slot absorbs outside air which cools the inside of Printlink. The air is exhausted through the cooling fan. (2) RESET Button To reset Printlink. * In principle, this button should not be used. (3) E_STOP Button To shut down Printlink forcefully. * In principle, this button should not be used. (4) Front Cover Cover for the control section of the main unit. It slides up and down. (5) Breaker Switch for the Power Source Main power switch. (6) Cooling Fan To cool the inside of Printlink. It also serves as an outlet vent. (7) AC Input Terminal Input terminal for AC power. (8) Host Controller Output Terminal Host controller output terminal to control the output destination. This terminal connects to the host controller terminal of the controller. (9) Printlink Controller Input Terminal Terminal to connect the controller cable. (10) Ethernet Terminal Terminal to connect Ethernet. (11) Digital Input Terminal / Video Input Terminal This terminal becomes a digital input terminal when the board is set to digital, and a video input terminal when set to video.
2-2
STATUS
HDD

(12) Production No. Production No. of Printlink. (13) Rubber Support To stabilize the Printlink body. (14) READY Switch A single press turns the power ON, lights the Power LED, and starts up Printlink. The green lamp goes ON during operation. Furthermore, Printlink shuts down when the switch is pressed until the Status LED starts to blink. (15) Power LED The green lamp goes ON during Printlink operation. (16) HDD LED Indicates the status of the Printlink hard disk. The green lamp indicates that it is now writing on the hard disk. (17) Status LED The orange lamp blinks when Printlink is shutting down.
2-3
2.3 Detaching Outer Cover Panels

2.3.1 Left side-panel
Remove the 3 screws (b) on the rear side of the cabinet which secure the side cover as shown in the figure below. Slide it towards the direction of the arrow (1), then pull it up to direction (2) to free and detach the cover panel from the main unit. * Detach the right cover panel in the same procedure.
(2)
(1)
Part which hooks on to the main unit
Fig. 2.5 Side Panel
2.3.2 Front panel

Remove the screw (a) as shown in the above Fig. 2.5. Hold portion (c) located at the bottom of the front panel, pull towards direction (3) and detach the panel. * Be sure to detach both side panels before detaching the front panel in order to avoid damage to the unit.
(3)
c
Fig. 2.6 Front Panel
2-4
2.4 Connecting Diagnostic Devices and Imagers

When attaching cables or connectors, be sure to disconnect the power cable from the power outlet to prevent electrical shock.
Host Control Output Terminal Ethernet Terminal
Printlink Controller Input Terminal
Video Input Terminal, Digital Input Terminal, Video HG Input Terminal, Digital Video Input Terminal * The terminal changes depending on the board.
Fig. 2-7 Rear Panel
2.4.1 Connecting a diagnostic device (video input)

1. Connect a BNC cable for video signal from the diagnostic device to the "Video Input Terminal". 2. Connect a controller cable from the Printlink controller to the "Printlink Controller Input Terminal". 3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal".
2.4.2 Connecting a diagnostic device (digital input)

1. Connect a digital signal cable D-sub37Pin from the diagnostic device to the "Digital Input Terminal". 2. Connect a controller cable from the Printlink controller to the "Printlink Controller Input Terminal". 3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal".
2.4.3 Connecting a diagnostic device (video HG input)

1. Connect a BNC cable for video signal from the diagnostic device to the "Video HG Input Terminal". 2. Connect a controller cable from the Printlink controller to the "Printlink Controller Input Terminal". 3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal".
2.4.4 Connecting a diagnostic device (digital video input)

1. Connect a digital video cable attached with the diagnostic device and Printlink to the "Digital Video Input Terminal". The cable is 2 meters in length. 2. Connect a controller cable from the Printlink controller to the "Printlink Controller Input Terminal". 3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal".
2-5

2.4.5 Connecting an imager (digital output)
1. Connect a digital signal cable D-Sub37Pin to the "Digital Output Terminal", then connect the other end to the digital signal input terminal of the imager. If the connection to the imager is made in 12bit, exchange the internal cable linked to the digital I/F board to a 12bit cable as shown in Fig. 2.8, and connect a digital signal cable D-sub50Pin to the "Digital Output Terminal". * The same procedure is required for Digital Input.
Attach this connector to the digital I/F board.
Attach this 12bit connector to the rear side of Printlink.
Fig. 2.8 Internal Cable Connection 2. Connect the imager host controller to the "Host Control Output Terminal" using the PL imager cable (optionally available). 3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal". Remarks: Ethernet Connection Connect the main Printlink unit to a maintenance PC via ISDN or ISDN Router for remote maintenance.
2-6
2.5 Replacing the Battery and Fuse

The back-up battery (lead battery) used with this device is designated as industrial waste. Disposal of the battery must comply with the waste-disposal regulations. Also, extreme caution is required during maintenance to prevent electrical shock.
DC32V/1 0A
Fuse Connector (1) Connector (2) Battery Clasp Connector (3) Connector (4)
Fig. 2.9 Battery Connection 1. Turn OFF the breaker switch for the power source located at the rear side of the main Printlink unit, then disconnect the power cable from the outlet. Note: Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the outlet to prevent electrical shock. 2. Detach both side cover panels from the main Printlink unit, then detach the front cover panel. (Refer to Section 2.3.) 3. Pull out the wiring cable for the battery located at the upper section of Printlink as shown in the figure below.
Pull out this cable
Fig. 2.10 Cable Wiring 4. Remove the fuse cover as shown below, then remove the fuse.
Fuse Cover
Fuse
Fig. 2.11 Replacing the Fuse 5. Pull out Connectors (1) to (4) connected to the battery as shown in the figure below. Please note which cable connects to which connector so that they can be properly reconnected.
Fig. 2.12 Plugging Connectors

2-7

6. After releasing the clasp which secures the battery to the main unit, remove the old battery and replace it with a new one. 7. Reattach the clasp and screw, then attach the connectors removed in Step 5 to their original positions. Be careful not to make a connection error, as it may lead to a short circuit. * Follow Step (1) to (3) for replacing a fuse. A spare fuse can be found on the clasp that secures the battery.
2-8
Blank page
Blank page

3.1 Main Board
3.1.1 Specifications
Model No. CPU CHIPSET L2 Cache BIOS BIOS ROM Main Memory Parity Check No. of DIMM SLOT PCI Bus HDD Interface FDD Interface Parallel Port Serial Port Key Interface Mouse Interface VGA CHIP VGA Bus Interface VGA Interface VRAM Memory Watchdog Temperature Sensor ADP-202-10 Pentium MMX 200MHz (P55TM) Triton430HX 512KB PB-SRAM Phoenix (Plug-and-Play compatible) 256KB FLASH ROM Max. 256MB Parity/ECC 4 Slots PCI 2.1 compatible PCI Bus Master E-IDE AT standard 1xLPT (EPP/ECP) 2xCPM (RS232C compatible) PS/2-type (8042-equivalent) PS/2-type (8042-equivalent) F65550 PCI Bus Analogue CRT&LCD panels 2MB 2sec. / 3 to 30sec. / 1min. / 2 to 30min. Installed
3-1

3.1.2 Block diagram
Pentium Processor
Host Bus
DIMM L2 Cache TXC
PCI Bus ISA Bus
ISA+PCI
VRAM USB PLL3 VGA VRAM Super I/O
K/B
P/D
Primary IDE
Secondary IDE
CRT
LCD
FDD
LPT
COM1
COM2
Fig. 3.1 Block Diagram of the Main Board
3-2

3.1.3 Description of each part
(1) External view
Socket7
JP1
Fig. 3.2 External View of the Main Board (Parts side)
JP2
JP3
JP4
Fig. 3.3 External View of the Main Board (Soldered side)
3-3

(2) Adding memory
The system memory of the main board can be increased up to 256MB by using 72pin DIMM socket compatible memory. Please note the following instructions when adding memory to the DIMM socket. Use DIMM modules in which access time is 60ns or 70ns with +5V single power supply. Use DIMM modules with the same capacity in pairs (refer to the figure below). Adjust and insert pin No. 1 of the DIMM module to pin No. 1 of the DIMM socket. A DIMM module either with or without a parity can be used.
1Pin side of DIMM socket Socket7
CN13,CN14
CN15,CN16
Pair 1
Pair 2
Fig. 3.4 Example of Adding Memory * When adding only one pair of DIMM modules, either the Pair 1 or Pair 2 position can be used.
3-4

3.1.4 Cautions upon detaching an IDE connector
Please note the following instructions when detaching or reattaching an IDE connector from/to the main board: Begin work after removing the main board from the main Printlink unit. Be careful when handling the connector as the IDE connector pins are susceptible to damage.
IDE Connector
Fig. 3.5 Position of IDE Connector
3-5

3.1.5 Dealing with problems
(1) Printlink controller does not start up. (2) Access cannot be made through the I/F. (3) Access cannot be made to the hard disk. Procedures for checking: 1. Check the controller. (Refer to Section 16.) If all controllers are in the same condition, check the main board. 2. Check each I/F. (Refer to Section 7. to 11.) If access cannot be made to each I/F board, check the main board. 3. Check the HDD LED on the front panel. If normal, reinstall. If abnormal, perform the following: Turn the power OFF, then turn it ON again. Check the connectors. Check the operation of the hard disk. Check the power source. Reinstall. If the problem is not solved, replace the circuit board or the hard disk.
3-6
3.2 Hard Disk

3.2.1 Specifications
(1) WDAC24300
Physical Specifications Formatted Capacity Interface 40-pin E-IDE AC24300 4311MB
(2)
ST38421A
Physical Specifications Formatted Capacity Interface * 8.4GB 40-pin E-IDE
Image data, OS (Windows NT) for Printlink, and the main program for Printlink are stored in the hard disk. Therefore, the Printlink system may not start up if there is a problem in the hard disk.
3.2.2 Description of each part

For the external view and the position of the jumper, refer to Sections 3.2.3 and 3.2.4.
3.2.3 Setting
(1) Description of the Jumper
View from the top of the jumper pins with the surface of the HDD board faced upwards.
9 40pin CONN 10 8 6 4 2 7 5 3 1 POWER
Fig. 3.6 Jumper Diagram (Factory default) * Factory default setting does not have to be changed, so please be sure that the jumper is set as shown in the above figure.
3-7

3.2.4 Checking the operation
Operation is checked in the following methods: Turn ON the power, and check if the HDD LED goes on when access is made to the hard disk. The operating system does not start up normally when there is a problem in the hard disk. (This cannot be confirmed without a monitor.) A software which controls Printlink and the OS for the main board is stored in the hard disk. Therefore, if there is a malfunction in the hard disk, the system will not start up. * Other than a malfunction in the hard disk, connectors or the power source can also be the problem.
Fig. 3.7 External View of the Hard Disk
3-8
3.3 Diagram of Printlink Internal Connection

SC457610
NH2085
PANEL BOARD SB4576100
RESET
1 RESET 2 GND 1 RESET 2 GND
+5V 1 HDD_STATUS 2 STATUS 3 OPTION1 4 OPTION2 5 SP+ 6 SP 7 POWER_SW 8 RESET_SW 9 POWER-OFF_SW 10 OPTION_SW 11 GND 12
Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Purple Gray White Black Brown Red
CN13 CN1 1 +5V BACK PLANE BOARD 2 HDD_STATUS 3 STATUS ADP299 4 OPTION1 5 OPTION2 HFPP514PB/B 6 SP+ 7 SP 8 POWER_SW 9 RESET_SW 10 POWER_OFF_SW 11 OPTION_SW 12 GND
CN2
CN8
SA461610
CPU BOARD ADP20210
NH21182
25P
P5
E.STOP
SBC SLOT
CN11 NH2141
P6
NZ1963 NH2015
FAN1 Red Yellow Black Red Yellow Black CN5 1 +12V 2 FAN SENSOR 3 GND
CN13,14 P3
PAT131 32 MB
HDD
NZ1963
FAN2 Red Yellow Black
NH2015
Red Yellow Black
CN6 1 +12V 2 FAN SENSOR 3 GND
PCI SLOT#1
LAN CARD ETHER EXPRESS PRO/+ P4
PCI SLOT#2
Black P1 32V DC/20A Red
Batt
Red
Batt + Batt +VE Batt VE
SC457610
+3.3V +3.3V COM +5V COM +5V COM P.G +5VS +12V +3.3V 12V COM ON/OFF COM COM COM 5V +5V +5V P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Red Black Orange Yellow Yellow Brown Blue Black Purple Black Black Black White Red Red CN5 1 +3.3V 2 +3.3V 3 COM 4 +5V 5 COM 6 +5V 7 COM 8 P.G 9 +5VS 10 +12V 11 +3.3V 12 12V 13 COM 14 ON/OFF 15 COM 16 COM 17 COM 18 5V 19 +5V 20 +5V
PCI SLOT#3
P7
PCI SLOT#4
NH2134 PX1202GF12
Batt
Black
PCI SLOT#1
P8
POWER UNIT NSP2180H2X
PCI SLOT#2
PCI SLOT#3
P9
P12 GND 1 SHUT_DOWN 2 AC_FALL 3 BATT LOW 1 BATT CHECK 2 POWER FAN 3
Black Yellow Blue White Orange Purple
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN17 GND SHUT_DOWN AC_FALL BATT LOW BATT CHECK POWER FAN
PCI SLOT#4
PCI SLOT#5
90-253V AC 50/60Hz 3P INLET CONNECTOR
+12 GND GND +5V +12 GND GND +5V +12 GND GND +5V
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Yellow Black Black Red Yellow Black Black Red Yellow Black Black Red
3-9
Blank page

The purpose of modifying the settings on the imager side is to enable the imager to receive all image data output from Printlink-OD. The settings can be changed to receive not only the maximum image data output from Printlink, but also data in which the image size differs among each page. Check the version of the main unit ROM on the imager side, and if a non-designated version is installed, please be sure to change the ROM. As for the controller, set it according to the table below. For items that are not listed in the table, please leave them as they are.
4.1 Setting the Li-7, 7A, and 8

Confirm that the Li-7, 7A, and 8 main unit ROM versions are the ones listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the Li-7 main unit ROM. Table 4.1 Version Required for Li-7 to Connect with Printlink ROM Type MAIN TRN17 MDL*1 DIGIF*1 MIU-Li7A Host I/F*2 MIU-Li7 Host I/F*2 Maintenance Software*3 Version Required for Printlink Connection V1.30 V1.30 V1.30 V1.31 V1.02 V1.00 V1.30
* ROM other than the ones indicated above (AFCONT, IFU17, IFU27) do not have to be changed. *1 Channels which are not connected to the diagnostic device via Printlink must also be changed. Furthermore, the 3rd channel (both internal and external) must be changed. *2 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed. *3 Upwardly compatible with V1.21. (An option must be added during start-up.)
4-1

4.1.1 Setting the controller
(1) Setting the Li-7
1. Disconnect the 1st jumper (JP1) in the controller of Li-7, then start up Li-7. 2. Set the controller according to Table 4.2, then touch [Print] to secure the setting. 3. Turn OFF the power, return the controller jumper to the original position, then turn the power ON again. 4. After Li-7 is restarted, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set according to Table 4.3. * Restarting the device is not required after the setting has been completed. Table 4.2 Setup for Li-7 Host Control KEYPAD SETUP GENERAL SETUP Initial ENQ/ACK Change Film Size Maximum smooth Maximum sorter MODALITY SETUP Baudrate Stop bits Data bits Parity HOST SETUP Baudrate Stop bits Data bits Parity HOST TYPE SETUP KONICA SETUP1 Security Delay Li-7 Yes Yes 4 4 9600 1 8 Even 9600 1 8 Even MIU 1 0
Table 4.3 Setup for Li-7 Controller SEARCH CONDITION Range Rotate MIX SETUP Host On On On On
4-2

(2) Setting the Li-7A / 8
1. The maintenance setup screen can be displayed after the Li-7A/8 has been activated. (The Maintenance screen will appear by pressing the upper left and bottom left portions of the Setup screen simultaneously for over 1 second.) 2. Set the controller according to Table 4.4. When the setting has been completed, touch [OK] located at the upper right portion of the screen to secure the setting, and allow you to use the controller under the new setting when the initial screen reappears. If there are still items that must be set, use the arrow key to switch the screen, and continue the setting. The setting will be secured by touching the arrow key. 3. After setting each parameter, move to Setup Screen 2/2, and set the controller according to Table 4.5. Table 4.4 Setup for Li-7A/8 Host Control INSTALL SETUP MAXIMUM SORTER LOCAL SWITCH SLIDE HOST TYPE SETUP HOST SETUP SECURITY DELAY OPTIMIZE 4 OFF OFF MIU 1 0 OFF
Table 4.5 Setup for Li-7A/8 Controller SETUP 2/2 HOST CONTROL ON
4-3

4.1.2 Setting the digital I/F and the main unit
(1) Setting the digital I/F
It is required to set the Li-7/7A/8 so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink. 1. Search for a modality which holds the maximum image size within the modalities input in Printlink. 2. Add enough memory so that the maximum image size found in Step 1 can be received. The following standards are used to judge whether the image size can be received by Li-7/7A/8. (Image size x Maximum number of frames that can be set) > Memory capacity installed in the I/F If the actual situation fits the above formula, memory needs to be added. e.g.) When the memory capacity of Li-7/7A/8 digital I/F is 16MB: 1280 x 1024, 15 frames > 18.75MB is required > Memory must be added. 1024 x 1024, 15 frames > 15MB is required > Memory does not have to be added.
(2)
Changing the settings using the maintenance software

Various image data sizes can be received by the digital I/F by recognizing the image size from the header information of the digital signal. 1. Start up the Li-7/7A/8 maintenance software, and display the I/F DATA screen. Set the "SIZE_MODE" of the channel connecting Printlink to "VAR" (variable size mode), then send the setting to Li-7/7A/8. 2. Send the modified data to Li-7/7A/8 to execute "DATA SET".
4-4
4.2 Setting the Li-21

Confirm that the Li-21 main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the Li21 main unit ROM. Table 4.6 Version Required for Li-21 to Connect with Printlink ROM Type Device (211) Print (212) File (214) Digital (219)*1 Video (216) *1 DMU Control Kit Li-21 (507) *2 Software to Create Video File Software to Create Format File Installation Software Version Required to Connect with Printlink V6.0125 V4.1116 V5.1205 V5.1116 V5.1116 V5.1109 MKVF6 MKFF12 V1.9
*1 Channels which are not connected to the diagnostic device via Printlink must also be changed. *2 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed.
4-5

(1) Setting
1. Start up Li-21 by setting DIP switch 1 and 2 in the Li-21 controller to ON. 2. Set the controller according to Table 4.7. 3. Turn the power OFF temporarily, return the DIP switch to its original position, then turn the power ON again. 4. After Li-7 is restarted, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set the controller according to Table 4.8. * Restarting the device is not required after the setting has been completed. Table 4.7 Setup for Li-21 Host Control KEYPAD SETUP Local Switch Erase Dir. MD timeout Supply counter GENERAL SETUP Change Film Size Change supply Lut calibration Maximum smooth Maximum sorter HOST TYPE SETUP MODALITY SETUP Baudrate Stop bits Data bits Parity HOST SETUP 1 Error Logoff Fake Toggle RR after BK Error Type Magazine error fatal Version number Film size report HOST SETUP 2 Smooth Medium Smooth Den+Con+LUT Use Async HOST SETUP 3 Error on Store Error Clear Table 4.8 Setup for Li-21 Controller SEARCH CONDITION Range Rotate MIX SETUP Host On On On On NO Last Init NO Yes Yes Yes 7 No. of supply unit Konica 9600 1 8 Even NO NO KC Yes 2.0 Def 7 7 Use Yes Def Yes
4-6

4.2.2 Setting the digital I/F and main unit
Li-21 needs to be set so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink. 1. Search for a modality which holds the maximum image size within the modalities input in Printlink. 2. If the maximum image size in Step 1 is 2K x 2K or larger, change the setting so that it can receive that size. (Corresponding to special sizes.) If there is a 5M (2K x 2.5K) size image data input in Printlink, the setting needs to be changed. 3. Turn ON the 7th switch of DIP Switch 2, and change the setting so that the digital I/F can receive various image data sizes by recognizing the image size from the header information of the digital signal.
(2)
Changing the setting using the maintenance software

Change the set data so that the maximum image size in Step 1 in the above section can be received. 1. Calculation: (Max. image size) (640 x 512) Round up the solution to the tenth. (e.g.) "2.31" is rounded up to "2.4". 2. Start up MKFF12 to create a format file. Assuming that the solution in Step 1 is "4.0", start up MKFF12 as MKFF12/d4.0/1/f5 (return). d: "?" time(s) of the set memory size secured. Enter the solution in Step 1. Be sure to enter up to the tenth (e.g. 4.0) even for integers. 1: This indicates Li-21. f: Film size. 3. Create a format film by setting the H size, V size to 640, 512 respectively, and by setting the format to "0". 4. Start up MKVF6 to create a video film. Start up MKVF6 as MKVF6 (return). Create a video file by entering "Digital:1", "h size:640", "v size:512", "h total:515 (h size+3)" and setting the store time to 1 or above. 5. With the Li-21 maintenance software, assign the disk capacity of the channels which are not being used with Li-21, as a result of connecting Printlink, to the channels connected to Printlink. 6. Start up the Li-21 maintenance software, and send the format file and video file set as above to the Li-21 main unit.
4-7
4.3 Setting the Li-10A

Unlike Li-7, 7A, 8, Li-62P, and Li-21, Li-10A cannot receive the settings for the stamp and sorter from Printlink. Confirm that the Li-10A main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the Li10A main unit ROM. Table 4.9 Version Required for Li-10A to Connect with Printlink ROM Type DMU Control Kit Li-10A (digital) *1 DMU Control Kit Li-10A (controller) *1 Software to Create Video File Software to Create Format File Installation Software
* There is no need to change other ROM (device, print, file, video). *1 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed.
Version Required for Printlink Connection V4.0512 V4.0125 MKVF6 MKFF12 V1.7
4-8

(1) Setting
1. Turn ON one of the DIP switches in the Li-10A controller and start up Li-10A. 2. Set the controller according to Table 4.10. 3. Turn OFF the power, return the Dip switch on the controller to its original position, then turn ON the power again. 4. After start-up, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set according to Table 4.11. * Restarting the device is not required after the setting has been completed.
Table 4.10 Setup for Li-10A Host Control KONICA SETUP 1 Security Use async. Magazine error fatal HOST TYPE SETUP KEYPAD SETUP GENERAL SETUP MODALITY SETUP Initial ENQ/ACK Change Film Size Maximum Smooth Baudrate Stop bits Data bits Parity HOST SETUP Baudrate Stop bits Data bits Parity 3 Yes Yes Konica Li-10A Yes Yes 7 9600 1 8 Even 9600 1 8 Even
Table 4.11 Setup for Li-10A Controller SEARCH CONDITION Range Rotate MIX SETUP Host 1-64 On On On
4-9

4.3.2 Setting the digital I/F and main unit
Li-10A needs to be set so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink. 1. Search for a modality which holds the maximum image size within the modalities input in Printlink. 2. If the maximum image size in Step 1 is 2K x 2K or larger, change the setting so that Li-10A can receive that size. (A special order can be placed.) If there is a 5M (2K x 2.5K) size image data input in Printlink, the setting needs to be changed. 3. Turn ON the 7th switch of DIP Switch 2, and change the setting so that the digital I/F can receive various image data sizes by recognizing the image size from the header information of the digital signal.
(2)
Changing the setting using the maintenance software

Change the set data so that the maximum image size in Step 1 in the above section can be received. 1. Calculation: (Max. image size) (640 x 512) Round up the solution to the tenth. (e.g.) "2.31" is rounded up to "2.4". 2. Start up MKFF12 to create a format file. Assuming that the solution in Step 1 is "4.0", start up MKFF12 as MKFF12/d4.0 (return). d: "?" time(s) of the set memory size secured. Enter the solution in Step 1. Be sure to enter up to the tenth (e.g. 4.0) even for integers. 3. Create a format film by setting the H size, V size to 640, 512 respectively, and by setting the format to "0". 4. Start up MKVF6 to create a video film. Start up MKVF6 as MKVF6 (return). Create a video file by entering "Digital:1", "h size:640", "v size:512", "h total:515 (h size+3)" and setting the store time to 1 or above. 5. With the Li-10A maintenance software, assign the disk capacity of the channels which are not being used with Li-10A, as a result of connecting Printlink, to the channels connected to Printlink. 6. Start up the Li-10A maintenance software, and send the format file and video file set as above to the Li-10A main unit.
4-10
4.4 Setting the Li-62P

Confirm that the Li-62P main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the main unit ROM. Table 4.12 Version Required for Li-62P to Connect with Printlink ROM Type Main Mechanical Control Print Film Processor D I/F IN Li-62P Host I/F Konica Maintenance Software Version Required for Printlink Connection V2.10 V1.05 V1.06 V1.05 V1.20 V1.04 V1.05
4-11

(1) Setting
1. After starting up Li-62P, display the maintenance setup screen. (The Maintenance screen will appear by pressing the upper left and bottom left portions of the Setup screen simultaneously for over 1 second.) 2. Set the controller according to Table 4.13. When the setting has been completed, touch [OK] located at the upper right portion of the screen to secure the setting, and allow you to use the controller under the new setting when the initial screen reappears. If there are still items that must be set, use the arrow key to switch the screen, and continue the setting. The setting will be secured by touching the arrow key. 3. After setting each parameter, move to Setup Screen 2/3, and set the controller according to Table 4.14.
Table 4.13 Setup for Li-62P Host Control INSTALL SETUP MAXIMUM SMOOTH MAXIMUM SORTER MINIMUM SORTER END FRAME BUZZER KEYPAD SETUP LOCAL SW STORE DELAY H/V DISPLAY ADDITION SETUP CONTINUE ERR SIGNAL INTERVAL TIME HOST TYPE SETUP HOST SETUP SECURITY DELAY 03 PRINTLINK 1 0 7 4 1 NO OFF 0 OFF OFF
Table 4.14 Setup for Li-62P Controller SETUP 2/3 HOST CONTROL ON
4.4.2 Setting the digital I/F

Setting input bit length Setting Req to Req Image transfer timeout Setting by Li-62P installation software, changing internal cables. Digital I/F Digital I/F DIPSW7 off: 1/10s on:500s DIPSW5 off, DIPSW6 off: 60s DIPSW5 off, DIPSW6 on: 240s
4-12
4.5 Setting the DRYPRO722

The DRYPRO722 is an imager of the DICOM input. This section explains how to make the settings after the network is made and the IP address is obtained.
4.5.1 Setting and installing the DRYPRO722

(1) Setting the DRYPRO722
a) Before installing the DRYPRO722, check its version, and always use the latest version. Upgrade the version by following the procedures described in the "Installation Manual" and "Service Manual" for DRYPRO722. b) It is not necessary to make the settings in the DRYPRO722 operation panel and the circuit boards in order to connect with the Printlink.
(2)
Setting the address of the DRYPRO722

a) You can check the address and net mask of the DRYPRO722 on the operation panel. From the Maintenance screen, touch the upper left portion of the screen twice to enter the Service screen. Touch [VERSION] on Screen 2/3, then touch the arrow key on the upper right corner of the screen to display the address and net mask of the DRYPRO722. b) Set the address of the Install PC in the same segment as the address above. For more detailed information on how to set the address, see Section 5.2 or later. Select [Server Connection] from the [File] menu in the installation software of the DRYPRO722, and enter the displayed IP address to connect the DRYPRO722.
Fig. 4.1 Server Connection Dialog Box c) In order to display the current setting of the DRYPRO722, click [Set IP Address]. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask, default gateway determined in the previous section, and click [OK]. The settings will be transferred to the DRYPRO722, and they will take effect next time the DRYPRO722 starts up.
Fig. 4.2 Set IP Address Dialog Box
4-13

(3) Setting the DRYPRO722 with the installation software
a) Select [DryPro >> PC] from [File (F)] menu to read the setting of the DRYPRO722, and make the settings so that they are as shown in the system design example. b) For more detailed information on how to make the settings, see the "Installation manual" for the DRYPRO722. Please note the following: Note: In order to set the channel to Validity, select the file name, and choose MRICT that appears in the menu with right click of the mouse. Then, the default settings are set for the Printlink. (Select Regius when you connect the Regius directly to the DRYPRO722.) From this screen, set each parameter so that it meets the environment under the DRYPRO722 is used at each institution.
Fig. 4.3 DryPro model 722 Installation Window Only one print service port can be set on the DRYPRO722 side. When you print, a maximum of 16 channels can be used at the same time for the one print service port. Therefore, it is necessary to set the same Port No. on the Printlink side that is connected to the DRYPRO722. c) Select [Save] from [File (F)] menu to save the settings in the PC, and transfer them to the DRYPRO722. The DRYPRO722 will automatically re-start up, and it will operate with the set parameters. The settings of the DRYPRO722 has been completed.
4-14
Blank page
Blank page
Printlink is a system that supports to multiple input modalities and output imagers. Set the entire system prior to initiating the installation of each input I/F. The following settings are required to set the entire system. 1. Setting the network. 2. Setting the Install PC 3. Setting the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
5-1
5.1 Setting the Network

Design the system configuration and make certain that all necessary equipment for setting the network is available. Furthermore, if the system is going to be complicated with an incorporation of a router, etc., leave such work to the person in charge.
5.1.1 Selecting the cable

For Printlink, use the (UTP) twisted pair cable (category 5) or higher. Note: Check local requirements for Phlymim cables
5.1.2 Selecting the hubs and switches

Hubs and switches are required when the network is set up for the first time or when more than one device is going to be installed. Please note the following points in such cases. 1. Capable of switching automatically between 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T
100BASET is required when the transfer speed between Printlinks is considered. Since some devices can only support
10BASET, ones that can switch automatically should be selected. 2. Open ports for future usage It is assumed that there will be more devices to connect to the network in the future. Therefore, a hub with more than the necessary number of ports at the time of purchase should be selected (including the Install / service PC - Laptop). 3. Switching function The switching function provides many advantages. With this function, high-speed communication, reduction in network traffic, as well as reduction of hub restriction within one segment becomes capable. When purchasing a new hub, please select one which comes with a switching function. 4. Stackable hub Hubs can be increased without decreasing ports, as hubs can be connected without using a port. Please purchase a device which fulfills the conditions in Items 1 to 3 above. For Item 4, judge whether these conditions are necessary per each facility.
5.1.3 Items to note for cascade connections between hubs

A cross cable is used for cascade connection using a normal port. However, a straight cable can be used if a cascade exclusive port exists. In such a case, connect one end of the cable to the cascade exclusive port, and the other end to a normal port. The exclusive port for cascade acts as a cross converter. Be sure not to connect both ends to the cascade exclusive port.
5.1.4 Items to note when connecting hubs that do not possess a switching function
There are limitations when making cascade connections for hubs that do not have a switching function. Only four levels for 10BASE, and two levels for 100BASE can be connected within one segment. Please be careful when making a connection to a network inside the hospital. Ask the hospital IS dept. for support in advance of configuring the Prinlink systems.
5.1.5 Wiring
Wiring must be performed at each facility.
5-2
5.2 Setting the Install PC

The following must be performed in advance to the Install PC. Installing a network card: 10BASE/100BASE-TX Installing a network protocol: TCP/IP Subnet mask: 255.255.240.0 Setting the IP address of the Install PC to 10.32.1.100.
Fig. 5.1 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box (Windows98 Japanese Version)
Fig. 5.2 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box (Windows98 English Version)
Setting log on to [Microsoft Network Client].
Fig. 5.3 Network Dialog Box (Windows98 Japanese Version) Windows log on User name:itr Password:itr
Fig. 5.4 Network Dialog Box (Windows98 English Version)
Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver.1.1 2001.3
5-3
5.3 Setting the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway

5.3.1 Obtaining an IP address
Confirm with the hospital and obtain an IP address before connecting each Printlink to the network. The default IP address is set as 10.32.15.x (x = last 1 digits of the serial number). Therefore, the IP address must be changed according to the local environment before connections are made to the hospital network. The default Subnet Mask is 255.255.240.0 NOTE: If a device with a same IP address is connected to the network, an network error will occur and a connection will not be able to be made. Confirm the IP address of the Printlink Install PC with the network manager of the hospital.
5.3.2 Setting the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

The IP Address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be checked when making connections to the hospital network. (For a local network only for Printlink, the default setting can be applied.) Confirm the settings for the Printlink network IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway with the hospital network manager. (In some cases, the network is managed by the manufacturer of the diagnostic device.)
(1)
Setting method
There are 2 setting methods, with limitations according to the version. a) Setting with tools All versions can be set using tools. 1. Turn OFF the power by pressing the Ready switch in the front panel until the status LED starts to blink, then connect the monitor, keyboard, and mouse. NOTE: The keyboard and mouse cannot be acknowledged when connections are made with the power ON. Furthermore, connecting peripheral devices with the power ON can damage the device, so be sure to turn OFF the power.
Power breaker switch AC input terminal
Cooling fan
Host control output terminal Ethernet terminal
Printlink controller input terminal
Digital input/output terminal, video input terminal * Changes according to the board.
Production No.
Rubber support
Fig. 5.5 Rear Panel
5-4
2. Turn the power ON. 3. Click WindowsNT [Setting] and [Control Panel], then double-click [Network]. 4. Select protocol, then click [Properties].
Fig. 5.6 Network Dialog Box (WindowsNT Japanese Version) 5. The screen shown in Figure 5.8 or 5.9 will appear. 6. Set the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway]. 7. Click [Apply] and [OK]. 8. The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway has been set.
Fig. 5.7 Network Dialog Box (WindowsNT English Version)
Fig. 5.8 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box (WindowNT Japanese Version)
Fig 5.9 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box (WindowsNT English Version)
5-5
b) Setting with an installation software Printlink main unit V1.04 or later versions and maintenance V1.04 or later versions can be set using the installation software. Refer to Section 20. for upgrading to Printlink main unit V1.04.) Please confirm that Printlink and the install PC are connected to the network. 1. Start up the installation software V1.04. 2. Click [Server Connection (B)] in the [File] menu, then connect the install PC and Printlink. 3. Click [Set IP Address/Work Buffer (F)] in the [File] menu, then open the [Set IP Address/Work Buffer] dialog box, set the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway], and click [Set].
Fig. 5.10 Set IP Address/Work Buffer Dialog Box 4. The setting will be complete by restarting Printlink after shutting it down once. NOTE: The setting will be neglected on the Printlink side if [Subnet Mask] or [Default Gateway] is [0.0.0.0]. NOTE: Only the [IP Address] can be changed by setting [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway] using installation software V1.04 for Printlink V1.03 or earlier versions.
5-6
5.4 Setting the HD Remaining Space and Log Data Mode

When 255 pages worth of input image cannot fit into the HD, this setting defines the remaining space. When the space goes below the set value, the oldest image will be deleted. The default value is 200MB, and if images per one frame exceeds 20MB, 300MB should be selected. The log data mode setting enables Printlink to save its operational records in the log. There are two modes which are the standard log and the detail log. For standard log, set at Event Log. For detail log, set at Detail Log.
Fig. 5.11 Set Environment Data Dialog Box
5-7
Blank page

6.1 Operating Environment
Table 6.1 Operating Environment CPU Memory HDD CRT LAN Board OS i486 or above 32MB or above 800MB 640 x 480 dots Required Windows95, 98, or Windows NT4.0
6.2 Connection
By connecting Printlink and the maintenance PC through ISDN line via the ISDN router, the installation software enables remote maintenance. The installation software has the following functions: Upgrading and downgrading Reading log data Reading the internal operation status Setting and reading the IF and network Setting LUT
6.3 Startup and Exit

Startup method: Double-click PLNKMTN.exe. Exit method: Click [Exit] under the [File (F)] menu in the menu bar or the close button.
6.4 Functional Description
Present status or description
Present IP address or host in connection
Fig. 6.1 Printlink Maintenance Window The following are the 5 menu items in the [Printlink Maintenance] window of the Printlink installation software. File (F) Set (S) Tool (T) Help (H) ... Operates Printlink environment file. (See Section 6.4.1.) ... Sets Printlink. (See Section 6.4.2.) ... Starts up and exits Desktop Delivery tool. (See Section 6.4.4.) ... Displays Printlink version information. (See Section 6.4.5.)
Watch (R) ... Monitors Printlink status. (See Section 6.4.3.)
6-1

6.4.1 File (F)
The following items are in the [File (F)] menu in the menu bar.
Fig. 6.2 File (F) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window Open (O) ... Displays the [Open Data File] dialog box to open an existing Printlink environment file. Close (C) Closes a Printlink environment file without ending the application. When non-saved changes are contained, a dialog box confirming whether or not to save the file will appear. Save (S) Saves a Printlink environment file under work in a designated location. Save As (A) ... Displays the [Save Data File] dialog box that indicates the location in which the Printlink environment file will be saved and a dialog box to input the file name. Main/Service Upgrade (G) ... Displays the [MAIN,SERVICE&DRIVER File Upgrade] dialog box (Fig. 6.3) to upgrade Printlink by designating a directory of the new version file.
Designate a directory
Display directories
Fig. 6.3 MAIN, SERVICE & DRIVER File Upgrade Dialog Box
6-2

Main Downgrade (D) ... Displays the [Exec.File Downgrade] dialog box to downgrade Printlink by selecting a version from the list box. (The version can be downgraded back two generations.)
Present version Version 1 generation before
Version 2 generations before
Fig. 6.4 Exec.File Downgrade Dialog Box Controller Upgrade (T) ... Displays the [Upgrade Controller] dialog box to upgrade the controller by designating the type and upgrade file. (Controller and Network Controller are the two controller types.)
Designate an upgrade file (Full-pass designation)
Fig. 6.5 Upgrade Controller Dialog Box Read Version & Set Serial No (E) ... Displays the [Set Serial No.] dialog box to check the serial number and version.
Fig. 6.6 Set Serial No. Dialog Box
6-3

Server Connection (B) ... Displays the [Change Server Connection] dialog box to set the IP address of the main Printlink unit that performs environment setting, upgrading/downgrading, and queue monitoring. After connection is made, this will be indicated on the status bar in the [Printlink Maintenance] window.
Fig. 6.7 Change Server Connection Dialog Box Set IP Address/Work Buffer (F) ... Displays the [Set IP Address/Work Buffer] dialog box to set the work buffer size of Digital_IN, Digital_Out, Video_IN, Digital_Video_IN, and HG_Video_IN.
Fig. 6.8 Set IP Address/Work Buffer Dialog Box Printlink -> PC (I) ... Sends the present environment file from Printlink to the maintenance PC. PC -> Printlink (P) Sends the set environment file from the maintenance PC to Printlink. Ocr Printlink -> PC (M) Sends the present mji file from Printlink to the maintenance PC. Ocr PC-> Printlink (N) Sends the set mji file from the maintenance PC to Printlink.
6-4

Read Log (L) ... Loads the designated Printlink log to the PC.
Fig. 6.9 Output Event Log & Error Log Dialog Box Reboot (R) Restarts Printlink. NOTE: The IP address must be designated in advance. Exit (E) Closes Printlink Maintenance. If changed but not-saved files are contained, a dialog box confirming whether or not to save the file will appear.
6-5

6.4.2 Set (S)
The following items are in the [Set (S)] menu in the menu bar.
Fig. 6.10 Set (S) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window
(1)
Channel (C) ...

Displays the [Set Channel Data] dialog box (Fig. 6.11) and shows a list of channel setting information.
Fig. 6.11 Set Channel Data Dialog Box Channel Channel/Printer Name Protocol Stamp Message Imager CHANGE ... Displays the channel number. ... Displays the set channel/printer name. ... Displays the set protocol. ... Displays the set stamp message. ... Displays the set imager. ... Displays the Change Channel Data dialog box. Refer to Section a) for details.
6-6

a) Change Channel Data Dialog Box
Fig. 6.12 Change Channel Data Dialog Box Channel No. Channel/Printer Name Protocol Name Not Used VIDEO IN DIGITAL VIDEO IN HG-VIDEO IN DIGITAL IN DIGITAL OUT INPUT Stamp Message Convert LUT OCR Study Image Size Check Rome -> KANA OCR Study Timeout OCR Default ID NAME Output OCR/DICOM Stamp OUTPUT Printer Name Connect Imager ... Displays the selected channel number. ... Input the channel/printer name. ... Select one of the following protocols. Toshiba IN HSTP OUT(Li-1417) DICOM PRINT IN DICOM PRINT OUT DICOM STORAGE IN DICOM STORAGE OUT ... Setting is possible only when the protocol is of an input attribute. ... Set the default stamp message to the film. ... Enable/disable LUT conversion when inputting. ... Enable/disable Study by character recognition. ... Perform a check when the input image size within one page differs. ... Japanese version only ... Input the time for Study Timeout for character recognition. This is the waiting time for the next store during Study. Queue is registered by Timeout. ... Input the default ID of the character recognition results. ... Input the default Name of the character recognition results. ... Not used. ... Setting is possible only when the protocol is of an output attribute. ... Input the printer name. ... Set the imager name of the connected device.
6-7

Stretch Base ... Select the image size. NoStretch PageMax Install Stretch Mode : The image size is output without being changed. : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one film. : The image size is adjusted to the size set in the input channel (same as the test pattern size). ... Select the interpolation method. BiLinear SP-Line Film Type 1 Film Type 2 b) FORMAT ERROR CODE SET OK CANCEL : For bilinear interpolation. : For SP-line interpolation. BiLinear+Edge : For bilinear and character enhancement interpolation. ... Set a film type of upper tray of the output imager. If there is only one tray in the output imager, this setting is not valid. ... Set a film type of lower tray of the output imager. This setting is for the output imager with only one tray. ... Set the output format. (Refer to b) Set Format Data dialog box.) ... ERROR CODE (Refer to c) Set Error Code dialog box.) ... Set the Protocol Name in detail. (Refer to d) Change Channel Data dialog box.) ... Enable the present setting and exit. ... Disable the present setting and exit.
For FORMAT and ERROR CODE, the setting can be performed only for the output protocol.
Set Format Data dialog box
Fig. 6.13 Set Format Data Dialog Box Imager Name Film Size DEFAULT CUSTOM FORMAT ... The name of the connected imager set by the Connect Imager is displayed. ... Select the film size and the format so that it can be used. ... The recommended size per imager is automatically selected. ... Display the next Set Custom Format Data dialog box.
6-8

Set Custom Format Data dialog box
Fig. 6.14 Set Custom Format Data Dialog Box c) Format ID ... Set the format ID. A maximum of 16 types can be registered. (80-8F) Film Size ... Set the valid film size. (More than one can be selected.) Rotate ... Enable/disable the rotating of an image. Slide ... Enable/disable slide. Format Mag ... Select the number of formats in which the image magnification are different. (1-3) Set Error Code dialog box This is a dialog box to make an error table that determines how to conform an error generated from the imager to Printlink.
Fig. 6.15 Set Error Code Dialog Box
Fig. 6.16 Change Error Code Dialog Box
DEFAULT ... Set the error code set in advance to each imager. Imager ... Displays the error code of the imager. Printlink ... Displays the error code of Printlink. CHANGE ... Displays the Set Error Code dialog box. Imager ... Displays the error code of the imager. Printlink ... Input the error code of Printlink.
6-9

d) Change Channel Data dialog box i) Set Modality IF Data (Video) dialog box For Video In, Digital Video In, and HG-Video In.
Fig. 6.17 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box I/O IF Type Serial Port ... Displays input or output. ... Displays the IF type. ... Set the serial port. COM1: Controller for the imager control COM2: Network controller Pixel Aspect Ratio Pixel Clock Output Pixels H Delay Size ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. ... Set the pixel clock value of the image. ... Set output to either 8bit or 12bit. ... Set the delay value from Hsync. ... Set the image size. H: The horizontal size of the image. V: The vertical size of the image. Back Porch H + sync Back Porch V Store Delay Interlace ... Set the number of pixels and sync signal from the horizontal sync to the image data. ... Set the number of pixels from the vertical sync to the image data. ... Set the time (sec) from when the IF receives a store command to when it returns a reply command. ... Set to Interlace or No Interlace. Interlace No Interlace Serration Pulse ODD/EVEN : Every other line of the image data will be returned. : The image data will be returned in order.
... Select ON or OFF for the serration pulse. ... Set the line during interlace. Normal Reverse : Does not reverse. : Reverses.
1H Delay Set Reverse
... Set the delay value. ... Set whether or not to reverse the image data. Normal Reverse : Does not reverse the image data. : Reverses the image data.
6-10

ii) Set Modality IF Data (Digital) dialog box For Digital In and Digital Out.
Fig. 6.18 Set Modality IF Data (Digital) Dialog Box IN/OUT Serial Port ... Displays input or output. ... Select the serial port. COM1 : Controller for the imager control COM2 : Network controller Priority Size ... Set the priority order of the size. Set Modality Input Pixels Output Pixels Pixel Aspect Ratio Size : The size is given priority regardless of the modality header info. : The modality header info is given priority.
... Set the pixel value to either 8bit or 12bit. ... Set output to either 8bit or 12bit. ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. ... Set the image size. H V : The horizontal size of the image. : The vertical size of the image. : Does not reverse the image data. : Reverses the image data.
Set Reverse
... Set whether to reverse the image data. Normal Reverse
Digital IF REQtoREQ Time ... Set the request interval between lines when receiving image data. Store Delay Store Header timeout Digital IF Output Speed Command Status timeout Store Image timeout ... Set the time (sec) from when the IF receives a store command to when it returns a reply command. ... Set the timeout length for the header info from modality. ... Set the digital output speed. ... Set the command timeout length for store with the imager. ... Set the timeout length for the reception and transmission of the image.
6-11

iii) Set TOSHIBA Data dialog box For Toshiba IN.
Fig. 6.19 Set TOSHIBA Data Dialog Box Mag Type SPLINE Mag Coe Serial Port Imager Not Ready ... Set the interpolation type. ... Set the coefficient of SPLINE. ... Port for connecting to the network controller. Select COM2. ... Set whether to accept or reject data received when the imager is still preparing. Reject : Does not receive data. Accept : Receives data. Size ... Set the image size. H V Output Pixels Store Display Store Timeout MAG WAY LUT WAY : The horizontal size of the image. : The vertical size of the image.
... Set output to either 8bit or 12bit. ... Set whether or not to display the store indication of the network controller. ... Set the timeout length for transmission and reception. ... An interpolation command table for converting Toshiba's interpolation data to Printlink's internal data value. ... A LUT command table for converting Toshiba's LUT data to Printlink's internal data value.
6-12

iv) Set HSTP Data dialog box For HSTP OUT (Li-1417).
Fig. 6.20 Set HSTP Data Dialog Box Sheet Data Max Image Size Sheet Type ... Displays the set values of the sheet data. ... Set the value of the maximum image size. ... Set one of the following sheet types. Normal Test Setup Master Lut Remap Lut Tag Type Brief Extended Lut Select ... Set LUT. ImagineSP MasterLut Pixel Size : LUT data held per film will be used. : LUT data held by the imager will be used. : Normal sheet type : Test sheet type : Setup sheet type : Master Lut sheet type : Remap Lut sheet type : A tag is processed in a simple format. : A tag is processed in a detailed format.
... Set one of the following tag types.
... Set the pixel size. Auto : Selects 75 or 90 automatically. 75 90 : Operates at 75 fixed. : Operates at 90 fixed.
Interpolation Curve Type
... Set the interpolation type. ... Set the curve type. Automatic Custom : Set at automatic computation. : Printlink set LUT data.
Density
... Set the maximum and minimum value for density.

6-13

Automatic Computation Window Start End Pivot Density Pivot Gray Level Contrast Curve Shoulder Toe Brightness Nega/Posi Rotate : Minimum pixel value that one image can obtain. : Maximum pixel value that one image can obtain. : Density value per image parameter. : Gray ratio per image parameter. : Contrast value. : Right counter of the LUT curve. : Left counter of the LUT curve. : Brightness of the image. ... Set the output imager. This is set because nega/posi differ depending on the imager. ... Set the rotating direction. None : No rotation Right : 90 degree rotation to the right Left Version TTO Retry : 90 degree rotation to the left ... Set the imager version. ... Set the number of times of the imager's finisher check.
Retry Interval ... Set the retry interval (sec) with the imager for one print. Retry Count ... Set the retry count with the imager for one print. Request Status ... Set the ON/OFF and interval for periodical communication.
6-14

v) Set DICOM Data dialog box For DICOM PRINT IN/OUT and DICOM STORAGE IN/OUT.
Fig. 6.21 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box Protocol Serial Port ... Displays the protocol name. ... Set the serial port. COM1 : Controller for imager control COM2 : Network controller Size AE Title ... Set the image size. ... Set the AE title. (SCP): Input side (SCU): Output side Port No. Modality Output Pixels PDU Size Socket Buf Private Data Print N-EVENT Port No. Max Density Output EVENT-REPORT Output Kind EK Mode Conversion Type ... Set the protocol port number. ... Set the modality. ... Set output to either 8bit or 12bit. ... A DICOM parameter is used. (Please leave this at default.) ... Set the socket buffer. (Please leave this at default.) ... Set the DICOM Konica Private Tag. (Please leave this at default.) ... Set in the case of DICOM PRINT IN/OUT. ... Set the port number for N-EVENT. ... Set the maximum density. ... Set whether or not to output N-EVENT. ... Set whether to output with BIN_XX or with a processor. ... Set the EK Mode ON or OFF. ... Set the image conversion type. DV ID : Video, HG Video, Digital Video : Digital
Storage ... Set in the case of DICOM STORAGE OUT.
WSD : Network
6-15

Image Type Secondary Capture Device Video Image Acquired Digital Image Manufacturer Digital Image Acquired Institution Name Institution Address Output VOI LUT Output Name OCR Other1 Use OCR Other2 Use ... Set normally to DERIVED-SECONDARY. ... Input the discrimination name for Printlink if requested from the connected party. A maximum of 64 characters can be input. E.g. Printlink-IV ... Not used. ... Not used. ... Not used. ... Input the facility name if requested from the connected party. A maximum of 128 characters can be input. ... Input the facility address if requested from the connected party. A maximum of 512 characters can be input. ... Used when sending Printlink LUT data to the filing device. ... Set the output name. ... Select the data set in OCR Other1. ... Select the data set in OCR Other2.
(2)
Route (R) ...

The Set Route Data dialog box is displayed to set the Route.
Fig. 6.22 Set Route Data Dialog Box
The Change Route Data dialog box appears by clicking [Change].
Fig. 6.23 Change Route Data Dialog Box
6-16

Route ID Route Name Input Output Set Default ID ... Displays the route ID number. ... Enter the route name. This is displayed on the controller. ... Set the input channel number. It is also the area to set the subjected IP address in the case of network I/F. ... Set the output channel number. It is also the area to set the subjected IP address in the case of network I/F. Two channels can be set for output. ... Select which to set as default when multiple routes are set.
(3)
Env (I)
The Set Environment Data dialog box appears to display or set the information of the main unit.
Fig. 6.24 Set Environment Data Dialog Box Serial Port HD Space Warning Log Data Output Mode ... Displays the setting information of COM1 and COM2. ... Set the remaining HD space to signal a warning. When the remaining space for Printlink falls below this space, an old file will be deleted. ... Set the Printlink log output mode. Event Log: Normal mode Detail Log: Outputs a detailed log.
6-17

(4) LUT (L)
The Set LUT Data dialog box appears to set the internal LUT pattern.
Fig. 6.25 Set LUT Data Dialog Box LUT Set Basic Pattern DECISION CONVERT SMPTE UP/DOWN LEFT/RIGHT SMOOTH LINEAR COPY DMIN DMAX 01.- 16. ... Displays the subject set. Displays the set LUT. (Channels 1-18, HSTP 1-8) (LUT 1-8) ... Set the stored basic pattern. ... Determines the values set in 01 to 16 and reflects them to the graph. ... Converts from pixel value to density value. ... Conforms the horizontal axis to SMPTE pattern. ... Moves the LUT inclination up and down. ... Shifts the LUT value to the right and left. ... Interpolates and smoothens the set data. ... Connects DMIN and DMAX data with a straight line. ... Copies LUT. ... Input the minimum value. ... Input the maximum value. ... Input the LUT value for steps 01. to 16.
6-18

6.4.3 Watch (R)
The following items are under [Watch (R)] in the menu bar.
Fig. 6.26 Watch (R) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window
(1)
Channel (C)...
The Watch Channel Status dialog box is displayed and the status for each channel is indicated.
Fig. 6.27 Watch Channel Status Dialog Box Channel Channel Name Protocol Error Code Stop Print Status Route ID INPUT OUTPUT NEW STATUS DISP ... Set the channel number. ... Displays the channel name. ... Displays the protocol name. ... Displays the error code. ... Displays the print status. ... Displays the channel status. ... Displays the route ID. ... Displays the Printlink input information. ... Displays the Printlink output information. ... Obtains the updated information. ... Displays the image.
6-19

(2) Queue (P) ...
The Watch Output Queue dialog box is displayed and the Printlink queue information is indicated.
Fig. 6.28 Watch Output Queue Dialog Box Channel No. Page No. NEW STATUS DELETE PAGE NEXT PREV DISP IMAGE SAVE IMAGE ... Set the channel number. ... Set the page number. ... Obtains the updated information. ... Deletes page information. ... Moves to the next queue. ... Moves to the previous queue. ... Displays the image screen. ... Saves the image in a BMP format.
6-20

(3) Status (I) ...
The Watch Status dialog box is displayed and the Printlink status information is indicated.
Fig. 6.29 Watch Status Dialog Box
6-21

6.4.4 Remote maintenance tool (desktop delivery)
This following section describes the method to integrate the remote maintenance software that enables setup from Printlink V1.10 without the use of the monitor, keyboard, or mouse.
(1)
Installing Desktop Delivery to the maintenance PC

DD.exe, which is found inside the Desktop Deliver folder, is distributed from the Printlink V1.10 software. Double-click DD.exe from the maintenance PC and follow the instructions to install.
Fig. 6.30 Welcome Window
(2)
Startup method from the maintenance software

a) Startup method Start up the Printlink remote software (Server DD Agent) by selecting [Start (S)] under the [Tool (T)] menu in the tool bar of the Printlink maintenance software V1.10 as shown in Fig. 6.31.
Fig. 6.31 Tool (T) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window
6-22

b) Usage Start up the remote software's Desktop Delivery DD Manager which was installed in advance. Select Connect in the [File (F)] menu, link and display the main Printlink desktop by setting the Printlink IP address or host name and the password (itr).
Fig. 6.32 Example of the Desktop Delivery Display c) Operating method Printlink can be operated with the maintenance PC mouse and keyboard within the displayed area of the desktop. For detailed instructions, refer to Help in the tool bar. d) Exiting method Exit the remote software by clicking [Stop (t)] under the [Tool (T)] menu in the tool bar of Printlink maintenance software V1.10. NOTE: When using Desktop Delivery in the remote software, be sure to close the remote software on the Printlink side. A heavy load will be applied to the computer when this software is operating, and may hinder normal operation.
6-23

6.4.5 Help (H)
The following item is under [Help (H)] in the menu bar.
(1)
Version Information (A)

The following window is displayed and the version information of the present Printlink will appear.
Fig. 6.33 Printlink Maintenance Window
Fig. 6.34 Version Information Dialog Box
6.5 Compatibility of the Maintenance Software

Table 6.2 Compatibility of Printlink V1.10 Maintenance Software Main unit V1.05 or earlier Upgrade OK Main unit V1.10 Remarks
OK
Install
NO
OK Data of V1.05 can be read, however, received data will be converted to V1.10 format.
Read install data
OK
OK
Watch queue
NO
OK
Remote tool
NO
OK
Read log
NO
OK
The software for V1.10 can only upgrade Printlink V1.05 or earlier versions and read installed data. Furthermore, V1.10 main unit cannot be operated with the V1.05 maintenance software.
6-24
6.6 Error Message

6.6.1 Error message titles
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 English Protocol Error Errorcode Data Error Format Data Error LUT Data Error Set Error Input Error Connection Error Correcting Method Check the protocol and set an appropriate one. Check the modified data, and input the correct data. Check the format information, and set the correct information. Check the LUT data, and input the correct data. Check the set contents, and correct the setting. Check the input contents, and input the correct contents. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check to see if a write protection is exerted on the file. Check to see if the contents of the image file is correct. Turn the power OFF/ON and try again. Check to see if directory files are overloaded, or whether it lacks drive space. Check to see if the selected directory is correct. Turn the power OFF/ON and try again. Restart or reinstall the running file. Close the running application and restart. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check to see if an image data file exists or if another process is opened. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check to see if there is efficient memory space. Check the custom format info data, and input the correct data.
Communication Error
Windows Version Error
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
File Error Image Display Error Image File Save Error Directory Error Directory Reference Error Device Error Disp Dialog Error Printlink Execute Error
18
System Error
19
Image File Open Error
20
Image File Read Error
21 22
Memory Allocate Error Custom Format Data Error
6-25

6.6.2 Message titles
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 English Confirmation Confirmation Upgrade Downgrade Sending Data Receiving Data Initializing Saving Data Reading Data Deleting Page Rebooting Connection Standby Changing IP Address/Work Buffer Click the OK button. Click the OK button. Wait until upgrading is completed. Wait until downgrading is completed. Wait until data is sent. Wait until data is received. Wait until initialization is completed. Wait until data is saved. Wait until data is read. Wait until the page is deleted. Wait until Printlink starts up. Wait until link is made to Printlink. Wait until the IP address and work buffer is modified. Correcting Method
6.6.3 Error Message

No 1 English Printlink IP address not set. Set the correct IP address. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Reboot or reinstall the running file. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Reboot or reinstall the running file. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Start up Printlink manually. Reinstall the running file. Use an application that is already running. Correcting Method
Cannot connect to Printlink
Cannot display
Data read unsuccessful
Data write unsuccessful
Data delete unsuccessful
Data send unsuccessful
Data receive unsuccessful.
9 10 11
Cannot reboot Printlink. Reboot manually for proper operation. Cannot Execute Version error Application already running.
6-26
12
Printlink connection failure.
Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Input the directory.
13 14 15 16 17 18
No directory input.
Specified directory does not exist. Use a directory that exists, or make a new directory. Cannot create directory. No IP address input. Input IP address using values between 0 and 255. Inappropriate IP address Cannot send IP address change instruction A directory cannot be created, so use the existing directory. Set an IP address with a controller panel protocol. Input an IP address in which the value is from 0 to 255. Set an address appropriately with the controller panel network. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the modified contents and try again. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents
19
20
Cannot send reboot instruction.
21
IP address/work buffersize change unsuccessful Cannot send version information request.
22
23
Cannot receive version information reply.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Cannot obtain version information due to file being used Close the file in use and try again. by Printlink. Cannot display image. Cannot save image data. Drive not ready. Check the contents of the image file. Turn the power OFF/ON and try again. Prepare the drive.
Directory reference unsuccessful. Turn the power OFF/ON and try again. Inappropriate IP address setting. Identical input and output channel numbers. Input IP address using format of "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". Input IP address using format of "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx-xxx". Input route name using singlebyte characters. Set from output channel 1. Cannot set only one channel. Set a correct IP address. Input the input/output channel number accurately. Input the IP address using a format of [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]. Input the address using a format of [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX] [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXXXX]. Input the route name using single-byte characters. Set from output channel 1. Set both the input and output channels.
32
33 34 35
6-27
36
Input stamp message using double-byte characters. (Input stamp message using single-byte characters.) Input stamp message using double-byte characters. (Input printer name using singlebyte characters.) Specified file does not exist. Missing file name. File copy unsuccessful.
When using an English-version OS, input the stamp message using single-byte characters.
37
When using an English-version OS, input the printer name using single-byte characters. Select an existing file. Input the file name. Check to see if write protection is exerted in the space on the Printlink side or on an existing file. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Input the serial number. Input the serial number using single-byte characters. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Installed contents Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side
38 39 40
41
Controller upgrade unsuccessful. Confirm controller connection. Network controller upgrade unsuccessful. Confirm network controller connection. Missing serial number. Input serial number using singlebyte alphanumerics.
42
43 44
45
Message send unsuccessful.
46 47 48 49
Message receive unsuccessful.
Socket initialization unsuccessful. Retry or retry after turning the power OFF/ON. Client side socket address assignments unsuccessful. Client side socket Generation unsuccessful. Server IP address acquisition unsuccessful. Server socket connection failure. Client does not exist. No IP address. Network drive assign unsuccessful. Retry or retry after turning the power OFF/ON Retry or turn the power OFF/ON, then retry. Check the following items: Cable connection Setup on the modality side Check to see if Printlink is running or check the socket condition on the Printlink side. Check the device to be connected. Set the IP address. Check to see if Printlink is running or if a network is connected.
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Cannot use obtained request data. Check to see if Printlink is running or check the socket condition on the Printlink side. Inappropriate directory name. Missing necessary files for upgrade. File copy unsuccessful. Check the designated directory. Install the necessary files. Check to see if write protection is exerted on the running file or if the file has been started.
6-28
59 60 61
Missing necessary files for downgrade. Inappropriate version specification. Work file deletion unsuccessful. Log control data/error log control data file generation unsuccessful. Reboot Printlink manually. Cannot obtain default values of imager [%s] Cannot obtain default values of imager [%s] film size [%s] [%s] [%s] . Cannot obtain [%s] pattern values. Cannot obtain default values of format ID [0x%02x] [0x%02x] [0x%02x] . Cannot open image data file. Cannot read image data file. Output queue file deletion unsuccessful. Image data file deletion unsuccessful. Memory allocate unsuccessful. Input channel/printer name using single-byte characters. Input OCR default ID using double-byte alphanumerics. (Input OCR default ID using single-byte alphanumerics.) Input OCR default name using double-byte characters. (Input OCR default name using single-byte characters.) Input AE-Title using single-byte characters. Unpredicted error. Identical port number and NEVENT- REPORT port number. No OCR default ID input. Inappropriate X count setting. Inappropriate Y count setting. Cannot obtain default values of custom format.
Install the inefficient files. Designate a correct version and start. Check to see if write protection is exerted on the work file. Check to see if write protection is exerted on the selected directory, or check the drive space. Start up Printlink manually. Create an error code conversion file in the same directory as PLNKMENT.exe, or check the imager data. Create a format info data file in the same directory as PLNKMENT.exe, or check the data of the imager film size. Create pattern set value file in the same directory as PLNK.exe, or check the data of the pattern value. Select a file with data consisting of format ID 0x80-0x8F, or check the custom format info data. Check to see if an image data file exists, or if another process is opened. Check to see if an image data file exists, or if another process is opened. Check to see if another process is opened. Check to see if another process is opened. Check to see if there is efficient amount of space. Input the channel/printer names using single-byte characters.
62
63 64
65
66
67 68 69 70 71 72 73
74
When using an English-version OS, input the OCR default ID using single-byte alphanumerics.
75
When using an English-version OS, input the OCR default name using single-byte characters.
76 77 78 79 80 81 82
Input the AE title using single-byte characters. Check to see if the usage is accurate and try again. Set a different value to the port number and the port number for the N-EVENTREPORT. Input an OCR default ID. Set the correct X count. Set the correct Y count. Select a file with data consisting of format ID from 0x80-0x8F.
6-29
Blank page

7.1 Common Items for All Input
The following are common items for all input. Channel/Printer Name Stamp Message Convert LUT Image Size Check OCR Study Rome -> KANA OCR Study Timeout OCR Default ID OCR Default NAME : Input the name of the connected device. : Set the default of the stamp message to put in the film. : Set ON/OFF for LUT conversion during input. : (Only for DIGITALIN, ToshibaIN, DICOMPRINTIN, and DICOMSTRAGEIN.) Check if the input image size in one page is different. : (Valid when OCR is set.) Set ON/OFF for OCR Study. : Japanese version only. : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the time for OCR Study Timeout. This is the waiting time for the next store during Study. Queue registration will be made with Timeout. : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the default ID of the OCR result. : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the default name of the OCR result.
Fig. 7.1 Change Channel Data Dialog Box
7-1
7.2 Setting Each Input

Select set in the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box to set each input. 1. Display the Change Channel Data dialog box. Click [Channel (C)] under the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window.
Fig. 7.2 Set (S) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window. 2. Allocate ToshibaIN in Channel 1. Click Channel 1 and select [ToshibaIN] for the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box. Select a protocol that matches the connected device.
Fig. 7.3 Change Channel Data Dialog Box * A protocol is a procedure or agreement required to communicate with the connected device. For Printlink, one protocol is allocated to one channel. Refer to the following sections for specific setting procedures. 8. Setting the Video I/F 9. Setting the Digital I/F 10. Setting the Digital Video IF 11. Setting the Video HG I/F 7.3 Setting Toshiba Ether Input 7.4 Setting DICOM PRINT Input 7.5 Setting DICOM STRAGE Input
7-2
7.3 Setting Toshiba Ether Input

1. Select Toshiba IN for the protocol name, click [Set] and display the Set TOSHIBA Data dialog box.
Fig. 7.4 Set TOSHIBA Data Dialog Box 2. Set each item Mag Type This is the magnifying interpolation method for the image when there is an image and overlay. There are three types: SPLINE, BILINEAR, and REPLICATE. Please use SPLINE which is the default. Processing when the overlay is larger than the image: Overlay Image Image + Overlay
Processing when the image is larger than the overlay: Image Image + Overlay
Overlay
Fig. 7.5 Example of Toshiba Image
7-3

Serial Port A port to connect a network controller. Choose COM2. Imager Not Ready A setting to receive or reject an image from the Toshiba diagnostic device when the imager is in preparation. By selecting Accept, images can be received even during preparation. Reject will not receive any images and return an error to the Toshiba diagnostic device. This should normally be set at Accept. Store Timeout A setting for the length of timeout during image transmission. When an image is being sent even after the set time, reception will be cancelled. Size Input the largest image size among the image sizes received from Toshiba Ether. This size is used as the image size to check the format as inputting the image size. MAG WAY A setting to convert Smooth. This shows which Smooth held by the imager corresponds to the contents of Smooth set from Toshiba.
Smooth set from a Toshiba diagnostic device. Imager Smooth after conversion.
Fig. 7.6 Toshiba MAG WAY Setting When the setting is as shown in the figure, if data is sent from a Toshiba diagnostic device by REPLICATE, and in the case of Smooth OFF, TYPE0, Smooth 2 will be set in the imager.
7-4

LUT WAY LUT WAY converts the designated value of LUT in the Toshiba Ether protocol and the LUT value on the controller.
LUT set from the Toshiba diagnostic device. Imager LUT after conversion.
Fig. 7.7 Toshiba LUT WAY Setting When set as shown in Fig. 7.7, LUT TYPE 1 will be set in the imager when LUT TYPE0 data is sent from the diagnostic device. 3. Click [OK] when all settings are completed and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog. This will complete the setting for Toshiba IN.
7-5
7.4 Setting the DICOM PRINT Input

Confirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting. The IP address of the connected device. The AE title and port number of the other party if the input source is other than Printlink. The port number can be set from 1 to 65535, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers.
Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316 and 5317. For USA, our convention is to use 7000 series port numbers.
7.4.1 Setting the DICOM PRINT input

1. Set the DICOM PRINT IN Protocol When a DICOM PRINT IN protocol is allocated, [Set] in the Change Channel dialog box becomes active. Click [Set] and display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.
Fig. 7.8 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box 2. Set the items related to the entire DICOM. Serial Port Port No. PDU Size Size H/V AE Title (SCP) : The network controller becomes usable when COM2 is selected. : Input the port number designated by the connected device. USA: e.g. 7000,7010,7020,etc.. : Set the PDU size. : Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity. : Input the AE title of your own device. If the connection is between Printlinks, the default can be used. However, if some other device is connected to more than one Printlink, it should be changed when a unique AE title is required. AE Title (SCU) : Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set. Modality Socket Buf Output Pixels Store Display : Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected. : Set the socket buffer. (Default is 256.) : Set the pixel size of the image data to be transmitted. : Set the store status display of the network controller.
7-6

3. Perform the settings for DICOM PRINT. N-EVENT Port No.: When the connected device is Printlink-OD, perform the same setting as the N-EVENT Port No. of the other party. Output EVENT REPORT: When the connected device is Printlink, set to GO. When connecting to a device other than Printlink, select Cancel. When this setting is applied when connecting two Printlinks, asynchronous errors such as film empty will appear in the Printlink controller on the input side. 4. When all settings are completed, click [OK] and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog box. This will complete setting for Dicom Print In.
7.4.2 Connecting a different company's DICOM

Connection with another company's DICOM is limited to one that has been gone through a connection test and listed in the "DICOM Connection Results Table". Exchange information between both sides and check the following points upon making a connection. AE Title Port No. For DICOM PRINT IN/DICOM STORAGE IN (SCP side), the port number is the one set on your side. For DICOM PRINT OUT/DICOM STORAGE OUT (SCU side), the port number is the one set on the other party's side. IP Address Version
Confirm the above points to set DICOM.
7-7
7.5 Setting the DICOM STORAGE Input

Confirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting. The IP address of the connected device. The AE title and port number of the other party if the input source is other than Printlink. The port number of 1-65535 can be set, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers.
Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316 and 5317

1. Set the DICOM STORAGE IN Protocol When a DICOM STORAGE IN protocol is allocated, [Set] in the Change Channel Data dialog box becomes active. Click [Set] and display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.
Fig. 7.9 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box 2. Set the items related to the entire DICOM. Serial Port: The network controller becomes usable when COM2 is selected. Port No.: Input the port number. PDU Size: Set the PDU size. Size H/V: Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity. AE Title (SCP): Input the AE title of your own device. The AE title should be unique. AE Title (SCU): Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set. Modality: Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected. Socket Buf: Set the socket buffer. (Default is 256.) Output Pixels: Set the pixel size of the image data to be transmitted. Store Display: Set the store status display of the network controller.
7-8

3. When all settings are completed, click [OK] and return to the Change Channel Data dialog box. This will complete setting for DICOM STORAGE IN. 4. For connection with another company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.
7-9
Blank page

8.1 Configuration
Video I/F Unit 1 set (consists of 2 boards)
8.2 Specifications
Input Signal Composite Video Video + Composite-sync Video + Separate-sync Combination of above + External Clock Pixel Clock Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Max. Input Image Size Memory Configuration Jitter Delay Clock 3.75-60MHz 5-40kHz 15-70Hz 2048 x 1024 (increments of 4 pixels in horizontal direction) 2MB x 1 side 2nsec or less Internal Clock External Clock Max. 127nsec in 0.5nsec increment. Max. 30nsec in 2nsec increment.
(with phase splitter) Resolution S/N Ratio Bus Configuration 8bit 42dB (1 digit) PCI 32bit
8.3 Block Diagram

8.3.1 Block diagram of video I/F
Memory Board
Frame Memory 2MB
PCI Bus 32bit
Video Signal Sync Signal
Analog PLL
A/D Converter 32bit Converter
Memory Controller
PCI I/F
Fig. 8.1 Block Diagram of Video I/F
8-1

8.3.2 Video signal input section
indicates jumper.
indicates default.
Fig. 8.2 Block Diagram of the Video signal Input Section
8-2
8.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting

8.4.1 Silk print and parts layout diagrams
(1) Video I/F analog section Parts layout diagram ... Fig. 8.4 (2) Video I/F analog section Silk diagram ... Fig. 8.5 (3) Video I/F digital section Parts layout diagram ... Fig. 8.6 (4) Video I/F digital section Silk diagram ... Fig. 8.7
8.4.2 Connector
J1 J2 J3 J4
Fig. 8.3 Rear Panel of the Board
J1 VS
Video Signal Input Connector * 0.5-2.0Vp-p
J2 CS/HD
CS (Composite Sync) Input (during Composite Sync) HD (H Sync) Input Connector (during Separate Sync) * TTL level (75)
J3 VD
VD (V Sync) Input Connector (during Separate Sync) * TTL level (75)
J4 EXTCLK
EXT CLK Input Connector * TTL, ECL level (75)
8-3
Video I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Terminal / Jumper Pin / Volume)
Test Pin Jumper Pin Volume
LED
Video Input Signal
CS/HD
VD External Clock
Connector for Video-Digital Board
Fig. 8.4 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)
8-4
Video I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram
Fig. 8.5 Silk Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)
8-5
Video I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pin)

Check Pin Non-installed Check Pin
Connector for Video-Analog Board PCI Connector
Fig. 8.6 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Digital Section)
8-6
Video I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram
Fig. 8.7 Silk Diagram (Video I/F Digital Section)
8-7
Blank page

8.4.3 LED
(1) Checking the board operation
LED1 (POWER) Green : Power supply (+5V)
(2)
Checking the video input operation

LED2 (NO VIDEO) Red LED3 (PLL LOCK) Yellow LED4 (A/D START) Yellow : Lights when no sync signal is input : Lights when PLL is locked : Lights one time (for 0.5sec) when image data is stored.
8.4.4 Jumper
(1) Setting for different sync signals
Table 8.1 Jumper Setting for Different Sync Signals JP No. Sync Signal Composite Video (VS) Composite Sync Minus (-) Plus (+) HD minus (-) Separate Sync HD plus (+) VD minus (-) VD plus (+) Default Setting (VS) JP7 VD NOR INV NOR JP9 HD NOR INV NOR INV NOR JP8 SYNC VS CS CS CS CS CS CS VS JP11 HHR VS CS CS CS CS CS CS VS JP12 O/E VS VS VS SEP SEP SEP SEP VS JP14 HD VS VS VS SEP SEP SEP SEP VS JP17 VD VS VS VS SEP SEP SEP SEP VS JP13 CLAMP VS VS VS SEP SEP SEP SEP VS JP15 VDET VS VS VS SEP SEP SEP SEP VS
NOTE: * [VS] and [CS] in the table indicate silk print coding on the board. * Composite Video : A normal composite signal (1 composite signal). * Composite Sync : The video signal and CS (composite sync) are separate (I signal, 1 sync) * Separate Sync : The video signal, HD, and VD are separate (1 signal, 2 sync).
Descriptions of the above jumper functions: JP7 (VD) JP9 (HD) JP8 (SYNC) JP11 (HHR) JP12 (O/E) JP14 (HD) JP17 (VD) JP13 (CLAMP) JP15 (VDET) : : : : : : : : : To set the polarity of separate sync (VD). To set the polarity of composite sync and separate sync (HD). To set either composite video or composite sync for the sync signal. To set either composite video or composite sync for HD. To select either separate sync or composite sync for O/E. To select either separate sync or composite sync for HD. To select either separate sync or composite sync for VD. To select either separate sync or composite sync for CLAMP. To set either separate sync or composite sync for the pulse that inhibits the phase comparison circuit.
8-8

(2) Setting for different signal status
Table 8.2 Jumper Setting for Different Signal Status Change of adjustment range for ODD/EVEN and clamp pulse detection. Change according to the horizontal frequency of the signal. Selection of AC/DC signal for video signal. Set to AC connection when the black level voltage exceeds 0.4V. ON/OFF of 75 termination of the input signal. Not to be changed basically. Selection between balance and unbalance for the video signal input. BAL (Balance) should be selected when the potential of the GND of the signal is not 0V. ON/OFF of filter. Use when noise of high frequency element exists in the input signal. Selection of polarity for the external clock. Reverse to increase the amount of delay.*1 H: (Horizontal frequency 20kHz or above)* L: (Horizontal frequency 20kHz or below) DC: (DC COUPLING)* AC: (AC COUPLING) TRM: (Termination ON)* OFF: (Termination OFF) UB: (Unbalance)* BAL: (Balance) DIR: (Not used)* FIL: (Used) NOR: (Normal)* INV: (Reverse) *: Default setting
JP4
JP5
JP6
JP16
JP18
JP19
*1 The amount of delay for the external clock is 0-30ns in 2nsec increment. A wider variable capacity can be obtained by reversing the clock when the signal frequency is low. (Max. 60ns)
Example : The clock width (width of 1 pixel) for 20MHz signal should be 50ns. 1. In the NOR setting, set the delay to 0-30ns. 2. When set to INV, intake of the signal is delayed by half a pixel value (25ns), and a delay of 25ns can be considered.
30ns
50ns
NOR The timing (activation) of intake shifts half a pixel.
INV
30ns
Total 55ns
3. 25-55ns can be actually set when setting the delay to 0-30ns in the INV setting. > As a result of 1. and 3., 0-55ns can be set.
8-9

(3) Setting the PLL
Change the PLL setting when the clock jitter cannot be picked up sufficiently. Table 8.3 Jumper Setting for PLL 1: (R75 20k)* JP2 (FIL2) 2: (R74 100k) 3: (Adjust RV9 FIL2) 1: (R89 330k) JP3 (FIL1) 2: (R76 470k) 3: (Adjust RV10 FIL3) * : Default setting Normally, making adjustment with the RV8 adjuster (FIL1) is sufficient. However, when jitter reduction cannot be improved with other methods, change the setting. 1. Set JP3 to 1 and adjust RV8. 2. Set JP3 to 3 and adjust RV8, 10. 3. Set JP2 to 2 and adjust RV8, 10. 4. Set JP2 to 3 and adjust RV8, 9, 10. If improvement cannot be seen after making the above changes, there may be a different problem. Therefore, reset to the original setting.
(4)
Other jumpers
Table 8.4 Setting for Other Jumpers
JP10(TST)
Open*
Pin to use for adjustment (not used) * : Default setting
8-10

8.4.5 Descriptions of volumes
RV1 (VBD) RV3 (CP) RV4 (5V) RV6 (WHT) RV8 (FIL1) RV9 (FIL2) RV10 (FIL3) RV11 (BLK) RV2 (COM) RV5 (HHR) RV7 (SET) : Adjusts the pulse width that makes signals for PLL hold for signals without any serration pulse. : Adjusts the phase of the clamp pulse upon separate sync. : Adjusts 5V used in the PLL circuit. : Adjusts the white level of the AD conversion signal. : Adjusts the filter of PLL. : Adjusts the filter of PLL. (Used when a jumper pin is inserted in JP2-3.) : Adjusts the filter of PLL. (Used when a jumper pin is inserted in JP3-3.) : Adjusts the black level of the A/D conversion signal. : Adjusts the comparator voltage that detects the sync signal from a composite video. : Adjusts the signal that eliminates a 1/2H signal. : Adjusts ODD/EVEN and the clamp pulse signal.
8.4.6 Descriptions of test pins

TP6 TP18 TP19 TP21 TP22 TP23, 24, 25 TP29, 30, 31, 32 TP1 (CP) TP2 (HHR1) TP3 (HD1) TP4 (VD) TP5 (VCO) TP7 (VBD) TP8 (CS) TP9 (O/E) TP10 (COM) TP11 (A/D) TP12 (IN) TP13 (HHR2) TP14 (FB) TP15 (FA) TP16 (HD2) TP17 (CLK) TP20 (VID) : +5V : +5.5VA : -5VA : +5V : -5.2V : AGND : GND : Clamp pulse : Composite sync signal to make HD : Hsync signal : Vsync signal : Output signal of PLL : Signal to make PLL hold signal : Composite sync signal : ODD/EVEN detection signal of an interlace signal : Threshold voltage for sync separation (compare with TP20) : A/D conversion input signal : Video input signal : Signal to obtain 1/2H sync signal : Standard signal of PLL : Divided signal of oscillation frequency : Delayed Hsync signal : Pixel clock (A/D input clock) : Video signal (minus (-))
8-11
8.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board

8.5.1 Checking the operation (checking the LED)
Refer to Section 8.4.3 and check the LED.
(1)
LED1 (POWER) Green

Extinguished ... +5V signal is not supplied to the board. 1. Check the power source voltage of the main Printlink unit. 2. Check the +5V of the board (TP21).
(2)
LED2 (NOVIDEO) Red

Lit ... Cannot detect video signal / Lights when HD signal is not present 1. Check the connections. 2. Check the signal (presence of serration pulse, interlace/non-interlace). 3. Check the setting (jumper setting of separate sync, RV7 (SET), etc.) 4. Check HD1 (TP3). 5. Check the COM level. Check the threshold value of the sync separation circuit. 6. Check the relation between HHR 1 and 2. Readjust by referring to Section 8.6.3 (8).
(3)
LED3 (PLL LOCK) Yellow

Extinguished ... Cannot lock PLL (Cannot read the image data) / During EXTCLK. 1. Check the presence of a signal. 2. Check the setting of the installation software and board (jumper, etc.) 3. Readjust the video. 4. Check the waveform (TP15 (FA), TP14 (FB), etc.) 5. Readjust the PLL lock by referring to Section 6.4.4 (3).
(4)
LED4 (A/D START) Yellow

Lights one time (0.5sec) at the start of image input Normal. Does not light at the start of image input Cannot read the image data. 1. Check the connections. 2. Readjust the video. 3. Check the waveform (TP2 (HHR1), TP13 (HHR2), TP16 (HD2), TP4 (VD))
8-12

8.5.2 Checking the power source
+12V, -12V, +5V, -5.2V, +5.5VA, and -5VA are necessary for Video I/F.
(1)
Check
Check the voltage at TP on the board. (See Fig. 8.8.) a) +5V, +5.5VA, 5VA, 5.2V TP18 ... +5.5VA TP19 ... 5VA TP21 ... +5V TP22 ... 5.2V b) 12V For 12V, conduct a check if an abnormality is found in +5.5VA, -5VA, or -5.2V. A test pin is mounted on 12V. Check the voltage on the board using the following patterns. PJ2-39, 40P (+12V) ... +12V0.5V PJ2-35, 36P (12V) ... 12V0.5V Pattern location: Video-Analog board > When +5V and 12V are not provided, check the voltage of the main Printlink unit. +5.5V0.25V 5V0.2V +5V0.25V -5.2V0.25V
5VA (TP19)
+5.5VA (TP18)
+5V (TP21)
5.2V (TP22)
+12V (PJ2-39, 40)Pin
12V (PJ2-35, 36)Pin
Fig. 8.8 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)
8-13

8.5.3 Remedy for Error
(1) V_IN / I/F / A/D Timeout (AA1A)
When it takes over 1 second to load data after it has been stored. (Problem with the hardware.) a) Check the connections Check to see if separate sync is connected properly. b) Check the settings Jumper (presence of serration, etc.) Contents set in the installation software. c) Abnormalities at the input section Check that the PLL is locked. Check that the signal level of TP11 (A/D) is stable. Check that HD2 (TP16) and VD (TP4) are properly output. d) Abnormalities in video signals (original signal) Check that the signals are stable. Check that Hsync and Vsync are properly output (whether they are stable without jitters).
(2)
V_IN / IF signal unrecognized (AA19)

When video signals are not being input. (When they cannot be recognized.) When errors occur depending on the presence of an HD signal. a) Check the connections Check that the video cable is properly connected. Check that the image signal is output from the diagnostic device. b) c) Check the settings (Jumper setting for the separate sync, etc.) Check the original signal and HD2 (TP16) The level and waveform of HSYNC. d) Check the COM level. Check the threshold value of the sync separation circuit. e) Exchange the board.
8-14

8.5.4 Turbulence of the image
(1) Check the waveform of the video signal.
Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitter, serration pulse, noise). Check the signal level (DC level variance, voltage amplitude). Readjust the board (jumper, volume).
(2)
Loss of dots
Check the memory. Exchange the I/F. Exchange the board.
(3)
Noise
Use the filter on the board by exchanging the jumper (exchange filter). Use an external noise filter such as a humkiller. Change the delay and select a location with less noise. Compare the GND level of the diagnostic device and Printlink. Set the balance of input or use an isolator.
(4)
Crushed or skewed image

Check the setting (interlace/non-interlace). Check the setting (H-TOTAL, H-SIZE, V-SIZE). Check the signal (Hsync, Vsync).
8-15
8.6 Adjusting the Board

8.6.1 Settings by signals
Perform the following settings according to the type of video signal sent from the diagnostic device.
(1)
Difference according to the sync signal

Video sync (VS) Composite sync (C.SYNC) Separate sync (SEP) ... Normal video signal that contains Hsync and Vsync. ... The video signal and composite sync (Hsync + Vsync) are on a separate line. ... The video signal, HD (Hsync), and VD (Vsync) are on a separate line.
Set according to the instructions in Section 8.4.4. The connection is as follow: Composite video signal Video signal Sync signal (composite sync) Video signal Sync signal (separate sync) Sync signal (separate sync) ... J1 (VS) ... J1 (VS) ... J2 (CS/HD) ... J1 (VS) ... J2 (CS/HD) ... J3 (VD) Video signal + Separate sync Normal Video signal + Composite sync
(2)
Input clock
External clock/Internal clock (PLL) Set from the installation software.
(3)
Input section of the video

AC/DC coupling Unbalance/Balance input Refer to Section 8.4.4. Change the setting according to the input electric potential of the signal.
(4)
Video signal method

Interlace / Non-interlace Switch the ODD and EVEN fields during interlace. Output the image with the default setting and make a reversed setting when the fields are reversed. Presence of serration pulse. The above settings are made from the installation software.
8-16

(5) Image size, etc.
The parameter in the figure below is set from the installation software. NOTE: The same value as the parameter set in MIU is used. 1) Hsize * For Printlink-IV, set Hsize in a 4 pixel unit.
2) 3) 4) 5)
Vsize H Total H.Bp+H.Sync V.Backporch

V
(5) V.Backporch
(1) Hsize
(4) H.Bp+ H.Sync
(2) Vsize
Image
(3) H TOTAL
(6)
Other settings
Horizontal frequency setting to detect signal sync ... 20kHz or above/or less Signal noise filter ON/OFF Refer to Section 8.4.4 for the above settings. Pixel clock range ... 3.75-7.5 / 7.5-15 / 15-30 / 30-60 (MHz) Set from the installation software.
8-17

(7) Set modality I/F data (Video) dialog box
For Video In.
Fig. 8.9 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box I/O IF Type Serial Port Pixel Aspect Ratio Pixel Clock Output Pixels H Delay ... Indicates either input or output. ... Indicates the IF type. ... Select COM2 as the serial port. ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. Set the values when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is other than 1:1. ... Set the pixel clock value of the image. Select [External] for external clock. ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixel. ... Set the sync delay for the horizontal direction. For internal clock : A max. of 127ns can be set in 0.5ns increment. For external clock : A max. of 30ns can be set in 2ns increment. H-Total Size Back Porch H+Sync Back Porch V Store Delay ... Set the number of all images in the horizontal direction. ... Set the image size. H: Horizontal size of the image. V: Vertical size of the image. ... Input the total of the horizontal sync signals and horizontal back porches. ... Set the value of the vertical back porch. ... Input the time from receiving a store command from the controller to sending reply data. When set to 1.0sec, every replay within 1.0sec can be stored when the time exceeds 1.0sec. Interlace ... Set interlace or no interlace. Interlace No Interlace : Every other line of the image data will be sent . : Image data will be sent in order.
8-18

Serration ... Select ON or OFF for serration pulse. With serration: ON Without serration: OFF Image data can be obtained without an external clock by connecting Advantage Windows and setting serration to OFF. ODD/EVEN ... Set the line during interlace. Normal: Normal Reverse: Set reverse when the image field is reversed. Set Reverse ... Set whether or not to reverse the image data. Normal: Does not reverse images. Reverse: Reverse images.
8-19

8.6.2 Adjusting the video I/F
The procedures for adjusting the video are indicated in the flow chart. Make adjustments following the procedures below when the composite video signal is an original signal, and when serration pulse exists. Also, when an instruction indicated in the chart matches your condition, be sure follow the instruction. The number in each block correspond to the item number (in Section 8.6.3) in which the contents of adjustment is described.
(1) Check original signal
(2) Set jumper
For separate sync: Other than described on right: (10) Adjust during separate sync signal During no interlace signal: During interlace signal:
(3) Adjust clamp pulse (N)
(4) Adjust clamp pulse (I)
(5) Check ODD/EVEN
(6) Adjust level When original signal Hsync level is 0.2V or less: (only when original signal is composite video) Other than described on right: (7) Check (adjust) sync separation circuit
(8) Adjust HHR
With no serration pulse: Other than described on right: (11) Adjust signal during no serration pulse (9) Adjust PLL
(12) Adjust delay
(13) Adjust position
(N) and (I) in the chart indicate the following: (N): No interlace (I): Interlace
Fig. 8.10 Flow Chart of Video Adjustment Procedure
8-20

8.6.3 Details of adjustments
(1) Checking the original signal
1. Connect the video image signal to J1 (VS), and check that the input signal level of TP12 (IN) is 1Vp-p. NOTE: As for the signal, 0.5-2Vp-p can be read. 2. Measure the black level (back porch) potential of the video signal. Confirm that the potential is within a range of 0V0.4. If not, set JP5 to AC. 3. Measure the potential difference of the device GND and Printlink GND. (If noise comes out in the image, set JP16 to BAL (balance)). 4. Check the Hsync level (during composite video signal). Check whether the level is above or below 0.2V. 5. Check the presence of serration pulse.
(2)
Jumper setting
After checking the original signal, refer to Section 8.4.4(1), (2), (3), and set the jumper securely based on the original signal.
(3)
Adjusting the clamp pulse (for non-interlace)

Enlarge the area between V-SYNC phases by applying a TV trigger (fall time) at TP8(CS), and adjust RV7(SET) so that the relation between TP8(CS) and TP1(CP) is displayed as that shown in Photo 8.1.
TP8(CS) TP1(CP)
TP4(VD)
TP9(O/E)
Photo 8.1 Make adjustments so that the clamp pulse generates synchronously with startup of TP8 (CS). Check the TP4 (VD) vertical sync signal. Confirm that TP9 (O/E) ODD/EVEN is at H.
8-21

(4) Adjusting the clamp pulse (for interlace)
Apply a TV trigger (fall time) at TP8(CS). A check is required in both fields. First set to FLD2 and apply a trigger in one field. Enlarge the area between V-SYNC phases, and make adjustments so that the clamp pulse of TP1(CP) appears alternately upon the startup of composite sync in segments where EQUALIZING and SERRATING PULSE exist. Also adjust RV7(SET) so that TP4(VD) and TP9(O/E) are displayed as that shown in Photo 8.2.
TP8(CS)
TP1(CP)
TP4(VD)
TP9(O/E)
Photo 8.2 When the above adjustments are completed, set to FLD1, apply a trigger to the other field, and adjust so that the setting is the same as that shown in Photo 8.3.
TP8(CS)
TP1(CP)
TP4(VD)
TP9(O/E)
Photo 8.3 Finally, switch the trigger to FLD2 and FLD1, and if one field is in the relation of Photo 8.2 and the other in Photo 8.3, the adjustment for the clamp pulse is completed.
8-22

(5) Confirming ODD/EVEN
Apply a trigger at TP4(VD), and confirm that TP4(VD) is spaced uniformly. Confirm that TP9(O/E) is synchronous to TP4 and that they are set alternately as shown in Photo 8.4.
TP4(VD) (Trigger)
TP9(O/E)
ODD
EVEN
Photo 8.4
(6)
Adjusting the level

Apply a trigger at TP11(A/D) and adjust the black level to +2VDC with RV11(BLK) while checking the waveform of the oscilloscope signal (refer to the range in Photo 8.5). Then adjust the white level to +3VDC with RV6(WHT). Adjust the black level to +2V with RV11 (BLK) and the white level to +3V with RV6 (WHT).
+3V . . RV6 (White Level)
TP11(A/D)
+2V . . RV11 (Black Level)
GND
Photo 8.5
8-23

(7) Checking (adjusting) the sync separation circuit
NOTE: Make this adjusting when the Hsync level is 0.2V or less. Apply a trigger to the oscilloscope at TP20(VID), and adjust RV2(COM) so that the relation between TP10(COM) and TP20(VID) is displayed as shown in Photo 8.6. NOTE: This adjustment will affect other settings. Therefore, make readjustments for delay, and check the PLL lock. Adjust RV2(COM) so that the threshold voltage of TP10(COM) becomes approx. 1/3 of that of Hsync.
GND
TP10(COM)
TP20(VID)
Photo 8.6 Note: The voltage range (500mv) and GND level of oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 should be set the same.
8-24

(8) Adjusting the HHR
Apply a TV trigger (fall time) at TP2(HHR1) and check both fields. Set the oscilloscope coupling to FLD1 and apply a trigger to one field, apply a delay sweep to enlarge the area between VSYNC phases, and make adjustments with RV5(HHR) so that the relation between TP2(HHR1) and TP13(HHR2) is displayed as shown in Photos 8.7 to 8.10. (In one of the adjusted fields during interlace, confirm that the relation between FLD1 and FLD2 is displayed as shown in Photos 8.7 to 8.10.) FLD1
TP2(HHR1)
TP13(HHR2) TP4(VD)
Photo 8.7
1H
Enlarged Photo
TP2(HHR1)
TP13(HHR2) TP4(VD)
B A Adjust RV5(HHR) so that A:B = : 4:3.
Photo 8.8
8-25
FLD2
TP2(HHR1)
TP13(HHR2)
TP4(VD)
Photo 8.9
1H
Enlarged Photo
TP2(HHR1)
TP13(HHR2) TP4(VD)
Confirm that A: B = : 4:3.
B A
Photo 8.10 Finally, switch the trigger to FLD1 and FLD2, and if one field is in the relation of Photo 8.7 and 8.8, and the other in Photo 8.9 and 8.10, the adjustment for the HHR is completed.
8-26

(9) Adjusting the PLL
a) Apply a trigger (start up) at TP14(FB), and make adjustments by turning the RV8(FIL1) so that the relation between TP14(FB) and TP15(FA) is displayed as waveforms shown in Photos 8.11 to 8.13, and that the amount of jitters is held to a minimum.
TP14(FB) (Trigger)
TP15(FA)
Photo 8.11 Make adjustments by enlarging this area so that jitters can be found easily.
TP14(FB) (Trigger)
TP15(FA)
Photo 8.12 Enlarge this area furthermore.
To the next page.
8-27
NOTE: The top and bottom position of the waveform has been moved.
NOTE: Set the time axis of the oscilloscope short.
TP15(FA)
Adjust with RV8(FIL1).
TP14(FB)
Photo 8.13
This deflection is called a jitter. Increase the brightness of the oscilloscope and view. This deflection is the reason for skewed pixels.
Adjust RV8(FIL1) so that the jitters of FA are minimal (2ns or less). NOTE: If the jitters do not decrease, perform the adjustments described in the next Section, "b) Adjusting the PLL - 2". b) Adjusting the PLL - 2 (For adjusting RV9 and RV10) This adjustment is made when the jitters do not decrease even when performing the adjustment described in the prior section. a) Although difficult, a more detailed adjustment can be made. NOTE: Sufficient adjustment can usually be made without applying this method. Please avoid using this method when the problem is not serious. This adjustment is made by switching the jumper and adjusting the volume, but as there is no orientation to this adjustment, find the optimum position by adjusting in various patterns indicated below. Table 8.5 Setting the PLL Jumper 1: (R75 20K)* JP2 (FIL2) 2: (R74 100k) 3: (Adjust RV9 FIL2) 1: (R89 330K) JP3 (FIL1) 2: (R76 470k)* 3: (Adjust RV10 FIL3) Set JP3 to 1 and adjust RV8. Set JP3 to 3 and adjust RV8 and RV9. Set JP2 to 2 and adjust RV8 and RV9. Set JP2 to 3 and adjust RV8, RV9, and RV10. * : Default Setting
8-28

(10) Adjusting during separate sync signal
Confirm that the phase of the clamp pulse (TP1, CP) is between the H back porch and Hsync and is set in a position that is not skewed. If the phase is skewed, the following problems derive, and the CP phase will need to be readjusted. The DC level of TP11 (A/D) wobbles in V cycle (jitters appear in the image). Jitters appear in the HD. Jitters in the PLL lock do not decrease.
TP11(A/D)
TP1(CP) (Trigger)
Photo 8.14 Pick the trigger with TP1 (CP), and adjust the CP phase with RV3 (CP) Enlarged Photo
TP11(A/D)
TP1(CP) (Trigger)
Photo 8.15
0.7 - 0.9s HB.P.
The pulse width of CP is 0.7-0.9s. (Make adjustments so that the startup of CP goes within the H back porch range.)
8-29

(11) Adjustment during no serration pulse signal
Apply a trigger at TP11(A/D) fall time. Adjust RV1(VBD) so that the low width of the TP7(VBD) waveform is wider than the SYNC width, and that it will not go in between the image phase (within the H back porch).
Adjust RV1 so that the startup of VBD goes in between the H back porch range.
TP7(VBD) (Trigger)
TP11(A/D)
Image
Photo 8.16
Adjust RV1 so that the startup of VBD goes in between the H back porch range. 4s
Enlarged Photo
TP7(VBD) (Trigger)
TP11(A/D)
H Back Porch
Photo 8.17
8-30

(12) Adjusting the delay
a) Purpose Delay adjustment is matching the phase of the image pixel and the capture clock.
Image Diagram
Correct density is obtained when captured at this position
1 pixel
Image Signal Capture position changes by changing delay
Capture Clock
Timing of Capture (Startup)
Set delay from the installation software with values from 0 to 255 in 0.5ns increment. NOTE: For external clock, set values from 0 to 15 in 2ns increment. b) Adjusting Method Adjust video delay following the procedure below. NOTE: Remove the oscilloscope probe from the board when making the adjustment. 1. Set approx. 12 frames for the format. If there are too many frames, the image size becomes small which will make it difficult to find the optimum delay value. 2. Enter the setup screen of the modality controller which is to be adjusted.
Fig. 8.11 Set Up Screen

8-31

3. The screen will change to the maintenance screen by pressing the top left and bottom left corners simultaneously for 1 second or more. Then enter the Video Test screen by pressing the arrow key on the top section of the screen.
Fig. 8.12 Video Test Screen 4. The contents of the parameter are described below. [INITIAL DELAYTIME] is the value of initial delay. The value set here becomes the delay time for the first frame. [INTERVAL TIME] is the increased delay time per one store. [START] is the switch to start the video test. The screen switches to a normal screen when pressed. Different delay images are automatically stored one frame at a time, and is printed when one page worth is stored. 5. Set the value for [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME]. The actual delay time is listed below. For internal clock 0.5ns increment 0-127ns (Max) For external clock 2ns increment 0-30ns (Max) NOTE: For external clock, the delay range can be changed from 30ns to 60ns with the jumper setting. To proceed with the test, first determine the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME] so that they cover the entire pixel clock cycle range, then print it out. Confirm the entire trend from the results, and find the delay value with only a slight disturbance in the image. Next, change the delay value in detail near the value found in the previous step, and print it out. Continue this procedure until an optimum delay value is found. The following is an example: 1. Check the pixel clock of the modality subjected to the video test. The value is set to 55MHz in the example. 2. Calculate the cycle of the pixel clock. The value is 18.2ns (55MHz-1) in the example. 3. Divide the cycle of the pixel clock by 12. (As the format is set to 12 frames,) The value is approx. 1.5ns in the example.
8-32

4. Input the solution obtained in Step 3 as the value for [INTERVAL TIME]. [4]=2ns is input in the example. If this value becomes larger than [4], divide it into 2 sheets. 1st Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 0, [INTERVAL TIME] = 4 2nd Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 48 (4x12), [INTERVAL TIME] = 4 With this setting, delay has been set to the entire range. 5. Press [START] to start the video test. Be sure to remove the probe of the oscilloscope from the board when conducting this test. 6. Find the optimum delay value from the printed image data. 7. If a sufficient image was not obtained, decrease the [INTERVAL TIME] and repeat the video test. 8. Delay can only be set at 2ns increment during external clock, so perform the video test by setting 1 for the [INTERVAL TIME]. The relation between the print image data and delay value is described below. For instance, when 4 is set for the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and 5 for the [INTERVAL TIME] in a 12-frame format, delay will be changed and stored as shown in the figure below when [START] is pressed.
4 =2ns
9 =4.5ns
14 =7ns
* The numbers are delay values (during internal clock).
19
24
29
Perform the video test for all video input modalities. 9. When an optimum delay value is found, set the value with the installation software.
8-33

(13) Adjusting the position
An image may be skewed as shown in Fig. 8.13 when an image data is printed out. In such a case, refer to the figure and reset the [H.Bp+H.Sync] and [V-backporch] values using the installation software. (Refer to Section 8.6.1(7).) Print out the result and perform the resetting until the skew is fixed. For interlace signal, if the top and bottom of the odd / even line printed out opposite, reset the [ODD/EVEN] values in the same procedure. (Refer to Section 8.6.1(7).)
Large
V-backporch
Small H.Bp+H.Sync Large Small Output Image Area
Fig. 8.13 Skewed Image Position
8-34
Blank page

The input and output digital I/F differ in parts installed and functions. However, as the configuration is nearly the same, only the differences will be explained in the relevant sections.
9.1 Configuration
Digital I/F Unit D37 IN Cable D37 OUT Cable D50 IN/OUT Cable : 1pc. : 1pc. : 1pc. : (optional) IN and OUT are separate.
9.2 Specifications
Unit Shape Power Source Image Memory : PCI specification : +5V (0.5A or below) : 1MB x 2 sides For image size that exceeds 1MB, data can be received switching the image memory. However, the image size in the H direction is in 4 pixel increments. Transfer Speed Data Width : Transfers of up to 2MB/s can be sent or received. : 8bit/12bit (can be switched with the register)
NOTE: The same board is used for digital I/F input and output. However, as the number of mounted parts (network resistor) differ in input and output, please be careful not to mistake the two.
9.3 Block Diagram

Image Memory 1M A Plane Image Memory 1M B Plane PCI Bus
* indicates different IN/OUT operations.
* Memory Controller, Data Selector
J4 * IN * Check Pin * Driver/Receiver Digital I/F Timing Controller PCI bus I/F * OUT * IN * OUT
Digital I/F IN/OUT Selection
Fig. 9.1 Block Diagram of Digital I/F
9-1

9.4.1 Silk diagram
(1) Digital I/F Parts Layout Diagram ... Fig. 9.3 (2) Digital I/F Silk Diagram ... Fig. 9.4 NOTE : How to discriminate an input board and output board. Judge by the number of installed RB (network resistor) and their locations. An input board is installed with RB1 to 4. See Fig. 9.3. An output board is installed with only RB5.
9.4.2 Connectors
39 40 J4 1 2
Fig. 9.2 Top Surface of the Board J4 ... For digital I/F signal. Pin allocation is the same for input and output. Table 9.1 Connectors
19 0D5+ 20 0D5-
17 0D6+ 18 0D6-
15 0D7+ 16 0D7-
13 N.C. 14 N.C.
11 STB + 12 STB -
9 MOD+ 10 MOD-
7 REQ+ 8 REQ-
5 RET+ 6 RET-
3 N.C. 4 N.C.
1 GND 2 N.C.
39 N.C. 40 N.C.
37 0D8+ 38 0D8-
35 0D9+ 36 0D9-
33 D10+ 34 D10-
31 D11 + 32 D11 -
29 0D0+ 30 0D0-
27 0D1+ 28 0D1-
25 0D2+ 26 0D2-
23 0D3+ 24 0D3-
21 0D4+ 22 0D4-
9-2

Digital I/F / Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pin / Jumper Pin / Array Resistor / Connector)
Check pin Non-installed check pin (unnecessary) D37 IN or D37 OUT cable is connected. Digital IN/OUT Non-installed (unnecessary) Jumper pin
Install for input specification
Install for output specification
LED
Digital data check pin
Non-installed (fix to NORMAL with chrome wire)
Fig. 9.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Digital I/F)
9-3

Digital I/F / Silk Diagram
Fig. 9.4 Silk Diagram (Digital I/F)
9-4

9.4.3 LED
(1) (2) Checking the Board Operation
LED4(POWER) LED1(REQ) LED2(MODE) LED3(STROBE) Green ... Power Source (+5V) Orange ... Request Signal (Output) Yellow ... Mode Signal (Input) Yellow ... Strobe (Clock) Signal (Input)
Checking the Digital I/F Operation
9.4.4 Jumpers
(1) Setting Input/Output
Digital I/F IN Table 9.2 Jumper Setting of Digital I/F Input Input/Output Setting Set input/output according to the setting of the jumper and software on the board. Input/Output Setting Set input/output according to the setting of the jumper and software on the board.
1-2 short: IN* JP1 2-3 short: OUT * : Default setting
Digital I/F OUT Table 9.3 Jumper Setting of Digital I/F Output Input/Output Setting Set input/output according to the setting of the jumper and software on the board. Input/Output Setting Set input/output according to the setting of the jumper and software on the board.
1-2 short: IN JP1 2-3 short: OUT* * : Default setting
(2)
Other Jumpers
JP2 ... Not used.
9-5
9.5 Checking the Operation During Board Abnormalities

Refer to Section 9.4.3 and check the board operation from the LED. When LED4 is extinguished during normal condition, there is an abnormality. LED4 OFF ... Check the power source (5V) >Check the power source of the main unit. LED1 to 3 lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when sending digital I/F signals. (Confirm that it is operating.)

The digital I/F operates at +5V. Check +5V with a tester. Checking +5V The digital I/F does not have a TP for +5V. Confirm that a lead indicated as C3 (+) is connected to +5V. If the power is within +5V0.05V, it is normal. If not, check the power source.
9-6

9.5.3 Errors and the locations of abnormalities
(1) Digital I/F size header error (AD07)
The size of the image sent from the transfer data header is too big. H: 8191 (1FFFH) or above V: 65535 (FFFH) or above 1. Check the installation software. Image size Setting for the Size Header 2. Indicate the image size of the header with the controller. Set H/V DISPLAY in the Keypad Setup screen to ON. ->Indicate the size of the image sent from the header when the image is stored with a normal screen. 3. When the indication in Step 2 is abnormal: ->The abnormality may be in the header from the diagnostic device. ->Refer to Section 9.6 and check the data of the header with a logic analyzer.
(2)
Digital I/F timeout (AD02)

The header was not able to receive an image data. If the time from when Printlink releases a Request signal for a header to the time when the diagnostic device outputs the header exceeds the time set in [Store Header Timeout] in the maintenance software, a timeout error will occur. 1. Check the connections. Internal cable External digital cable 2. Check if the diagnostic device is ready. (Image data is not output from the diagnostic device.) Check if imagers are being stored after transmission is enabled. Check the transfer signal with a logic analyzer. Check if the header is output from the diagnostic device. Check if the time required to output a header to a request is too long. (10 sec. or less.) 3. An abnormality exists in the transfer data and cannot be received by the I/F. Check the transfer signal with a logic analyzer. Does a header exists? Is the timing of each signal normal? 4. Malfunction in the I/F board. Exchange the board.
9-7

(3) Digital I/F memory not (A431-A438)
Error in the output board. Transmission of the image data was attempted from the main device when the frame memory was full. 1. Turn the power on again as this is an internal software error. If this error occurs frequently, upgrade the software.
(4)
Digital I/F hardware (A441-A448)

Transfer error of the digital I/F. 1. Perform the same checks as in Section (2) Digital I/F Timeout.
9-8
9.6 Checking the Transfer Signal of the Digital I/F

The timing of the digital I/F signal can be checked with a logic analyzer. It can be confirmed whether signals are being output by checking the waveform.
9.6.1 Waveform of digital I/F signal

Transfer data of the digital I/F are digital data with parallel image data, and are sent in 1H increment. The image size is sent with the 1st line being the header. Data is sent in 1H increment, and the output side will start sending the data when the input side sets the Request signal to Hi. The input side obtains one image by repeating the Hi/Lo setting for Request corresponding to the number of header + V size. The timing of each signal differs according to the device. STROBE at 1s cycle (1MB/s) is the standard timing.
(1)
Header (1st line)
REQUEST
MODE
STROBE
DATA
SOP SIZE UHS LHS UVS LVS EOP H size=UHSx256+LHS V size=UVSx256+LVS
(2)
Image data (number of lines for V size from the 2nd line)
1 line (1H)
REQUEST
MODE
STROBE
DATA
SOP IMG DATA DATA SOP:0FFH IMG:003H SIZE:002H EOP:000H
DATA EOP EOT:001H(EOT substitutes EOP for the final line.)
9-9

(3) Signal definition
REQUEST : Hi when the input side is prepared for input for each 1H. Lo after sending 1H. Output is made from the input side. MODE : Hi when the transfer data is image data or size data. Lo when the data is a command. The output side synchronizes to the image data and makes an output. DATA(D0-D15) : Data line. D0-D7 is the data at 8bit. D0-D11(D15) is the data at 12(16)bit. Output is made from the output side. STROBE : Timing for capturing data. 1s cycle is standard.
9.6.2 Measuring method

By measuring the following test pins of the digital I/F with a logic analyzer, the above signals can be checked.
(1)
Input
TP36 ... REQUEST Signal TP40 ... MODE Signal TP42 ... STROBE Signal J5-TRD0 ... D0 (Data bit0) J5-TRD1 ... D1 (Data bit1) J5-TRD2 ... D2 (Data bit2) J5-TRD3 ... D3 (Data bit3) J5-TRD4 ... D4 (Data bit4) J5-TRD5 ... D5 (Data bit5) J5-TRD6 ... D6 (Data bit6) J5-TRD7 ... D7 (Data bit7) Digital Data
(2)
Output
TP37 ... REQUEST Signal TP39 ... MODE Signal TP41 ... STROBE Signal J5-TRD0 ... D0 (Data bit0) J5-TRD1 ... D1 (Data bit1) J5-TRD2 ... D2 (Data bit2) J5-TRD3 ... D3 (Data bit3) J5-TRD4 ... D4 (Data bit4) J5-TRD5 ... D5 (Data bit5) J5-TRD6 ... D6 (Data bit6) J5-TRD7 ... D7 (Data bit7) Digital Data
9-10

9.7.1 Dialog box (INPUT) to Set Modality I/F Data (Digital)
For Digital In.
Fig. 9.5 Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) Dialog Box (INPUT) IN/OUT IF Type Serial Port Priority Size ... Displays input or output. ... Displays the type of I/F. ... Select COM2 as the serial port. ... Set the priority order for the size. Set : Size H and V are given priority. Modality : The header info of modality is given priority. Input Pixels Output Pixels Pixel Aspect Ratio Size ... Set either 8bit or 12bit as pixels from the input modality. ... Set either 8bit or 12bit as output pixels. ... Set the aspect ratio of the image. Set this item when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is ratio other than 1:1. When the ratio is 1:1, the default value is applied. ... Input the image size of the diagnostic device. Internal test patterns are created based on this size. Format check is also performed based on this size. Therefore, if more than one image size exist, input the maximum image size. H: Horizontal size of the image. V: Vertical size of the image. Set Reverse ... Set whether to reverse the image or not. Normal: Does not reverse images. Reverse: Reverses images. Digital IF REQtoREQ Time ... Set the hardware control time for between the image capture line. For normal conditions, set 50s. When connecting with models that generate a timeout error when the area between lines is short such as Shimazu IDR1000, set to 500s. Store Delay Store Header timeout Store Image timeout ... Set the waiting time during store. When set to 2.0sec., all data received within 2.0sec. is stored when the time exceeds 2.0sec. ... Set the timeout length for the header information from modality. If the operation of the diagnostic becomes slow, the time needs to be extended. ... Set the timeout length for receiving an image. When the image size of one frame is large, the time needs to be extended. Index: Set Time = Image Capacity/0.2MB
9-11

9.7.2 Dialog box (OUTPUT) to Set Modality I/F Data (Digital)
For Digital Out.
Fig. 9.6 Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) Dialog Box (OUTPUT) IN/OUT IF Type Serial Port Pixels ... Displays input or output. ... Displays the type of I/F. ... Select COM1 as the serial port. ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for pixels. Set the pixels according to the imager I/F. When 8bit and 12bit are mixed, output will be made after the pixels are converted to the value set here. Store Header timeout Digital IF Output Speed Command Status timeout ... Set the timeout length for sending header information to the imager. Apply the default value. ... Set the digital output speed. Select from 0.5MB/s, 1MB/s, and 2MB/s. ... Set the length of store command timeout with the imager. The set length of time should be longer than the total length of the time set for [Store Header timeout] and [Store Image timeout] combined. Store Image timeout ... Set the timeout length to send an image data.
Table 9.4 Setting for Each Maximum Image Size (1 Frame) Received by Printlink-OD 0-1Kx1K 12bit Store Image timeout Command Status Timeout Extended Header 30sec 40sec 1Kx1K-2Kx2.5K 12bit 60sec 70sec 2Kx2.5K-4Kx5K 12bit 240sec 250sec
... When a diagnostic device in which the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is a ratio other than 1:1 is connected, the imager can be controlled by the Use setting. However, there are operating conditions that must be checked.
9-12

(1) Operating conditions for the extended header
Printlink-IV, ID, HG, DV, IN: Set according to the pixel aspect ratio of the diagnostic device. Printlink-OD : A digital output board which is 030730000B or a later version, or an on-board IC in which the version is V1267A, V1269A, or a later version is required. The software must be V1.10 or a later version. Li-10A, 21: Digital I/F AS3208-219A V9.1210 with additional 16MB Memory DSW 4-4 ON, DSW 2-7 ON FC board AS3208-214A V7.0826 with additional 64MB Memory DSW 13 ON, DSW 14 ON Print Board AS3208-212A V9.0324 DSP AS3208-213A V8.1006 Video file: Regius.VID Format file: Regius.FMT
9-13
9.8 Setting the Memory Capacity of the Driver

1. Start up Plnkmtn.exe of the install PC. For details in operation, refer to Section 6, Instructions for Using the Installation Software.
Fig. 9.7 Printlink Maintenance Window 2. Click [Server Connection (B)] in the [File] menu, input [10.32.15.x] to [Host Name/IP Address] and click [Set].
Fig. 9.8 Change Server Connection Dialog Box 3. The screen shown in Fig. 9.9 will appear.
Fig. 9.9 Normal End Dialog Box 4. Set the memory capacity of the driver from [Work Buffer Size]. If the size of the used frame exceeds 2MB for [Digital_In] and [Digital_Out], perform the setting by adjusting to the image size. However, the maximum value that can be set is 10MB. Set images that exceed 10MB to10MB. For others, apply the default value of 2MB.
Fig. 9.10 Set IP Address/Work Buffer Dialog Box
9-14
Blank page
Blank page

10.1 Configuration
Digital Video I/F Unit: Digital Video I/F Cable Digital Video I/F Relay Cable : 1pc. (consists of 2 boards) : 1pc. : 1pc.
10.2 Specifications
Input Signal Digital Video Signal / 8bit *1 Composite Sync *1, *2, *3 Separate Sync (VD, HD) *1, *2, *3 *1: ECL operation level / 100 *2: Capable of reversing with DIP SW. *3: Capable of switching the composite sync and separate sync with the jumper pin. Pixel Clock Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Image Signal Read Image Size Memory Clock Delay Scanning Method Serration Pulse 1H Delay Bus Configuration Max. 60MHz 27.5-35kHz 50-60Hz 8bit/pixel Max. 2048 x 1024 2MB x 1 side Max. 15ns in 1ns increment. (capable of switching with the register) Capable of setting the capture of interlace/non-interlace. Capable of reversing ODD/EVEN via the register. Capable of operating without a serration pulse. The ON/OFF of serration pulse can be switched with the register. Compatible with Shimazu SCT, SMT, MAGNEX Series, and can delay 1H during EVEN field (the switch is made with the register). PCI 32bit
10-1
10.3 Block Diagram

10.3.1 Block diagram of the board
Memory Board
Frame Memory 2MB
Video Signal
ECL/TTL Converter
32bit Converter
Memory Controller
PCI I/F
C-Sync/HD,VD Sync Signal Clock Clock ECL/TTL Converter Clock PLL
Fig. 10.1 Block Diagram of the Digital Video I/F

10.4.1 Silk diagram
1) Digital Video I/F 2) Digital Video I/F 3) Digital Video I/F 4) Digital Video I/F Parts Layout Diagram Silk Diagram DV Cable Relay Cable ... Fig. 10.3 ... Fig. 10.4 ... Fig. 10.5 ... Fig. 10.6
Refer to Section 8.4.1, Fig. 8.6 and 8.7 as the digital section is the same as that of the Video I/F.
10.4.2 Connectors
J1(DV IN)
Fig. 10.2 Rear Panel of the Board J1 (Digital-Video IN) / Digital Video Signal input connector ECL balance level/100
10-2
SW1: Signal Reverse SW1-1: OFF Normal/ON Reverse SW1-2: OFF Normal/ON Reverse SW1-3: OFF Normal/ON Reverse
JP6: Selection of Sampling Clock 1-4 Short: PLL Mode 2-3 Short: Duty (Through Mode) JP5: Choice of Sampling Clock 1-4 Short: PLL Mode 2-3 Short: Duty (Through Mode)
RV4
JP1: Delay of Input Sync Signal
JP2: Selection of Sync Signal Short: C-SYNC Open: HD/VD
PLL Circuit Block RV, RV2, RV3 JP3, JP4
Fig. 10.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Digital Video I/F)
10-3
Fig. 10.4 Silk Diagram (Digital Video I/F)
10-4
7934-6500SC PIN NO. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
DHA-PC36-3G-HPD11 Signal name PIN NO. 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 Brown Black 1 Red 1 GND GND DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA SYNC VD CLK GND GND GND GND -5.2V -5.2V 0+ 01+ 12+ 23+ 34+ 45+ 56+ 67+ 7+ + + -
Yellow Black 1 Red 1 Green Gray White Brown Black 1 Red 1 Black 1 Red 1 Black 1 Red 1 Black 2 Red 2
Yellow Black 2 Red 2 Green Gray White Brown Black 2 Red 2 Black 2 Red 2 Black 2 Red 2 Black 3 Red 3
Yellow Black 3 Red 3 Green Gray White Black 3 Red 3 Black 3 Red 3 Black 3 Red 3
Fig. 10.5 DV Cable of the Digital Video I/F
10-5
Pin No. 1 7934-6500SC 1 2 2 7934-6500SC 1 2
Connections below are 1 to 1. 33 34 33 34
Fig. 10.6 Relay Cable
10-6

10.4.3 LED
(1) Check the board operation
D4(POWER) Green ... Power Source (+5V)
(2)
Check the video read operation

D1(LOCK) D2(STORE) D3(NO VIDEO) Yellow ... Lights when PLL locks. Yellow ... Lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when the image data is stored. Red ... Lights when video signal is not input.
10.4.4 Jumpers
(1) Setting performed according to different sync signals
Table 10.1 Jumper Setting of the Sync Signal System Selection of composite sync and separate sync. Selection of C SYNC/HD and VD. SHORT:C SYNC* JP2 OPEN :HD/VD *: Default setting
NOTE : Composite Sync : Separate lines (8bit signal, SYNC x 1pc.) are used for video signal and CS (composite sync). Separate Sync : Separate lines are used for the video signal, HD, and VD (8bit signal, SYNC x 2pcs.).
(2)
Selection of sampling clock

Sampling clock can be reproduced through the PLL circuit or output by through. For output by through, the clock duty ratio can be changed. Table 10.2 Jumper Setting of the Sampling Clock 1-4 short: PLL mode* JP5 2-3 short: Through mode Selection of sampling clock. 1-4 short: PLL mode* JP6 2-3 short: Through mode
NOTE : RV4 is used to adjust the changes in duty ratio.
*: Default setting
(3)
Setting the PLL (valid only when JP5 and JP6 are set to PLL mode)
Change the PLL setting on the sampling clock when jitters cannot be removed and is unstable. Table 10.3 Jumper Setting of PLL 1: (R33 20k)* JP3 (FIL2) 2: (R32 100k) 3: (Adjust RV2 FIL2) 1: (R42 330k) JP4 (FIL3) 2: (R41 470k)* 3: (Adjust RV3 FIL3) *: Default setting
10-7

Jitters usually do not appear when set at default. Therefore, when the image cannot be improved after taking other measures, change the setting. Description of other JP function. JP1 ... Delay line of the input sync signal (Max. 8ns at 2ns increment)
10.4.5 Test pins

TP10 TP12 TP11 TPG1-5 TP1 (D7) TP2 (D0) TP3 (V-SYNC) TP4 (C/H-SYNC) TP5 (CLK) TP6 (CLK1) TP7 (O/E) TP8 (HD) TP9 (VD) TP13 (VCO) TP14 (FA) TP15 (FB) ... +5V ... +5V (PLL power source) ... -5.2V ... GND ... Highest data signal ... Lowest data signal ... V-sync signal ... C-sync or H-sync signal ... Clock signal ... Clock signal ... ODD/EVEN detection signal of the interlace signal ... Hsync signal ... Vsync signal ... PLL output signal ... 1/16 frequency dividing signal of the input clock ... 1/16 frequency dividing signal of the PLL output signal
10.4.6 DIP SW
Table 10.4 DIP SW Setting OFF: Normal* Polarity of C/H-SYNC SW1-1 ON: Reverse OFF: Normal* Polarity of V-SYNC SW1-2 ON: Reverse OFF: Normal* Polarity of clock SW1-3 ON: Reverse *: Default setting
10-8
10.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormality Exists on the Board

10.5.1 Checking the operation (LED operation)
Perform the check by referring to Section 10.4.3.
(1)
D1 (LOCK)
Extinguished ... The PLL cannot be locked (cannot read the image). 1. Check the presence of the C/H-SYNC signal (TP4). 2. Check the setting for the installation software and board (jumpers, etc.). 3. Check the waveform (Hsync, presence of serration, etc.).
(2)
D2 (STORE) Yellow
Lights one time at the beginning of image input ... Normal Does not light at the beginning of image input ... Cannot read the image. 1. Check the connections.
(3)
D3 (NO VIDEO) Red

Lit ... Cannot detect video signal. Lights when HD signal is not present. 1. Check the connections. 2. Check the setting (jumper setting for separate sync, etc.). 3. Check the C/H-SYNC (TP4) of the original signal. Check the Hsync level, waveform, and HD waveform of the original signal.
(4)
D4 (POWER) Green
Extinguished ... +5V is not supplied into the board. 1. Check the board voltage (TP10). 2. Check the power source voltage of the main unit.

The digital I/F requires +5V, -5.2V, and -12V. Check Check the voltage at the TP on the board. Power supplied from the main unit TP10 ... +5V TP11 ... -5.2V TP12 ... +5V (PLL power) 12V Check 12V when an abnormality exists in +5.5V or -5V. 12V does not have a test pin. Check the voltage on the board in the following patterns. PJ2-39, 40P (+12V) ... +12V0.5V PJ2-35, 36P (-12V) ... -12V0.5V Location of pattern: Video-Digital board > When +5V, 12V is not supplied, check the voltage of the main Printlink unit. +5V0.05V -5.2V0.05V +5V0.05V Power source converted on the board
10-9

10.5.3 Handling errors
(1) D_V I/F Image in Timeout (AB17)
When it requires 1 sec. or more after storing to the end of read. (Problem with the hardware.) 1. Check the connections. Check if the separate sync is connected properly. 2. Check the settings. Jumpers (presence of serration, etc.) Installation software 3. Abnormality in the read section. Check if VD (TP9) and HD (TP8) are being supplied. 4. Abnormality in the video signal (original signal). Check if the signal is stable. Check is C/H-SYNC (TP4) is output properly (stable without jitters).
(2)
D_V I/F signal unrecognized (AB19)

The video signal is not being input (cannot be recognized). An error is generated depending on the presence of HD signal. 1. Check the connections. 2. Check the terminal resistor power supplied from the diagnostic device. -5.2V should be detected at pin J1-17 or 35.
J1-17, 35
Fig. 10.7 Digital Video I/F J1 3. Check the settings (jumper setting of the separate sync, etc.). 4. Check the original signal and C/H-SYNC (TP4). Check the C/H-SYNC level and waveform. 5. Exchange the board.
10.5.4 Image turbulence

Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitters, serration pulse, noise). Check the signal level (DC level fluctuation, voltage amplitude). Readjust the board (jumpers).
(2)
Loss of pixels
Check the memory. Change to another I/F. Exchange the board.
10-10

(3) Crushed or skewed image
Check the setting (interlace/no interlace). Check the setting (image size in the H direction should be a multiple of 4). Check the signals (Hsync, Vsync).

10.6.1 Setting according to signals
Perform the following settings according to the type of video signal sent from the diagnostic device.
(1)
According to different sync signals

Composite Sync (C.SYNC) ... The digital video signal and composite sync (Hsync+Vsync) are different signals. Separate Sync (SEP) ... The digital video signal, HD (Hsync), and VD (Vsync) are different signals. (The changing of jumper pins is required.) Refer to Section 10.4.4.
(2)
Types of video signals

Interlace / No Interlace Exchange the ODD field and EVEN field during interlace. Display the image at default setting and if the fields are reversed, reverse the setting. Serration pulse ON/OFF 1H Delay ON/OFF Set 1H or more Delay to the EVEN field with the installation software in order to support Shimazu SCT, SNT, and MAGNEX Series.
(3)
Adjusting the position of the image

Same as the items described in Chapter 8. Refer to Chapter 8.
10-11

(4) Set Modality IF Data Dialog Box (Digital Video)
For Digital Video In.
Fig. 10.8 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box I/O IF Type Serial Port Pixel Aspect Ratio Output Pixels H Delay H-Total Size ... Displays input or output. ... Displays the type of IF. ... Set the serial port to COM2. ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. Set this item when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is a ratio other than 1:1. Apply the default setting if the ratio is 1:1. ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixels. ... Set the sync delay in the horizontal direction. 15ns can be set as the maximum in 1ns increment. ... Input the number of entire images in the horizontal direction. ... Set the image size. H: Horizontal size of the image. V: Vertical size of the image. Back Porch H+sync Back Porch V Store Delay Interlace ...Input the sum of the horizontal sync signal and horizontal back porch. ... Set the value of the vertical back porch. ... Set the time to send a reply from when receiving a store command from the controller. ... Select Interlace or No Interlace. Interlace: Every other line of the image data is sent. No Interlace: Image data is sent in order. Serration ... Select ON or OFF for serration. ON: With serration. OFF: Without serration. ODD/EVEN ... Set the line during interlace. Normal : Normal Reverse : Select when the field is reversed in the normal setting.
10-12

1H Delay ... Apply when a blank line appears in either the top or bottom even after adjusting V Back Porch. Set 1H Delay to OFF to adjust the ODD/EVEN setting. Set 1H Delay to ON when a blank line appears in either the top or bottom even after adjusting V Back Porch. When set to ON, reverse the ODD/EVEN setting. Readjust the position with V Back Porch. Set Reverse ... Select whether to reverse the image data or not. Normal : Does not reverse the image data. Reverse : Reverse the image data.
10-13

10.6.2 Adjusting the video I/F
The procedure for adjusting the video is shown in the flow chart. Make adjustments following the procedures below when the composite video signal is an original signal, and when serration pulse exists. Also, when an instruction described in the chart matches your condition, be sure make the adjustment indicated. The number in each block corresponds to the item number (in Section 10.6.3) in which the contents of adjustment is described.
1) Check original signal.
2) Adjust jumper setting and C/H-SYNC.
For separate sync signal: Other than described on right: 4) Adjust for separate sync signal. During no interlace signal: During interlace signal:
3) Check ODD/EVEN.
For no serration pulse: Other than described on right: 5) Adjust serration pulse ON/OFF. 6) Adjust delay.
Check image.
Image turbulence with jitter, etc.:
7) Adjust PLL. Fine image: 8) Adjust image position.
Cannot adjust PLL: End 9) Adjust in through mode.
Fig. 10.9 Flow Chart of Video Adjustment Procedure
10-14

10.6.3 Details of adjustments
1. Connect the image signal of the digital video to J1 (DV IN), and confirm that the high image data of TP1(D7) and the low image data of TP2(D0) are normal. 2. Check whether the sync signal of TP3(V-SYNC), TP4(C/H-SYNC) is composite sync or separate sync.
(2)
Setting the jumper and adjusting C/H-SYNC

1. Check the original signal and set the jumper according to the original signal by referring to Section 10.4.4 (1) and (2). 2. Apply a trigger at TP4(C/H-SYNC) and adjust the jumper pin of JP1 so that the waveform of TP6(CLK1) takes the form shown in the figure below.
TP4(C/H-SYNC) (trigger)
TP6(CLK1)
5ns-9ns
(3)
Checking ODD/EVEN
1. Apply a trigger at TP9 and confirm that the waveform of TP7(O/E) takes the form shown in the figure below.
TP9 VD (trigger)
TP7 O/E
ODD
EVEN
(4)
Adjustment for separate sync

a) Setting according to the different sync signals Table 10.5 Jumper Setting for Sync Signal Systems
Selection of composite sync and separate sync. Selection of C SYNC/HD and VD.
SHORT:C SYNC* JP2 OPEN :HD/VD *: Default setting
* Composite Sync : Video signal and CS (composite sync) use separate lines (8bit, SYNC x 1 line). * Separate Sync : Video signal, HD, and VD use separate lines (8bit, SYNC x 2 lines).
NOTE : Be careful not to touch the lead of IC11 when changing the jumper setting of JP2.
(5)
Adjusting serration ON/OFF

Perform this setting with a register.
10-15

(6) Adjusting the delay
a) Purpose Delay adjustment is to match the phase of the image pixel and sampling clock.
Image Diagram Correct density is obtained when sampled at this position
1 pixel
Image Signal Sampling position changes by changing delay Sampling Clock
Timing of Sampling (Startup)
Set delay from the installation software with values from 0 to 15 in 1ns increment. b) Adjusting method Adjust video delay following the procedure below. NOTE: Remove the oscilloscope probe from the board when making the adjustment. 1. Set the format to approx. 12 frames. If there are too many frames, the image size becomes small and will make it difficult to find the optimum delay value. 2. Enter the Set Up screen of the modality controller which is to be adjusted.
Fig. 10.10 Set Up Screen
10-16

3. The screen will change to the maintenance screen by pressing the top left and bottom left corners simultaneously for 1 second or longer. Then enter the Video Test screen by pressing the arrow key on the upper section of the screen.
Fig. 10.11 Video Test Screen 4. The contents of the parameter are described below [INITIAL DELAYTIME] is the initial delay value. This value becomes the delay time for the first frame. [INTERVAL TIME] is the increased delay time per one store. [START] is a button to start the video test. When this button is pressed, the screen switches to the initial screen. Different delay images are automatically stored one frame at a time, and is printed out when all images are stored in one page. 5. Set the value for [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME]. The actual delay time is listed below. For clock 1ns increment 0-15ns (Max) To proceed with the test, first determine the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME] so that they cover the entire range of the pixel clock cycle, then print it out. Confirm the entire trend from the results, and find a delay value with only a slight disturbance in the image. Next, change the delay value in detail near the value found in the previous step, and print it out. Continue this procedure until an optimum delay value is found. The following is an example:
10-17

c) Checking method 1. Check the pixel clock of the modality subjected to the video test. The value is set to 55MHz in the example. 2. Obtain the cycle of the pixel clock. The value is 18.2ns (55MHz-1) in the example. 3. Divide the cycle of the pixel clock by 12. (As the format is set to 12 frames,) The value is approx. 1.5ns in the example. 4. Input the solution obtained in Step 3 as the value for [INTERVAL TIME]. [4]=2ns is the value in the example. If this value becomes larger than [4], divide it into 2 sheets. 1st Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 0, [INTERVAL TIME] = 4 2nd Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 48 (4x12), [INTERVAL TIME] = 4 With this setting, delay has been set to the entire range. 5. Press the [START] button to start the video test. Be sure to remove the probe of the oscilloscope from the board when conducting this test. 6. Find the optimum delay value from the printed image data. 7. If a sufficient image was not obtained, decrease the [INTERVAL TIME] and repeat the video test. The relation between the print image data and delay value is described below. For instance, when 4 is set as the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and 5 as the [INTERVAL TIME] in a 12-frame format, delay will be changed and stored as shown in the figure below when [START] is pressed.
4 =2ns
9 =4.5ns
14 =7ns
19
24
29
Perform the video test for all video input modalities. 8. When an optimum delay value is found, set the value with the installation software.
10-18

(7) Adjusting the PLL
a) Adjusting the PLL-1 Apply a trigger (start up) at TP14(FA), and make adjustments by turning RV1(FIL1) so that the relation between TP14(FA) and TP15(FB) is displayed in waveforms shown in the diagram below, and that the amount of jitters is held to a minimum.
TP14 (FA) (trigger)
TP15 (FB) Enlarge this range and adjust.
Set the time axis for the oscilloscope at a small value. TP14 (trigger) Adjust at RV1(FIL1) This deflection is called a jitter. Increase the brightness of the oscilloscope. This deflection causes skewed pixels.
TP15
Adjust RV1 (FIL1) so that the jitter of TP15 (FB) is the minimum value (2ns or less). * If the jitter is not minimized, perform "b) Adjusting the PLL-2". b) Adjusting the PLL-2 (For adjusting RV2 and RV3) This adjustment is made when the jitters do not decrease even when performing the adjustment described in the prior section. a) Although difficult, a more detailed adjustment can be made. NOTE: Sufficient adjustment can usually be made without applying this method. Please avoid using this method when there is no problem. This adjustment is made by changing the jumper and volume, but as there is no orientation to this adjustment, find the optimum position by adjusting in various patterns indicated below. Table 10.6 Setting the PLL Jumper 1: (R33 20k)* JP3 (FIL2) 2: (R32 100k) 3: (Adjust RV2 FIL2) 1: (R42 330k) JP4 (FIL3) 2: (R41 470k)* 3: (Adjust RV3 FIL3) *: Default setting Set JP3 to 2, adjust RV1 and check for jitters. Set JP3 to 3, adjust RV1, RV2 and check for jitters. Set JP4 to 1, adjust RV1 and check for jitters. Set JP4 to 3, adjust RV1, RV3 and check for jitters.
10-19

If no improvement can be seen, set JP5, JP6 to Through Mode and adjust RV4. If this does not solve the problem, return the setting to the original setting as there may be a different problem.
(8)

Procedures are the same as that described in Chapter 8. Refer to Chapter 8.
(9)
Adjusting by through mode

This adjustment is made by turning the volume and changing the duty ratio of the clock, as in the previous LI7-DV. 1. Set the jumper pins as indicated below. JP5: 2-3 short JP6: 2-3 short 2. Apply a trigger at TP6 (CLK1), turn RV4 (DUTY) so that TP2 (D0) is set in a waveform shown in the figure below.
Td
TP6(CLK1)
TP2(D0)
Td/2 Adjust the phase of the clock in advance. Adjust RV4 so that the startup of the waveform is steep.
NOTE : The R20 resistor becomes extremely hot during clock adjustment. Be careful not to burn your finger.
10-20
Blank page
Blank page

11.1 Configuration
Video HG I/F Unit : 1pc. (consists of 2 boards)
11.2 Specifications
InputSignal CompositeVideo Video + Composite Sync Video + Separate Sync Pixel Clock Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Read Image Size Memory Jitters Clock Delay Resolution S/N Ratio Bus Configuration 80-135MHz 60-80kHz 55-75Hz Max. 2048 x 1024 (in 4 pixel increments to the horizontal direction) 2MB x 1 side 2ns or less Max. 7.5ns in 0.5ns increments. (Comes with function to reverse the phase.) 8bit 42dB (1 digit) or above PCI Bus 32bit
11.3 Block Diagram

11.3.1 Block diagram of the board
Memory Board
Frame Memory 2MB
PCI Bus 32bit
Video Signal Sync Signal
Analog PLL
A/D Converter 32bit Converter
Memory Controller
PCI I/F
Fig. 11.1 Block Diagram of the Video HG I/F
11-1

11.4.1 Silk diagram
(1) Video HG I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram (2) Video HG I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram (3) Video HG I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram (4) Video HG I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram ... Fig. 11.3 ... Fig. 11.4 ... Fig. 11.5 ... Fig. 11.6
11.4.2 Connectors
J1 J2 J3
Fig. 11.2 Rear Panel of the Board J1 (VS) ... Video Signal Input Connector * 0.5-2.0Vp-p J2 (CS/HD) ... CS (Composite Sync) Input (during composite sync) HD (H Sync) Input Connector (during separate sync) * TTL level (75) J3 (VD) ... VD (V Sync) Input Connector (during separate sync) * TTL level (75)
11-2

Video HG I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pins / Jumper Pins /Volume)
Check Pins Jumper Pins (default setting) Volume
LED
J1 Inputs video signals
J2 CS/HD
J3 VD
Connector for Video HG-Digital board
Fig. 11.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)
11-3

Video HG I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram
Fig. 11.4 Silk Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)
11-4

Video HG I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pins)
Check Pins
Connector for Video HG-Analog board
Fig. 11.5 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Digital Section)
11-5

Video HG I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram
Fig. 11.6 Silk Diagram (Video HG I/F Digital Section)
11-6

11.4.3 LED
(1) Checking the board operation
D12 (POWER) Green : Power source (+5V)
(2)
Checking the video capture operation

D13 (NO VIDEO) D14 (PLL LOCK) D15 (A/D START) Red Yellow Yellow : Lights when no sync signal is input. : Lights when PLL is locked. : Lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when image data is stored.
11.4.4 Jumpers
(1) Setting performed according to different sync signals
Set jumpers according to different sync signals as indicated in the table below. Table 11.1 Jumper Setting of the Sync Signal System
JP No. Sync Signals Composite Video Minus (-) Composite Sync Plus (+) HD minus (-) HD plus (+) Separate Sync VD minus (-) VD plus (+) Default Setting (VS setting)
JP9 HD INT INT INT EXT EXT
JP11 VD INT INT INT
JP7 E.HD
JP8 SYNC VS
JP10 E.VD
NOR INT NOR INT
SEP SEP SEP SEP SEP SEP NOR INT NOR
EXT EXT INT INT NOR
VS
NOTE: * HD and VD in the table indicate silk on the board. * Composite Video : Normal composite signal (composite signal x 1pc.). * Composite Sync : Separate lines are used for video signal and CS (Composite Sync) (signal line x 1pc., SYNC x 1pc.). * Separate Sync : Separate lines are used for the video signal, HD, and VD (signal line x 1pc., SYNC x 2pcs.).
Description of the above JP

JP9 (HD) JP11 (VD) JP7 (E.VD) JP8 (SYNC) JP10 (E.VD) : Selection of INT (composite video or EXT (separate sync or composite sync) for HD. : Selection of INT (composite video) or EXT (separate sync or composite sync) for VD. : Selection of composite sync and separate sync (HD) polarity. : Selection of composite video or composite sync for the sync signal. : Selection of separate sync (VD) polarity.
Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USAVer.1.3 2002.01
11-7

(2) Settings according to the condition of the signal
Table 11.2 Setting Jumpers According to Video Signal Conditions Selection of clock polarity Reversed when the amount of delay*1 is increased. Selection of AC/DC coupling of the video signal Set to AC coupling when the black level voltage exceeds 0.4V. Use / Do Not Use the noise filter Use when noise exists in the original filter. NOR* JP1 INV DC*(DC COUPLING)* JP3 AC*(AC COUPLING) JP4 JP5 *2 DIR (Do Not Use)* FIL (Use) *: Default setting
NOTE : DC and FIL in the table indicate silk on the board. *1 The amount of clock delay is in a range of 0-7.5ns in 0.5ns increments. For signals with low frequency, a broader variable capacity can be obtained by reversing the clock. (Max. 15ns) *2 Be sure perform the same setting to JP4 and 5. (Set both to either DIR or FIL.)
Example: The clock width (width of 1 pixel) for an 80MHz signal is 12.5ns. 1. Set the delay to 0-7.5ns for the NOR setting. 2. Capture is delayed half a pixel (6.25ns) worth when set to INV. Therefore, a delay of 6.25ns can be considered.
7.5ns 12.5ns
NOR Timing of capture (startup) is skewed half a pixel. INV
7.5ns
Total 13.75ns
3. When delay is set to 0-7.5ns in INV, the actual range becomes 6.25-13.75ns. > Considering (1) and (3) above, 0-13.75ns can be set.
(3)
Other jumpers
Table 11.3 Setting Other Jumpers JP6 Open* Pin used for adjustment (not used) *: Default setting
11-8

11.4.5 Descriptions of volumes
RV1 (WHT) RV2 (CMP) RV3 (BLK) RV4 (SHP) RV5 (SHW) RV6 (CPW) RV7 (HDW) RV8 (FIL) : Adjusts the white level of the AD conversion signal. : Adjusts the comparator level of sync separate. : Adjusts the black level of the A/D conversion signal. : Adjusts the phase of the clamp pulse. : Adjusts the width of the clamp pulse. : Adjusts the width of the clamp pulse for sync separation. : Adjusts the width of the HD pulse. : Adjusts the filter of PLL.
11.4.6 Descriptions of test pins

(1) Power source
TP2, 19, 24 - 30 TP20 (+5.5V-PL) TP21 (-5V-PL) TP31 (+5V) TP32 (+12V) TP33 (+5VA) TP34 (-12V) TP35 (-5VA) TP36 (-2V) TP37 (-5VD) : GND : +5.5V PLL power source : -5V PLL power source : +5V digital : +12V : +5V analog : -12V : -5V analog : -2V digital (ECL) : -5V digital (ECL)
(2)
Signals
TP1 (IN) TP3, 4, 5, and 7 TP6 (A/D) TP8 TP9 (CMP) TP10 (CP) TP11 (SCP) TP12 (EXT HD) TP13 (EXT VD) TP14 (HD1) TP15 (VD) TP16 (SYNC) TP17 and 18 TP22 (FA) TP23 (FB) : Input signal : For checking circuits : A/D conversion signal : Comparator input signal : Sync separate comparator level : Clamp pulse : Clamp pulse for sync separate : Separate sync HD : Separate sync VD : Hsync signal : Vsync signal : Sync signal : For checking a PLL circuit : Signal that divides oscillation frequencies : Standard signal of PLL
11-9
11.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board

Refer to Section 11.4.3 and check the LED.
(1)
D12 (POWER) Green

Extinguished ... +5V signal is not supplied to the board. 1. Check the power source voltage of the main Printlink unit. 2. Check the power source of the board (TP31).
(2)
D13 (NO VIDEO) Red

Lit ... Cannot detect video signal / Lights when HD signal is not present. 1. Check the connections. 2. Check the setting (jumper setting of separate sync, etc.) 3. Check the HD1 (TP14) of the original signal. Check the Hsync level, waveform, and HD waveform of the original signal. 4. Check the COM level (TP9). Check the threshold value of the sync separation circuit.
(3)
D14 (PLL LOCK) Yellow

Extinguished ... Cannot lock PLL (Cannot read the image data). 1. Check the presence of a signal. 2. Check the setting of the installation software and board (jumper, etc.). 3. Readjust the video. 4. Check the waveform (the presence of Hsync and serration, etc.).
(4)
D15 (A/D START) Yellow

Lights one time (0.5sec) at the start of image input ... Normal. Does not light at the start of image input ... Cannot read the image data. 1. Check the connections. 2. Readjust the video.
11-10

11.5.2 Checking the Power Source
+5V, -5V, +12V, -12V, -5.2V, and -2V are necessary for Video HG I/F. Since there are many points to check, follow the order below to check TPs on the board. 1. Power supplied from the main Printlink unit TP31(+5V) TP32(+12V) TP34(-12V) ... +5.15V0.25V ... +12V0.36V ... -12V0.6V
2. Voltage that is converted on the board TP33(+5VA) TP34(-2V) TP35(-5VA) TP37(-5VD) 3. PLL Power source TP20(+5.5V-PL) TP21(-5V-PL) ... +5.5V0.32V ... -5V0.32V ... +5V0.2V ... -2V0.15V ... -5V0.2V ... -5V0.25V
If there is an abnormality with the power source, check to see if the traces are short-circuited on the board. If there is an abnormality with TP described in 1., the power source of the main Printlink unit may have a problem. Check the power source of the main Printlink unit and other boards. If there is no abnormality with TP described in 1, but an abnormality with TP described in 2. and 3., the parts on the board may have a problem.
TP31(+5V) TP32(+12V) TP33(+5VA) TP34(-12V) TP35(-5VA) TP36(-2V) TP37(-5VD)
TP21(-5V-PL)
TP20(+5V-PL)
Fig. 11.7 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)
11-11

11.5.3 Remedy for Error
(1) V_HG I/F A/D Timeout (AC1A)
When it takes over 1 second to load data after it has been stored. (Problem with the hardware.) 1. Check the connections. Check to see if separate sync is connected properly. 2. Check the settings. Settings of jumpers. Contents set in the installation software. 3. Abnormalities at the input section. Check that the PLL is locked. Check that the signal level of TP6 (A/D) is stable. Check that HD1 (TP14) and VD (TP15) are properly output. 4. Abnormalities in video signals (original signal). Check that the signals are stable. Check that Hsync and Vsync are properly output (whether they are stable without jitters).
(2)
V_HG I/F signal unrecognized (AC19)

When video signals are not being input. (When they cannot be recognized.) When errors occur by the presence of an HD signal. 1. Check the connections. 2. Check the settings (Jumper setting for the separate sync, etc.). 3. Check the original signal and HD1 (TP14). The level of Hsync -> Adjust the sync separation circuit. The waveform of Hsync -> Change TP9 by adjusting the sync separation circuit. 4. Exchange the board.
11-12

11.5.4 Turbulence of the image
Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitter, noise). -> Check the signal level (DC level variance, voltage amplitude). -> Readjust the board (jumper, volume). Use a filter (JP4, JP5). Readjust the sync separation circuit. Set the AC/DC coupling of input (JP3).
(2)
Loss of dots
Exchange the I/F. Check the memory. Exchange the board.
(3)
Noise
Use the filter on the board by exchanging the jumper (JP4, JP5). Use an external noise filter such as a humkiller. Change the delay and select a location with less noise.
(4)
Crushed or skewed image

Check the setting (H-SIZE, V-SIZE, H-TOTAL). Check the signal (Hsync, Vsync).
11-13

11.5.5 Set modality I/F data (HG Video) dialog box
For HG Video In.
Fig. 11.8 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box I/O IF Type Serial Port Pixel Aspect Ratio Output Pixels H Delay ... Indicates either input or output. ... Indicates the IF type. ... Select COM2 as the serial port. ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixel. ... Set the sync delay in the horizontal direction. For internal clock: A max. of 7.5ns can be set in 0.5ns increments. H-Total Size ... Set the number of all images in the horizontal direction. ... Set the image size. H: Horizontal size of the image. V: Vertical size of the image. Back Porch H+Sync Back Porch V Store Delay Interlace ... Input the total of the horizontal sync signals and horizontal back porches. ... Set the value of the vertical back porch. ... Input the time from receiving a store command from the controller to sending a reply. ... Set interlace or no interlace. Interlace No Interlace ODD/EVEN : Every other line of the image data will be sent . : Image data will be sent in order.
... Set the line during interlace. Normal: Does not reverse the line. Reverse: Reverses the line.
Set Reverse
... Set whether or not to reverse the image data. Normal: Does not reverse. Reverse: Reverses the image data.
11-14

11.6.1 Procedure for the adjustment upon the installation
Follow the procedure below for installation. The number in each block corresponds to the number of item (the number in Section 11.6.2).
(1) Check original signals.
(2) Set jumpers.
(3) Adjust levels.
(4) Check or (adjust) sync separation signals.
When the level of Hsync of the original signal is 0.2V or less
Turbulence of images such as jitters

(5) Check PLL.
(6) Adjust delay.
(7) Adjust the position of images.
Proper image quality

Check images.
End
Fig. 11.9 Flow Chart for the Adjustment upon the Installation
11-15

11.6.2 Adjusting contents
1. Connect the video image signal to J1 (VS) and check that the input signal level of TP1 (IN) is 1V p-p. Note: The input of signals can be made up to 0.5-2V p-p. 2. Measure the potential of black level (back porch) of the video signal. If the potential is not within 0V0.4V, JP3 should be AC-coupled. 3. Measure the potential difference of GND between the video HG I/F and the Printlink. 4. Check the level of Hsync (Composite video signal). If the level is 0.2V or less, adjust the sync separation circuit.
(2)
Setting jumpers
Check the original signal in the following points and set the jumpers according to Section 11.4.4 (1) and (2). 1. Composite video / separate SYNC (JP7 to 11) 2. Polarity of the SYNC signal (JP7 to 11) 3. DC level of the video signal (the voltage of black level) -> 4. Noise of the video signal -> Setting the DC / AC coupling (JP3) Setting the filter (JP4, JP5)
(3)
Adjusting the level

Apply a trigger at TP6 (A/D) and adjust the black level to +4VDC at RV3 (BLK) while checking the waveform. Then, adjust the white level to +2VDC with RV1 (WHT). Adjust the black level to +4V with RV3 (BLK), and adjust the white level to +2V with RV1 (WHT).
+4V RV3 (BLK)
TP6 (A/D)
+2V RV1 (WHT)
11-16

(4) Adjusting (checking) the sync separation circuit
When the level of Hsync is 0.2 V or less, make this adjustment. Connecting TP23 (FB) with the SYNC input on the oscilloscope, adjust RV2 (CMP) so that the relation TP9 (CMP) and TP8 become as shown in the figure below. Make the same settings of the oscilloscope at TP9 and TP8. Especially, be sure to set the same level of the voltage range and the GND level.
TP8 (Input waveform of the comparator) Adjust RV2 (CMP).
Adjust RV2 so that the threshold voltage of TP9 is at approx. one-third from the peak of the SYNC waveform of TP8.
TP9 (Threshold voltage of the comparator) Note: This adjustment will affect other settings. Therefore, make readjustments for delay, and check the PLL lock.
11-17

(5) Checking PLL
Adjusting PLL is not required under normal operations. However, when the signal speed is too slow (approx. 90MHz), readjusting PLL may be needed. Therefore, be sure to check the signal speed. Apply a trigger (startup) at TP23 (FB), and display TP23 (FB) and TP 22 (FA) as shown in the figure below. If the jitter is 2ns or more, adjust RV8 (FIL) so that the jitter becomes 2ns or less.
TP23 (FB) (Trigger)
TP22 (FA)
Enlarge this area and adjust it.
Decrease the value of the time axis of the oscilloscope. TP23 (Trigger) Adjust RV8 (FIL). This deflection is called a jitter. Increase the brightness of the oscilloscope. This deflection is the reason for skewed pixels.
TP22
Adjust RV8 (FIL) so that the jitter of FA is minimized (2ns or less).
11-18

(6) Adjusting delay
The delay value of the video HG I/F is determined with the setting value of the install software and the setting of the JP1 clock (NOR/INV). Delay value = (Setting value of install software x 0.5ns) Install software JP1 setting Delay value : 0-7.5 (0-7.5ns) : NOR/INV (phase reverse function) : 0-7.5ns (JP1 NOR) 7.5-15ns (JP1 INV) For more detailed information on the delay value, refer to *1 in Section 11.4.4 (2). a) Procedure 1. Check that JP1 is set to "NOR". 2. Set the format to approx. 12 frames. If the format is set to too many frames, a small image appears, which makes it difficult to find a proper delay value. Note: For an image with many pixels, it is difficult to check the image. So, set the small number of the frame. 3. Touch the upper-left corner and the lower-left corner on the Set Up screen simultaneously over 1 sec. to switch into the Maintenance screen. Then, touch the arrow key on the upper portion of the screen to enter the VIDEO TEST screen. On this screen, the frames can be stored while the delay values are changed automatically. Set the delay value and touch [START] to store the frame while the delay value is increased automatically one-frame by one-frame.
Fig. 11.10 VIDEO TEST screen The following shows the description of each parameter. "INITIAL DELAYTIME" shows the delay value of the first frame. "INTERVAL TIME" shows the increased value of the delay value for each frame. Touching [START] switches into the normal screen, and stores the frames on one page automatically while the delay value is increased one-frame by one- frame, then prints the stored frame.
11-19

4. Set "INITIAL DELAYTIME" to "0" and "INTERVAL TIME" to "1" and touch [START] to print the stored frame. This sets the delay to 0-6ns (0.5 x 12 frames / 0.5ns increments). * If the image is hard to see, decrease the number of the frame to make one frame larger. 5. Set JP1 to "INV". 6. Set "INITIAL DELAYTIME" to "0" and "INTERVAL TIME" to "1" and touch [START] to print the stored frame. This sets the delay to 6-12ns (0.5 x 12 frames / 0.5ns increments). 7. Continue printing out images with the settings of JP1 and DELAYTIME, and the delay value is set up to 10ns for 100MHz (For 130MHz, 1/130MHz = 7.7ns). 8. Check the printed image with a magnifying glass, and set an optimum delay value of the frame with the install software. Do not change JP1. Write the value of JP1 in [Memo] in the install software.
(7)

The printed image may be skewed as shown in Fig. 11.11. In this case, set the value of [H.Bp+H.Sync] and [V-backporch] with the install software again, referring to the figure below. (Refer to 11.5.5.) Print out the image repeatedly until the image appears properly.
Large
V-backporch
Small H.Bp+H.Sync Large Small Area of printed image
Fig. 11.11 Improper position of image
11-20

11.6.3 Checking and adjusting items under abnormal conditions
Check and adjust the following items only when a proper image is not obtained after the adjustment is made upon the installation. It is not necessary to do under normal conditions.
(1)
Checking and adjusting clamp pulse

a) Pulse width of TP23 (FB) and TP11 (SCP) Apply a trigger (fall time) at TP18, and check that the relation between TP23 (FB) and TP11 (SCP) is as shown in the figure below. If it is not, adjust it. Check that the width of TP23 (FB) is narrower than that of Hsync. If it is wider, adjust RV7 (HDW) so that the width of TP23 (FB) is narrower than that of Hsync. Check that the width of TP11 (S.CLAMP) is narrower than that of TP23 (FB). If it is wider, adjust RV6 (CPW) so that the width of TP11 (S.CLAMP) is narrower than that of TP23 (FB).
TP6 (A/D)
Hsync
This should be narrower than the width of Hsync.
TP23 (FB) 1.2 * Adjust this width with RV7 (HDW).
This should be narrower than the width of TP23 (FB).
TP11 (SCP) 1.0 * Adjust this width with RV6 (CPW).
*: Default setting
11-21

b) Pulse of TP10 (CP) Apply a trigger (fall time) at TP23, and check that the relation among TP23 (FB), TP10 (CP), and TP6 (A/D) is as shown in the figure below. If it is not, adjust it. Check that TP10 (CP) starts up in 0.3s or more after TP23 (FB) falls. If it starts up within 0.3s, adjust the startup of TP23 (FB) with RV4 (SHP). Check that the Hi period of TP10 (CP) is within the back porch period of TP6 (A/D). If it is not, adjust the width of TP10 (CP) with RV5 (SHW).
Hsync TP6 (A/D) The Hi period of TP10 (CP) should be within the back porch period. (It should be as wide as possible.) 1
Adjust the pulse width with RV5. TP10 (CP)
0.3
Adjust the startup of TP10 (CP) with RV4 (SHP).
TP23 (FB) *: Default setting
11-22
Blank page
Blank page

12.1 Common Items for All Output
The following shows the common items for all output. Channel/Printer Name Connect Image Film Type 1 Film Type 2 Stretch Base : Input the name of a connected device. : Set an imager of an output device. : Set a film type of upper tray of the output imager. If there is only one tray in the output imager, this setting is not valid. : Set a film type of lower tray of the output imager. This setting is for the output imager with only one tray. : Select the image size. NoStretch PageMax Install Stretch Mode : The image size is output without being changed. : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one film. : The image size is adjusted to the size set with the input channel (same as the test pattern size). : Select the method of interpolation. BiLinear BiLinear+Edge SP-Line : For bilinear interpolation. : For bilinear and character enhancement interpolation. : For SP-line interpolation.
Fig. 12.1 Change Channel Data Dialog Box
12-1
12.1.1 Setting the format data file

The format that can be selected with the Printlink controller is determined depending on the model of the currently used output imager. The format data file for Li-7/7A/8, Li-10A, Li-21, Li-62P, Li1417D/DH, and DRYPRO722 comes with the Printlink install software (FORMATKC.DAT). 1. Check the format that each imager connected to the Printlink can receive. Set the format file for Li-10A and Li-21 so that the imager can receive all the formats of the image size of 640 x 512. Set the default value for Li-7/7A/8. 2. Search a maximum image size in the modality that is input into the Printlink. When Li-7/7A/8 is included within the output imager; (Maximum image size x Number of frames) > Memory capacity comes with the digital I/F of the Li-7 In the case above, the set number of frames cannot be received. When Li-7 is not included within the output imager; The image data can be received as the contents of the format file that is created with MKFF12. 3. When multiple imagers are connected, only the format that all the imagers can receive can be selected. ("and" for all the imagers should be left out.) If the format data that Imager B can receive, but Imager A cannot, is transferred into Imager A while Imager A is used for backing up Imager B, the data that Imager A cannot receive is not output. In order to prevent such case, this limitation is needed. Click the [FORMAT] while the Change Channel Data dialog box appears. The Set Format Data dialog box will be displayed.
Fig 12.2 Set Format Data Dialog Box
12-2

When clicking the [DEFAULT], the default format data that is set for each model of the imager on the previous screen is called. Remove the checkmarks from the unused formats if you use the backup imager, etc. Make the same setting for channels 2, 3, 4, and 5. Click the [CUSTOM FORMAT] when you wish to set the custom format while Li-62P is connected. The Set Custom Format Data dialog box will be displayed.
Fig 12.3 Set Custom Format Data Dialog Box Note: For the setting method of the custom formats, contact the factory.
12-3

12.1.2 Setting error converting data
The error converting data is for setting the conversion table. It is used when error codes are different when other company's imager is connected. If you do not use other company's imager, use the default settings. Click the [ERROR CODE] while the Change Channel Data dialog box appears. The Set Error Code dialog box will be displayed.
Fig 12.4 Set Error Code Dialog Box In order to change the settings, click the number to be changed and click the [CHANGE].
Fig 12.5 Change Error Code Dialog Box
12-4
12.2 Output Settings

In order to make output settings, select the setting in the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box. 1. Display the Change Channel Data dialog box. Click the [Channel (C)] in the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window.
Fig. 12.6 Set (S) menu in the Printlink Maintenance window 2. Set Toshiba IN to Channel 1. Click Channel 1 and select [Toshiba IN] for the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box. Select the protocol in the Protocol Name that matches the connection.
Fig. 12.7 Change Channel Data Dialog Box Note: The Protocol is a procedure or agreement that is required for communicating with other devices. For Printlink, one protocol is allocated to one channel. For more detailed information on the procedure, refer to the following sections. 9. Setting the Digital I/F 12.3 HSTP Output Settings 12.4 DICOM PRINT Output Settings 12.5 DICOM STRAGE Output Settings
12-5
12.3 HSTP Output Settings

Confirm the following items with the network manager before installation. The IP address of the connected device 1. Set the HSTP OUT Protocol. Setting the HSTP OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box. Click the [SET] to display the Set HSTP Data dialog box.
Fig. 12.8 Set HSTP Data Dialog Box 2. Set the item associated with the entire DICOM. Max Image Size H, V Sheet Type LUT Select Interpolation Tag Type Pixel Size Curve Type Density Max Density Min Window Start/End Pivot Density Pivot Gray Level Contrast Curve Shoulder/Toe Brightness : Set the image display maximum size of Li-1417D/DH by the "cm". Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default. : Leave it at its default.
12-6

Nega/Posi Rotate : Leave it at its default. : None ... Without rotate format. : Right ... With rotate format (right rotation). : Left ... With rotate format (left rotation). Version TTO Retry Retry Interval Retry Count Request Status : Set the type of Li-1417D. Li-1417D, Li-1417DH : Leave it at its default. : Set it according to Table 12.1. : Set it according to Table 12.1. : Set it according to Table 12.1. Table 12.1 Retry Request Setting Examples Number of connected devices Item name 1 to 3 units Request Status Li-1417DH Retry Interval Retry Count Request Status Li-1417D Retry Interval Retry Count 60sec 40sec 10 times 60sec 14sec 150 times 4 to 12 units 60sec 60sec 10 times 60sec 14sec 300 times
12-7
12.4 DICOM PRINT Output Settings

Confirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting. The IP address of the connected device The AE title and port number of the other party if the output source is other than Printlink. The port number can be set from 1 to 65535, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers. Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316, 5317 1. Set the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol. Setting the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box. Click the [SET] to display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.
Fig. 12.9 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box 2. Set the item associated with the entire DICOM. Port No.: Input the port number designated by the connected device. PDU Size: Set the PDU size. Size H/V: Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity. AE Title (SCP): Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set. AE Title (SCU): Input the AE title of your own device. If the connection is between Printlinks, the default can be used. However, if some other devices are connected to more than one Printlink, it should be changed when a unique AE title is required. Modality: Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected. Socket Buf: Set the socket buffer. (Default is 2048.) Private Data: Set whether or not to transmit the Konica private tag.
12-8

3. Perform the settings for DICOM PRINT. N-EVENT Port No.: When the connected device is Printlink-OD or Li-62P DICOM, perform the same setting as the NEVENT Port No. of the other party. Max Density: When the imager is directly connected to the DICOM, set the maximum density of the film. Output Kind: When the connected device is Konica's imager, set to BIN_XX. When connecting to other company's device, select Processor. EK Mode: Set this item when the connected device is EK's imager, etc. 4. When all settings are completed, click the [OK] to return to the Change Channel Data dialog box. This will complete setting for DICOM Print Out. 5. For information on the connection of other company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.
12-9
12.5 DICOM STORAGE Output Settings

Confirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting. The IP address of the connected device The AE title and port number of the other party if the output source is other than Printlink. The port number can be set from 1 to 65535, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers. Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316, 5317
12.5.1 DICOM STORAGE output settings

1. Set the DICOM STORAGE OUT Protocol. Setting the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box. Click the [SET] to display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.
Fig. 12.10 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box
12-10

2. Set the item associated with the entire DICOM. Port No. PDU Size Size H/V AE Title (SCP) AE Title (SCU) Modality Socket Buf Private Data Conversion Type : Input the port number designated by the connected device. : Set the PDU size. : Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity. : Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set. : Input the AE title of your own device. A unique AE title is required. : Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected. (Refer to "Specifying Diagnostic Device Type" in Appendix for the diagnostic type that can be used.) : Set the socket buffer. (Default is 2048.) : Set whether or not to transmit the Konica private tag. : Set an original type of output images. (This is fixed at output device.) DV DI DF WSD Image Type : Digitized video : Digital interface : Digitized film : Work station : Original image : Derived image : Primary captured image : Secondary captured image
3. Set the items for DICOM STORAGE.
: Set a type of image. (This is fixed at output device.) ORIGINAL DERIVED PRIMARY SECONDARY
Set the combination above. Secondary Capture Device Video Image Acquired Digital Image Manufacture Digital Image Acquired Institution Name Institution Address : The name of the device that converts images. : Original signal format of the acquired video image. : Manufacturer of capture devices : Additional information of digital I/F that is used for acquiring images. : The name of an institution : The address of an institution
Enter the parameters above using alphanumerics (single-byte). It is not necessary to enter the parameters that the system does not require (e.g. The parameter is fixed at the imager server). Output VOI LUT Output Name : Set to Cancel under normal conditions. If set to Go, LUT data other than image data are transmitted. : Check the settings of the connected device, and select "ASCII Only" when the multi-byte is not used for entering the patient name. Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only. Select \ISO 2022 IR87\ISO 2022 IR 13 for the multi-byte. OCR Other 1 Use OCR Other 2 Use : These settings are valid only when "Other 1" and "Other 2" are set to "recognized" when the character recognition is set. These settings determine which data is allocated to the recogni tion result. Refer to the operation of Other 1 and 2 described in Section 12.5.4. 4. When all settings are completed, click the [OK] to return to the Change Channel Data dialog box. This will complete setting for DICOM PRINT OUT. 5. For information on the connection of other company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.
12-11

12.5.2 DICOM multi-byte
Since the DICOM is a developed model from the ACR-NEMA, the valid parameter is only ASCII characters. In Japan, in order to use Kanji or Kana, the DICOM multi-byte is devised. The following shows the procedure for using Kanji and Kana. Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only. 1. Register sets of characters. Register characters that you wish to use in an association (each command) in advance. The default setting is ASCII characters only. To use single-byte Kana, set ISO 2022 IR13 and to use Kanji, set ISO 2022 IR87. Characters can be registered as many as you wish, but each set of characters should be separated by "\" as a character string. Various kinds of character sets are defined in the DICOM standards. 2. Change the sets of character (registered characters) used for each tag and output them. Change the sets of character with the ESC sequence. When you start to enter the data of tag, the ASCII code is always selected. So, if you want to use Kanji, output ESC 04 02 and then output Kanji in JIS code. If necessary, the type of characters can be changed as frequently as you wish in each tag. 3. Since the name such as Patient Name is special, the forms below are followed. The name should be described using three sets of characters shown below, connecting them by "=", and are output as one character string. (Name described using a single byte) = (Name described using ideographic characters) = (Name described using phonetic characters) If the output device does not support the multi-byte output, an error occurs. So, be sure to check that the output device supports the multi-byte output before operation. The Printlink input supports the multi-byte.
12.5.3 Checking items associated with Storage upon character recognition

Check the following items associated with DICOM Storage upon character recognition. Configuration of entire system Operation/limitation of the receiving devices Handling recognition errors The following explains the checking items above.
(1)
Configuration of entire system

a) Which device does the Printlink output data into ? -> Check the image viewer, manufacturer of the server, and version in order to confirm that the connection test with the Printlink has been performed. b) What does a user wish to do ? -> Confirm what a user wish to do. Do not make more settings than a user expects. A user just wants to save the data in the image server: Search keys at the server (e.g. Only patient ID is required, etc.) With what does a user want to search ?: Check the usage, exposure date, reception number, and name, and set only the necessary items. A user just wants to see with a viewer: Recognition errors on parameters may not be a problem. Re-exposure is required or not, etc.
12-12

(2) Operation/limitation of the receiving devices
a) What is required as a search key of data ? -> Confirm with a manager of an image server, etc. Or ask a person in charge at a hospital what is set as a search key. The search key should be included in patient ID, Name, and Other 1, 2. b) Is there necessary items or parameters at the image server (viewers, etc.) ? -> If the image is not transmitted, check to see if there are any items that work improperly at the server. Also, check the contents of the parameters (e.g. the number of data bytes, type of characters, and special character strings, etc.). Then, check if those contents are matched to the character recognition results. c) Is the re-exposed image transmitted from the server ? -> Since the parameter of the Print conditions are affected by the settings of the network controller as shown in the previous section, perform the test to check that a proper image is output. In order to change the Print conditions for each image, it is necessary to change them with the network controller. d) e) Is LUT data needed at the image server ? -> If necessary, set OUTPUT VOI LUT to Go with the Storage output CH. Is a comparison made ? -> Check the parameters for comparison and set them with the Printlink. Check the operation when a comparison error occurs. Refer to (3). f) Is the multi-byte output necessary or not ? -> If necessary, set this item. After setting, be sure to perform the test. Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only. g) How to deal with Study ? -> Is there anything that can be complied into Study ? : Check the patient ID, patient name, reception number, and association unit of DICOM. What is a condition to change Study ? : Check the time and others when the Patient ID is changed.
(3)
Handling recognition errors

a) Can output character strings contain "?" upon recognition errors ? -> Confirm with an image server. The operations performed when the output character string contains "?" should be clarified (e.g. The image cannot be saved; The image is integrated with other error images; No problem; Reception is not possible until a user changes the data, etc.) Check to see that there is no problem considering the system or a user demand. b) How to deal with the system upon recognition errors ? -> When recognition errors cannot be allowed: Recognize only reliable items, such as ID. Or operate with controller input of only ID. Even if a recognition error occurs, it can be changed before operation: Check the result when it is stored, and change it with the controller. Do not mind even if a recognition error occurs: The data can be changed at the server, or a user does not mind an error since it is a viewer.
12-13

12.5.4 Operation of Other 1, 2 (Ver. 1.10)
The characters are recognized at four points in a film from Ver. 1.10. In order to recognize two points except ID and NAME properly and perform DICOM output (Storage), it is necessary to set the Printlink install software and OCR install software properly. Set the character recognition of Other 1, 2. Use the same method as the recognition of ID and NAME.
Set Other 1, 2 of the DS_OUT channel of the Printlink install software. Select the tag on the DICOM into which the recognized result is input.
Important: Since the Printlink outputs the recognized character strings as they are, the character strings should be matched to the output form of each tag of the DICOM.
(1) Algorithm of output

Unlike the ID and NAME, the character strings in Other 1, 2 are not output as they are recognized. The internal Printlink outputs data in the following order (concept). a) b) c) When the result of the recognized characters is matched to the DICOM standards; -> Outputs the recognized result. When the result of the recognized characters is not matched to the DICOM standards; -> Outputs only the tag. (The actual data is not output.) When the characters are not recognized (Character recognition: OFF), and the tag set in Other 1, 2 is always the same as the tag output from the Printlink (e.g. Study Date, etc.); -> The data added with the Printlink is inserted into the concerned tag, and output. Currently there is a tag of fixed output with no data (length=0). (The same operation when "None" is set into Other 1, 2.) d) When the characters are not recognized (Character recognition: OFF), and the tag set in Other 1, 2 is the one that is not usually added with the Printlink (e.g. Accession Number, etc.): -> Outputs only the tag. (The actual data is not output.)
12-14

(2) Operation of selectable parameters
The table below shows the output character strings. Character recognition status Printlink install settings (Other 1/2) Study ID Accession Number Series Number Adminssion ID Study Date(Time) Patient's Birth Date Patient's Sex Patient's Age Requesting Service
Character recognition: OFF
Character recognition: ON (DICOM format)
Character recognition: ON (Non-DICOM format)
Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. System date / time when printing Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Does not output tags. Does not output tags.
Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings.
Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags.
Requesting Physician
Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Does not output tags. Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings. Outputs the result of the recognized character strings.
Outputs only tags.
Referring Physician's Name
Outputs only tags.
Outputs only tags.
Body Part Examined Institution Name Placer Order number Filter Order number
Does not output tags. Installed data Does not output tags. Does not output tags.
Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags. Outputs only tags.
12-15

(3) Standards of each parameter
The table below shows the DICOM standards of the character recognition for each parameter. The character recognition complies with both the DICOM standards below and the settings of the Printlink. Valid character types Study ID Accession Number Series Number Adminssion ID Study Date Study Time Patient's Birth Date Patient's Sex Patient's Age Requesting Service Requesting Physician Referring Physician's Name Body Part Examined Institution Name Placer Order number Filter Order number Size Expression No limitation No limitation No limitation No limitation yyyymmdd (year, month, date) only hhmmss (hour, minute, second) or a maximum 16 bytes of hhmmss.xxx yyyymmdd (year, month, date) only M (Male) F (Female) O (Other) Any one of nnnD, nnnW, nnnM, or nnnY only. nnn=000-999, D = date, W = week, M = month, Y = year No limitation No limitation No limitation *1 No limitation No limitation No limitation
Alphanumerics / Symbol 16 bytes or less Alphanumerics / Symbol 16 bytes or less 0-9, +, 12 bytes or less
Alphanumerics / Symbol 64 bytes or less 0-9, . 0-9, . 0-9, . M, F, O only 0-9, D, W, M, Y 8 bytes fixed 8 bytes fixed or 16 bytes or less 8 bytes fixed 1 byte fixed 4 bytes fixed
Alphanumerics / Symbol 64 bytes or less Alphanumerics / Symbol Alphanumerics / Symbol Alphanumerics 64 characters or less (64 characters for each "=") 64 characters or less (64 characters for each "=") 16 bytes or less
Alphanumerics / Symbol 64 bytes or less Alphanumerics / Symbol 16 bytes or less Alphanumerics / Symbol 16 bytes or less
*1: Only the following character strings are valid. SKULL, CSPINE, TSPINE, LSPINE, SSPINE, COCCYK, CHEST, CLAVICLE, BREAST, ABDOMEN, PELVIS, HIP, SHOULDER, ELBOW, KNEE, ANKLE, HAND, FOOT, EXTREMITY, HEAD, HEART, NECK, LEG, ARM, JAW
12-16
Blank page
Blank page
13 Additional Functions
13.1 Multi-clients ( Modality Connections)
The multi-clients function allows Printlink-IN and Printlink-OD make multiple input/output into/from Toshiba Ether and DICOM PRINT IN. However, the limitations below have to be followed.
Limitations
1. A maximum 8 channels of input and output combined is made for Printlink-IN, and 17 channels for Printlink-OD. 2. Toshiba Ether, DICOM PRINT IN and DICOM STORAGE IN cannot be used together. 3. For other company's diagnostic device, only the device that supports the multi-connection can be used. Refer to "DICOM Connection Results Table" in the home page to see whether the device supports the multi-connection or not. 4. Printlink version should be 1.04 or later.
13.1.1 Toshiba Ether

This section shows the example of the following system. Multi-clients setting TOSHIBA R1 192.168.2.10 TOSHIBA CT1 192.168.2.11 TOSHIBA CT2 192.168.2.12 PRINT LINK 192.168.2.13
192.168.2.20
192.168.2.21
DRYPRO722 -1
DRYPRO722 -2
: Flow of data
Fig. 13.1 Example of Toshiba Ether Multiple Input System In the system of the Printlink, determine which imager the input diagnostic device outputs the data into. Table 13.1 shows the system example above. Table 13.1 Setting Example Device RI CT1 CT2 Writing Address of the own device 192.168.20.10/192.168.20.11/192.168.20.12/ AE TITLE TOSHIBA IN (Only one) DICOM PRINT IN DICOM PRINT IN Input protocol Output protocol TOSHIBA IN TOSHIBA IN TOSHIBA IN DICOM PRINT OUT DICOM PRINT OUT Output device Address/port 192.168.20.13 192.168.20.13 192.168.20.13 192.168.2.20/6020 192.168.2.21/6020
Printlink-IN
None
192.168.20.13/-
KC_PLNK_SCU
DRYPRO722-1 DRYPRO722-2
192.168.2.20/6020 192.168.2.20/6020
KC_DPRO_P001 KC_DPRO_P002
13-1
(1) Setting channels
In the system example on the previous page, only one channel is used to receive from multiple clients as shown in the figure below, instead of using three channels. Even when multiple Toshiba modalities are connected, only one channel is used.
Even when multiple Toshiba modalities are connected, only one channel is used.
Fig. 13.2 Set Channel Data Dialog Box
(2)
Setting routes
When multiple Toshiba modalities are connected, it is not necessary to set the address of the routes.
Address is not required.
Fig. 13.3 Change Route Data Dialog Box
13-2
13.1.2 DICOM PRINT IN
This section shows the example of the following system.
Modality 1 SOMATOM
Modality 2 GCA901
Modality 3 Other company's DICOM 192.168.2.5 Multi-clients (Modality) setting Printlink -IN 192.168.20.13
Printlink -ID 192.168.20.11
Printlink -IV 192.168.20.12
192.168.20.20
192.168.20.21
DRYPRO722 -1
DRYPRO722 -2
: Flow of data
Fig. 13.5 Example of DICOM System In the system of the Printlink, determine which imager the input diagnostic device outputs the data into. Table 13.2 shows the system example above. Table 13.2 DICOM System Example Device DICOM Printlink-ID Printlink-IV Writing Used Used Address of the own device 192.168.2.5/192.168.2.11/192.168.2.12/192.168.20.13/6001 / 6002 / 6003
192.168.20.20/6000
AE TITLE DICOM_PRINT
Input protocol
Output protocol TOSHIBA IN TOSHIBA IN TOSHIBA IN
Output device Address/port 192.168.20.13/6001 192.168.20.13/6002 192.168.20.13/6003 192.168.20.20/6 000 192.168.20.21/6100
KC_PLNK_SCU01 KC_PLNK_SCU01 KC_PLNK_SCP01 KC_PLNK_SCP02 KC_PLNK_SCP03 KC_DPRO_P00 KC_DPRO_P00
Printlink-IN
None
DICOM PRINT DICOM PRINT IN OUT DICOM PRINT IN DICOM PRINT DICOM PRINT IN OUT DICOM PRINT IN DICOM PRINT IN
DRYPRO722-1 RYPRO722-2
192.168.20.21/6100 9 0
13-3
For the system example in the previous page, three channels are set for each input modality.
Set multiple DICOMs.
Fig. 13.6 Set Change Data Dialog Box
(2)
Setting routes
Set the output device for each input when multiple output devices are set as shown in the figure below.
Multiple input channels are set in the Route setting.
13.2 Network Controller Default Function

Purpose of use: Using the controller, set the parameters that are not transmitted from the modality of the other party with Toshiba Ether or DICOM protocol. Default setting items (The settings with the controller are valid when the parameters are not transmitted.) Priority, Medium Type, Film Destination (output place), Film Size, Smoothing Type, Border Density Trim, Configuration Information (LUT), Contrast, Density, Glossy, and Polarity For example, with Toshiba Ether protocol, Medium Type, Film Destination, Contrast, Density, and Glossy are not transmitted. So, the settings with the network controller are valid. Note: Refer to "DICOM Connection Results Table" for more detailed information on DICOM.
13-4
13.3 Printlink-OD Backup (redundency)

Purpose of use: The figure below shows the system in which the imagers of Li-10A and Li-21 serve as backups. In this system, when a problem with Li-10A occurs while Printlink-OD-1 outputs, the queues that are accumulated in Printlink-OD1 are output via another route. Therefore, the Printlink-OD supports network 16 outputs (DICOM PRINT OUT, HSTP) and 1 digital output and has a maximum of 17 channels for input and output combined.
Printlink -ID 192.168.20.10
Printlink -IV 192.168.20.11 : Flow of data
192.168.20.20 PrintlinkOD-1
192.168.20.21 LT-01A Li-21 PrintlinkOD-2 Backup environment Fig. 13.8 Backup System Example
Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USAVer.1.2 2001.10
13-5
Select DICOM PRINT or HSTP in the Printlink-OD as shown in the figure below. 2ch: Backup for Li-62P-2 5ch: Backup from Li-62P-2
Backup between OD
Fig. 13.9 Set Change Data Dialog Box
(2)
Setting routes
In the setting below, routes 4 and 5 are the backup routes.
Backup route
13-6
13.4 Bit Conversion

(1) Description
This function converts the length of data for input and output. This is added from the Printlink Ver. 1.04 and the install software Ver.1.04. When the internal Printlink performs LUT processing while the imager with 12-bit input is installed, the setting of input is converted to 12 bits.
When the DRYPRO722 is installed, You must set to 12 bits. The following shows how to set to 12 bits.
The setting is made when installing the software. Select 8bits or 12 bits in [Output pixels] of all input protocol of the install software. When 12 bits is selected, 8-bit input data is converted into 12 bits, and 12-bit input data is processed as it is.
(2)
Note: Caution on connection

Perform LUT upon input. When performing LUT in the Printlink, change the bit conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits. Save 12-bit data image as 12-bit data. Prepare an I/F or cable for 12-bit input of Li-8, 10A, 21, 62P.
13-7
(3) Method of settings
Make all the settings with the maintenance software except connecting cables, etc. 1. Set the LUT with the maintenance software. 2. Set the Convert LUT of the channel to ON. 3. Change the Output Pixels with the input channel to 12 bits. Now the data is saved in the bit format specified in the Output Pixels. (When set to 8 bits, the data is saved as the 8-bit data, and set to 12 bits, as the 12-bit data.) When the settings are made as shown in Fig. 13.11, the data in the Printlink of Video IN is saved as 12-bit data, and the data in the Printlink of the DICOM PRINT IN is also saved as 12-bit data. When "8 bits" is specified in the DICOM PRINT IN, the 12-bit receiving data is saved as 8-bit data, and some information will be lost. Ethernet LUT Li-8 Modality Print Link-IV 12bit Print Link-OD 12bit
Contents of settings
Contents of settings
Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box Set DICOM Data Dialog Box Fig. 13.11 Setting Screen
13-8
(4) Compatibility with earlier versions
If the data in the Printlink Ver. 1.03 or earlier is read with the install software Ver. 1.04, the setting of "Output pixels" is the default value, "8 bits". In this case, set "Output pixels" to 12 bits again, and install the Printlink.
When the setting is not changed;
Modality 1
12bit
Print link
8bit
Print link
12bit
Li-62p
8 bits is selected. Connection example
Modality 1
12bit
Print link
12bit
Print link 12bit 12bit
12bit
DRYPRO 722
Modality 2
Print link
(5)
The reason why the bit conversion is needed:

When performing the LUT conversion, if the data lengths for input and output are the same, this will lower the levels of the gradation. Therefore, it is necessary to convert bits. However, the bit conversion is not needed for the linear setting. Conversion from 8 bits to 8 bits
255(8bit)
Magnified Input
121 120 152
Output
255 (8bit)
Even when the calculated value is 152.3, since 8-bits system does not indicate the fractional portions of the number, 152.3 is considered 152. This value is the same as the one which is obtained when the input value is 120.
152 Fig. 13.12 Conversion from 8 bits to 8 bits
13-9
Conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits 255(8bit)
Magnified Input
121 120
Output
4095
2423
Since more precise conversion can be made in 12-bit setting, different result values can be obtained.
2426 Fig. 13.13 Conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits Linear setting (from 8 bits to 8 bits) 255(8bit)
Magnified Input
121 Those values are always 120 different in the linear setting. 120 121
Output
255 (8bit) Fig. 13.14 Linear Conversion
It is necessary to convert the bits when performing the LUT processing in the Printlink as shown in the figure above. Since converting the bits will result in producing a 12-bit image, a 12-bit I/F and cable are needed for input.
13-10
(6) Connection example
When new imagers (DRYPRO722 and DH) are added to the existing Li-8; Existing system Ethernet LUT Li-8 Modality Print Link-ID 8bit Print Link-OD 8bit
Fig 13.15 Existing System New system 12-bit digital cable LUT Ethernet
Li-8 Modality Print Link-ID 12bit Print Link-OD 12bit 12bitI/F
Change to 12-bit setting.
12bit
DRYPRO 722
12bit
1417 DH
Fig 13.16 New System
13-11
(7) Exceptional case
If 12-bit kits for Li-8 cannot be prepared, it is possible to make 8-bit setting. In this case, however, the levels of the gradation will be lowered. 8 bit can be set. LUT Ethernet
Li-8 Modality Print Link-ID 12bit Print Link-OD 12bit 12bitI/F
Change to 12-bit setting.
12bit
DRYPRO 722
Fig 13.17 System
13-12
13.5 STRETCH (Equating different image sizes in the same page)

(1) Function
When different image sizes are stored in the same page, the image sizes are equated and output.
(2)
Settings
All settings are performed in the maintenance software. 1. Select "OFF" for [Image Size Check] of the input channel. 2. Select the image size (Stretch Base) from the following three modes: NoStretch PageMax Install BiLinear BiLinear+Edge SP-Line : The image size is output without being changed. : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one page. : The image size is adjusted to the size set in the input channel (same as the test pattern size). : For bilinear interpolation. : For bilinear and character enhancement interpolation. : For SP-line interpolation.
3. Select the Stretch Mode of the output channel from the following three modes:
The STRETCH function is executed when an output is produced. The settings above do not affect the stored image size. Each output channel has a basic MODE.
Figure 13.18 Change Channel Data (DIGITAL IN) Dialog Box
13-13
Figure 13.19 Change Channel Data Dialog Box
(3)
Stretch ratio
If the length-to-width ratio of the image before stretching is different from that after stretching, the smaller scaling factor is selected. 512 x 512 -> 1024 x 1024 Width: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512) Length: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512) Both scaling factors are the same; therefore the image is magnified by twice. 1024
512 1024 512
Fig. 13.20 STRETCH (1024 x 1024) 512 x 512 -> 1280 x 1024 Width: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512) Length: The scaling factor is 2.5 times. (=1280/512) The smaller scaling factor, twice, is selected. The image is centered longitudinally. The data of 00 is in the remaining space. 1024
512 1024 512 1280
Fig. 13.21 STRETCH (1280 x 1024)
13-14
13.6 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINT

The Printlink outputs the STORAGE input data to each imager. This function is valid only when the Printlink-IN or -OD with the network input is used.
STORAGE input
PRINT output (DIGITAL, HSTP, DICOM) Printlink-IN,OD
Fig. 13.22 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINT
(1)
Settings
Set the STORAGE input channel and output channel and set them as the route settings. Printlink automatically checks if those setting are set as the routes, and outputs them properly.
(2)
Print timing
Since there is no concept of format/print for STORAGE input, the following timing is considered as the separation of pages. a) When the association of STORAGE input ends. b) When all the formats set with the network controller are filled. Timing for printing is the end of the association of the STORAGE input. Assuming that the Printlink operates with the setting of one association equating to one study, when the one association ends, several pages are printed out. Note: When the formats are sent from the Konica DICOM, they are ignored.
(3)
Print conditions
The print conditions are the ones set with the network controller. Note: The conditions of Konica DICOM are ignored.
(4)
Print example
STORAGE input
PRINT output (DIGITAL, HSTP, DICOM) Printlink-IN,OD
One association = 11 images Setting of network controller = 2 x 2 First page Second page Third page
Four frames Four frames Three frames
When the association ends, these are printed out together as a study.
Fig. 13.23 Print Example
13-15
Blank page
14. Setting the Route

Setting the route means to set the input and output of a data, and it defines which channel data is input and which channel it is output. The ratio of the route input and output is usually 1 to 1. 1. Display the Set Route Data dialog box. Click [Route (C)] under the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window. 2. Set the numbers for input and output. Display the [Change Route Data] dialog box by double-clicking 1 for Route ID in the [Set Route Data] dialog box or by clicking [OK]. NOTE: The [Channel Set Data] dialog will appear along with the [Set Route Data] dialog box so that the set condition of the channel could be confirmed upon setting the route.
Fig. 14.1 Channel Route Data Dialog Box 3. Individual settings Route ID The route number is displayed. Route Name Input the route name. The name is displayed in Output Modality of the controller. Input Set the input channel. For network input, set the IP address of the other party. Output Set the output channel. For network output, set the IP address of the other party. NOTE: The second column in output is for setting 2 simultaneous outputs. This is not used normally, but it should be set when filing while making an output with systems such as the filing system.
14-1
14. Setting the Route
Input Channel IP Address
Output Channel
Fig. 14.2 Example of a Change Route Data Setting 4. Click [OK] when all setting are completed and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog box. The route setting has now been completed.
14-2
Blank page
Blank page
15. Saving and Sending Data

15.1 Saving and Sending Data
The methods to save and send data are indicated below. 1. Save the installed data in a file when the settings are completed. The [Save Data File] dialog box shown in Fig. 15.1 will appear by clicking [Save As (A)] under the [File] menu in the [Printlink Maintenance] window. All installed data that have been set up to this point will be saved by inputting the name of the Save Data File and clicking [Set].
Fig. 15.1 Save Data File Dialog Box 2. When the file is saved, send the set data to the main Printlink unit. Click [PC-> Printlink (P)] under the [File] menu in the [Printlink Maintenance] window. A dialog box confirming the IP address of the connected device and the direction of data transmission will appear.
Fig. 15.2 Confirmation Dialog Box 3. After confirming the IP address of the destination and distinguishing transmission or reception, click [OK].
Fig. 15.3 Sending Data Window Setting data using an installation software has now been completed.
15-1
15. Saving and Sending Data

Set the output I/F and input I/F by leaving the installation software activated. Saving and sending the set data will result in the same way as when doing them after the input I/F setting has been completed. However, if the installation software is closed without saving and sending the data, the set data will be lost. Therefore, try to save and send every now and then.
15.2 Procedures for reinstallation

1. Start up Plnkmtn.exe. 2. Select [Open (O)] in the [File] menu.
Fig. 15.4 Printlink File Menu 3. The previous data file will be loaded. Inputting a file name is required at this time. 4. Select [PC-> Printlink (P)] in the [File] menu, and send the data file to Printlink.
15-2
Blank page
Blank page
16. Controller (Keypad) Settings

In order to make various settings on the controller, it is necessary to connect the controller with the Printlink main unit and to insert the input interface.
16.1 Setting jumpers

Open the controller and set the jumpers. The upper portion of the controller (on the LCD side) is fixed with the two screws and the hooks near the front. Table 16.1 Setting the Jumpers of the Controller RS-232C JP2 RS-422A RS-232C JP3 RS-422A 3-4 OPEN 1-2 *2 1-2 *2 The signal level between the Printlink main unit and the controller is fixed with the RS-232C. (Note that the RS-422A setting is not used.) Sets the signal level that is used when the host controller is connected. *1
*1: The settings should be matched to the those of the diagnostic device. Refer to the manual for the diagnostic device. *2: This is a default setting.
16-1
16. Controller Settings
16.2 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen

Enter the Maintenance Setup screen and make settings of various kinds of parameters.
(1)
When the Printlink controller starts up properly, the READY (normal) screen shown in Fig. 16.1 appears.
Fig. 16.1 READY Screen
(2)
Touch SET UP to display the SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.2.
Fig. 16.2 SET UP Screen
16-2

(3) Touch the upper-left and lower-left corners on the SET UP screen simultaneously over 1 second to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.2 above.
Do not show a user how to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen. 1) GENERAL SET UP screen Set the bin of the sorter, the smooth, the number of the film of the magazine.
Fig. 16.3 GENERAL SET UP Screen Table 16.2 GENERAL SET UP Settings No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Display (Example) MAXIMUM SMOOTH MAXIMUM SORTER MINIMUM SORTER COUNTER SUPPLY COUNTER RECEIVE ID SETUP OK CANCEL < > Description Set the number of display of SMOOTH on the PRINT CONDITION screen. Set the upper limit on the number of the sorter bin to be used. *1 Set the lower limit on the number of the sorter bin to be used. *1 Set the number of films in the supply magazine. (When the Li-62P, Li-1417D, or Li-21 is used as the controller, this setting cannot be made.) Set the number of films in the receive magazine. (When the Li-62P, Li-1417D, or Li-21 is used as the controller, this setting cannot be made.) Touching the OCR key switches into the ID SETUP screen. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Cancels the displayed data and sets the data before change. Switches into the VIDEO TEST screen. Switches into the KEYPAD SETUP screen.
*1: This setting is for MAXIMUM SORTER or MINIMUM SORTER.
The range of the number of the sorter bin to be used can be specified with the used controller. Ex) In order to use only bins 2, 3, and 4 with the controller, set the parameters as follows: MAXIMUM SORTER = 6 - Not yet avail. in USA MINIMUM SORTER = 2 Note: Do not set that MINIMUM SORTER value > MAXIMUM SORTER value. Bin numbers that cannot be used are shaded on the SET UP screen.
16-3

2) ID SETUP screen Make the various kinds of settings of the character recognition function.
Fig 16.4 ID SETUP Screen Table 16.3 ID SETUP Settings No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Display (Example) SELECT ID INPUT ANOTHER ID INPUT FILM STAMP NAME FILM STAMP ID FRAME NUMBER ON OCR OK Description Select the setting of the input from the controller (ID INPUT setting) between ID and NAME. Select "RESULT" (character recognition result) that recognizes the characters not selected in No. 1 or "CLEAR". *1 Makes the character recognition result of NAME affect the stamp. *2 Makes the character recognition result of ID affect the stamp. *2 Set the timing for displaying the character recognition result.The controller displays the recognition result on the Printlink main unit after the number of the frames specified in this setting is stored. *3 Finalizes the displayed data, and the GENERAL SETUP screen appears.
*1: When the EDIT on the FUNCTION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect. *2: When the MESS (P-ID) on the PRINT CONDITION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect. When the SELECT ID INPUT is selected, this setting is fixed to ON. Note that the MANUALSTAMP ENABLE on the ADDITION SETUP screen is set to ON, the setting can be changed. *3: The setting can be made from 1 to 64. The set value can be set up to the maximum number of the format frames. When the OCR on the FUNCTION screen is set to ON (any other than OFF), this setting takes effect. Ex) When the format is six frames and the set value is 12, the sixth frame (the last frame) will be affected.
16-4

3) KEYPAD SETUP screen After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting. By pressing the arrow key, the settings are finalized.
Fig. 16.5 KEYPAD SETUP Screen Table 16.4 KEYPAD SETUP Settings No. 1 2 3 4 Display (Example) WAIT TIME LOCAL SW. JOURNAL STORE DELAY Description Set the switching time from the warming up screen to the READY screen (0 to 10 min.). Set to ON when the local SW is connected with the controller. Pressing the ERROR switches into the JOURNAL DATA screen. Set the time from when the image is stored to when the next image is stored. (Set this item for each diagnostic device.) Only when the connected I/F is a digital one, this setting takes effect. When this setting is set to ON and the image is stored on the READY screen, the size of the image to be captured is displayed on the controller. Note: Use this setting only when a test is performed at installation. Controls the brightness of the back-light. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Cancels the displayed data and sets the data before change. Switches into the GENERAL SETUP screen. Switches into the ADDITION SETUP screen.
H/V DISPLAY
6 7 8 9 10
BACKLIGHT OK CANCEL < >
16-5

4) JOURNAL DATA (error log) screen This screen shows historic records when a synchronous error (I/F TIMEOUT, etc.) occurs.
Fig. 16.6 JOURNAL DATA Screen
Up to 5 synchronous errors that have occurred during the past 10 days are displayed in order of occurrence (filled from the left). Up to 5 synchronous errors that have occurred before the past 10 days are displayed in order of occurrence (filled from the left). Table 16.5 JOURNAL DATA Setting No. 1 OK Display (Example) Description Switches into the KEYPAD SETUP screen.
16-6

5) ADDITION SETUP Screen Since this setting is different from the original specification, make this setting only when a user requests. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.
Fig. 16.7 ADDITION SETUP Screen
Fig. 16.8 ADDITION SETUP 2 Screen
Table 16.6 ADDITION SETUP Settings No. 1 2 Display (Example) CONTINUE ERR SIGNAL INTERVAL TIME Description Sounds an error beep continuously. When set to ON, this setting takes effect. Set the interval of sounding an error beep continuously. When CONTINUE ERR SIGNAL is set to ON, this setting takes effect. *1 Set whether or not to display the screen confirming whether or not to delete the page in which an error occurs. When set to ON, "CLEAR OFF THIS PAGE YES/NO" is displayed. The default setting is OFF. When the Printlink is directly connected with the DICOM printer without the Printlink output device, this setting is set to ON. Set whether or not to separate a beep, which is sounded when the last frame key is input, from other store beeps by changing the beep sound. When set to ON, the beep that is sounded when the last frame is stored, is changed. Initializes the controller or performs the cold/hot start. This setting is used only in an emergency. Set whether or not to make the ON/OFF setting of the FILM STAMP ID/NAME on the ID SETUP screen valid. The default setting is OFF. When set to ON, this setting takes effect. Set the command mode for saving the historic records of the communication with the host controller in the Printlink main unit. The default setting is 1. OFF... Does not save the historic records. (Does not issue the LOG command.) 1 ... Issues the LOG command every 1 min. if there is any data. 2 ... Issues the LOG command every 2 min. if there is any data. 3 ... Issues the LOG command every 3 min. if there is any data. 4 ... Issues the LOG command every 4 min. if there is any data. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears.
CLEAR PAGE ON ERROR
END FRAME BUZZER
EMERGENCY MANUAL STAMP ENABLE
LOG SAVE MODE
OK
*1: Select from 03, 05, 10, 20, and 30 sec.
16-7

6) EMERGENCY SETUP screen This function is used in an emergency, such as when the Printlink main unit does not work due to some reason.
Fig. 16.9 EMERGENCY SETUP Screen Table 16.7 EMERGENCY SETUP Setting No. 1 2 3 Display (Example) COLD START HOT START RAM CLEAR Description Clears all the page and starts up the Printlink again. Clears all of the current page, and starts up the Printlink again. Initializes the controller (All the set values are set to the default.), and starts up the Printlink again.
Note: Touching all the keys over 1 sec. makes them take effect.
16-8

7) VIDEO TEST Screen This screen is used to find an optimum delay value when the video I/F is installed. If you do not wish to make a test, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen , and continue setting. By pressing the START key, the video test starts.
Fig. 16.10 VIDEO TEST screen Table 16.8 VIDEO TEST Settings No. 1 2 Display (Example) INITIAL DELAY INTERVAL TIME Description Set the delay value of the first frame. Set the increased value of the delay for each store. Touching this switches into the READY screen, and a video test starts. Set the format in advance. The images with the different delay for each frame are stored automatically. After the image on one page is stored, it is printed out automatically. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Cancels the displayed data and sets the data before change. Switches into the ADDITION SETUP screen. Switches into the GENERAL SETUP screen.
START
4 5 6 7
OK CANCEL < >
16-9
16.3 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen of the Network Controller
Enter the Maintenance Setup screen and make settings of various kinds of parameters.
(1)
When the Printlink controller starts up properly, the READY (normal) screen shown in Fig. 16.11 appears.
Fig. 16.11 READY Screen
(2)
Touch SET UP to display the SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.12.
Fig. 16.12 SET UP Screen
16-10

(3) Touch the upper-left and lower-left corners on the SET UP screen simultaneously over 1 second to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.13.
Do not show a user how to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen. 1) GENERAL SET UP screen Set the bin of the sorter, the smooth, the number of the film of the magazine. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.
Fig. 16.13 GENERAL SET UP Screen Table 16.9 GENERAL SET UP Settings No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Display (Example) MAXIMUM SMOOTH MAXIMUM SORTER MINIMUM SORTER COUNTER SUPPLY COUNTER RECEIVE REFRESH DSP INTERVAL OK CANCEL < > Description Set the number of display of SMOOTH on the PRINT CONDITION screen. Set the upper limit on the number of the sorter bin to be used. *1 Set the lower limit on the number of the sorter bin to be used. *1 Set the number of films in the supply magazine. (When the Li-62P, Li-1417D, or Li-21 is used as the controller, this setting cannot be made.) Set the number of films in the receive magazine. (When the Li-62P, Li-1417D, or Li-21 is used as the controller, this setting cannot be made.) Select the interval of the display for renewing the store or print status from 1 to 10 sec. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Cancels the displayed data and sets the data before change. Switches into the KEYDSPLAY SETUP screen. Switches into the KEYPAD SETUP screen.
*1: This setting is for MAXIMUM SORTER or MINIMUM SORTER. The range of the number of the sorter bin to be used can be specified with the used controller. Ex) In order to use only bins 2, 3, and 4 with the controller, set the parameters as follows: MAXIMUM SORTER = 4 MINIMUM SORTER = 2 Note: Do not set that MINIMUM SORTER value > MAXIMUM SORTER value. The bin numbers that cannot be used are shaded on the SET UP screen.
16-11

2) KEYPAD SETUP screen Make the various kinds of settings of the controller. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.
Fig 16.14 KEYPAD SETUP Screen Table 16.10 KEYPAD SETUP Settings No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Display (Example) WAIT TIME LOCAL SW. ID SET UP STORE DELAY H/V DISPLAY BACKLIGHT OK CANCEL < > Description Set the switching time from the warming up screen to the READY screen (0 to 10 min.). Set to ON when the local SW is connected with the controller. Pressing the OCR switches into the ID SET UP screen. Set the time from when the image is stored to when the next image can be stored. (Set this item for each diagnostic device.) This setting cannot be made with the network controller. It is shaded. Controls the brightness of the back-light. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Cancels the displayed data and sets the data before change. Switches into the GENERAL SETUP screen. Switches into the ADDITION SETUP screen.
16-12

3) ID SET UP Screen Make the various kinds of settings of the character recognition function.
Fig 16.15 ID SET UP Screen Table 16.11 ID SET UP Settings No. 1 2 3 Display (Example) STAMP NAME STAMP ID OK Description Set to ON to make the character recognition result of NAME affect the stamp. *1 Set to ON to make the character recognition result of ID affect the stamp. *1 Finalizes the displayed data, and the KEYPAD SETUP screen appears.
*1: When the MESS (P-ID) on the PRINT CONDITION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect.
16-13

4) ADDITION SETUP Screen After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.
Fig. 16.16 ADDITION SET UP Screen Table 16.12 ADDITION SET UP Settings No. 1 2 Display (Example) CONTINUE ERR SIGNAL INTERVAL TIME Description Sounds an error beep continuously. When set to ON, this setting takes effect. Set the interval of sounding an error beep continuously. When CONTINUE ERR SIGNAL is set to ON, this setting takes effect. Set whether or not to display the screen confirming whether or not to delete the page in which an error occurs. When set to ON, "CLEAR OFF THIS PAGE YES/NO" is displayed. The default setting is OFF. When the Printlink is directly connected with the DICOM printer without the medium of the output device, this setting is set to ON. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Set the time-out value from BUSY to READY in the communication control of the Printlink main unit. (Use the default setting under normal conditions.) Set the count value for issuing the retry after the time-out above. (Use the default setting under normal conditions.) Switches into the KEYDSPLAY SETUP screen. Switches into the KEYPAD SETUP screen.
CLEAR PAGE ON ERROR
4 5 6 7 8
OK INTERVAL ENQ TIME (SEC) INTERVAL ENQ COUNT < >
16-14

5) KEYDSPLAY SETUP screen This function sets the key of the print condition setting of the controller to enable or disable. This screen can disable the print conditions that can be set from the input modality connected in the network for each item. By pressing each item, it is highlighted and disabled. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.
Fig. 16.17 KEYDSPLAY SETUP Screen Table 16.13 KEYDSPLAY SETUP Setting No. 1 2 3 4 Display (Example) INPUT MODALITY OK < > Description Set the number of input modalities in the network that are set on the SETUP screen. Finalizes the displayed data, and the READY screen appears. Switches into the ADDITION SETUP screen. Switches into the GENERAL SETUP screen.
16-15
Blank page

17.1 Parts Required For Installation
(1) Host controller kits
a) File for operating the host controller for download The files are different depending on the manufacturers and models of the diagnostic devices connected to the Printlink. The following shows the types of the file. (The number followed "v" shows the Version No.) b) Host I/F Host I/F Host I/F Host I/F Host I/F Host I/F Host I/F Toshiba X-TENSION Hitachi SHIMADZU YOKOGAWA Siemens Konica toshiv110.bin xtenv110.bin hitav110.bin shimav110.bin ymsv110.bin smsv110.bin kcpv110.bin mpv110.bin - GE -spci set to Li10a or Li21a camera -connect to Konica CR -3M 831 & 952 - also Toshiba
MP host I/F232C/422A
Host internal cables The cables are different depending on the communication specifications of the connected diagnostic devices. The following shows the cable types. Host 232C internal cable Host 422A internal cable MP Host 232C internal cable MP Host 422A internal cable
(2)
Extension cables
The extension cables to be required change depending on the types of the kits.
(3)
Male/female converter
Some diagnostic devices require a male/female converter.
(4)
Bushing receptor for the host controller

This part comes with the controller.
(5)
Binding band
This band is for protecting the host cables.
17-1
17.2 How To Connect Cables and Set Jumpers

This section describes how to open the upper cover of the Printlink controller and to set the jumpers. Note: The upper cover of the Printlink controller (on the LCD side) is fixed with the two screws at the rear of the main unit and the hooks near the front. At the bottom of the controller, the board shown in Fig. 17.1 is attached.
Screws
J4 (HOS232C) Host controller cable 232C connection J3 (HOS422)
10 1
9 1
DIPSW1 (Refer to 15.3.4.) DIPSW2 (Refer to 15.3.4.)
Host controller cable 422A connection JP3 1 2
Controller
Setting the jumpers: 4 232C: Pins 1 and 2 should be short-circuited. 422A: Pins 3 and 4 should be short-circuited.
Fig. 17.1 Controller Board and Connectors 1. Remove the screws that fix the bushing receptor as shown in Fig. 17.2, and detach the bushing receptor from the Printlink controller enclosure. Note that it is necessary to remove the cable connected to the Printlink from the bushing receptor before removing the bushing receptor. In order to remove the cable from the bushing receptor, press the claw on the bushing attached to the cable.
Remove the bushing receptor. Remove the screws.
Bushing receptor Bushing
Press the claws.
Fig. 17.2 How To Remove the Bushing Receptor
17-2

2. Pass one end of the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) that is attached to the ground cable through the right hole on the Printlink controller (viewed from the internal controller). (See Fig. 17.3.)
Host controller cable
Fig. 17.3 Cable Passed Though the Right Hole 3. Attach the binding band at the position approx. 3mm away from the heat-shrinkable tubing. If the binding band is not attached, the signal lines come out of the controller, or they rub against the bushing when the cable is pulled. So, be sure to attach the binding band.
Signal lines
Binding band Width: approx. 3mm
Heat-shrinkable tubing
Fig 17.4 Binding Band and Heat-Shrinkable Tubing 4. Pass the cable connected to the Printlink through the left hole on the bushing receptor for the host controller (viewed from the internal Printlink), and pass the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) through the right hole.
Note: Check the orientation of the bushing receptor. Busing receptor
On the controller side (Inside)
(Outside)
Busing receptor viewed from the side
Fig. 17.5 Bushing Receptor
17-3

5. Hook the claw at the bushing on the bushing receptor as shown in Fig 17.6. In order to do so, press the bushing from the outside into the inside. Orient the claw sideways when pressing the bushing; otherwise, (e.g. when the claw is in a vertical position, etc.) the bottom of the claw may not hook on the receptor.
Bushing
Pressed
Claw
The claw should be hooked on the right and left sides of the receptor.
Fig. 17.6 Bushing Receptor 6. Slowly pull the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) from the outside of the controller so that the binding band contacts the bushing. Pull the cable connected to the Printlink in a similar manner.
They should be contacted each other.
Fig 17.7 Cable and Bushing Receptor 7. Attach the bushing receptor through which the two cables pass, to the controller enclosure as shown in Fig 17.8 and tighten the screws.
Tighten the screws.
Bushing receptor
Fig. 17.8 Bushing Receptor and Enclosure
17-4

8. Connect the connector to the controller board. i) When the host controller cable for RS-232C (with 10 pins) is used; Connect the cable to the connector of the silk HOS232C on the board, and fix the ground cable with the screw. Shortcircuit pins 1 and 2 of the jumper (JP3). (Default Setting)
Tighten the screw (fixing the ground cable).
1 3 Connect to this connector.
Fig 17.9 Connection of RS-232C Host Controller Cable ii) When the host controller cable for RS-422A (with 9 pins) is used; Connect the cable to the connector of the silk HOS422A on the board, and fix the ground cable with the screw. Shortcircuit pins 3 and 4 of the jumper (JP3). (Default Setting)
Tighten the screw (fixing the ground cable).
1 4
Connect to this connector.
Fig 17.10 Connection of RS-422A Host Controller Cable 9. Attach the upper cover and fix it with the screws. 10. Connect the extension cable for the host controller to the host controller cable, and connect the cable to the diagnostic device to be used. 11. Do not exchange the ROM. By downloading the file for operating the host controller, the file is transferred to FLASH ROM. This will complete the connection of the host controller cable and the settings of the jumper.
17-5
17.3 Configuration of Host Controller

17.3.1 Configuration
The configuration of the host controller differs depending on the device to be connected. The host controller is connected to the diagnostic device via the controller as the connection of the imager. The following is required for each host controller kit.
(1)
Controller internal cable

For RS-232C For RS-422A
(2)
Host extension cable

For RS-232C For RS-422A Some other parts may be required for some types of the diagnostic device. For switching between RS-232C and RS-422A, use the jumper (JP3).
(3)
Bushing receptor for the controller (For two harnesses)

Comes with the controller as standards.
17.3.2 Connection
I/F board J2 J1 DIPSW1 DIPSW2 J4 JP2 Host RS-232C cable Host extension cable Diagnostic device Image data cable
J3 EPROM
Host RS-422A cable Selectable between RS-232C and RS-422A
JP3 RS-422A extension cable Diagnostic device
Fig.17-11 Host Controller Connection
17-6

17.3.3 Assignment of pins
(1) Host RS-232C
Table 17.1 Assignment of RS-232C Pins Board signal Board connector Dsub connector TxD 1 2 RxD 2 3 GND 3 7 DTR 4 6 DSR 5 20 N.C 6 N.C. SW1 7 14 SW2 8 15 SW3 9 16 GND 10 17
(2)
Host RS-422A
Table 17.2 Assignment of RS-422A Pins Board signal Board connector Dsub connector TxD+ 1 16 TxD2 17 RxD+ 3 14 RxD4 15 DTR+ 5 23 DTR6 24 DSR+ 7 21 DSR8 22 S.G. 9 7
17.3.4 Settings of DIPSW/jumpers

(1) DIPSW1 Default setting: Mode B (S-1: ON)
Table 17.3 List of DIPSW1 Settings Switch Mode A B C D
*1: EPROM is not mounted.
S-1 OFF ON OFF OFF
S-2 OFF OFF ON OFF
S-3 OFF OF F OFF OFF
S-4 OFF OFF OFF ON
Remark FLASH ROM boot mode *1 Download/normal mode ROM->FLASH copy mode Debug mode
(2)
DIPSW2 Default setting: Mode B (S-3, 4: ON)

Table 17.4 List of DIPSW2 Settings Switch Mode A B S-1 ON OFF S-2 OFF OFF S-3 OFF ON S-4 OFF ON Remark Controller self-test mode Normal mode
(3)
Jumper pin settings

Table 17.5 List of Jumper Pin Settings Setting item Battery backup JP1 KEYPAD control JP2 *1 Host control JP3 ON OFF RS-232C RS-422A RS-232C RS-422A Open Short-circuited Open 1 and 2 short-circuited 3 and 4 short-circuited O O Setting Short-circuited Default setting O
*1: The KEYPAD control is only for RS-232C. (RS-422A cannot be used.) Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver.1.1 2001.3
17-7

17.3.5 Checking operations
Check the following points when a problem occurs during the operation of the host controller. Check the connection. Check the settings of the controller on the Maintenance Setup Screen. Check the connection of the line monitor. (Refer to the next section when RS-422A is used.) The settings and jigs below are needed when the communication level is switched into RS-422A. (Note that this connection method can be used only when the line monitor LE-1000, 2000, and 3000 made by SEKISUI is used.)
How to connect the line monitor when the communication level is RS-422A:
(1)

Jigs
Adapter for RS-422A (With the monitor cable and relay cable) OP-2B (Made by SEKISUI) Converting cable for RS-422A line monitor (Refer to the figure below for the pin layout.) D sub 25-pin male +12V +12V GND GND SG RXD+ RXDTXD+ TXD10 11 18 19 7 14 15 16 17 10 11 18 19 7 14 15 16 17 D sub 25-pin female +12V +12V GND GND SG RXD+ RXDTXD+ TXD-
7 6 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
D sub 9-pin male D sub 9-pin female Fig. 17.12 Cable Pin Layout for RS-422A Line Monitor Converting Cable
(2)
Settings
The same procedure should be followed for both the host cable and the controller cable. Cable layout D sub 25-pin Male Female D sub 25-pin Male Female
Relay cable Male Female D sub 9-pin
D sub 9-pin Male Female Relay cable 422A Adapter (OP-2B) Fig. 17.13 Connection of Cables
Note: D sub 25-pin is connected to the OPTION side. Monitor cable
Line monitor
Setting the line monitor 1. Power the line monitor and press the MENU. 2. Select the CONDITION in 3. 3. Go to the condition menu, and select the OPTION PORT SELECT in 4. 4. Since the port is set with RS-232C when RS-232C is used, the setting of the OPTION will be selected. Any operation procedure other than the above is the same as that with RS-232C.
17-8
17.4 Printlink Host Controller Settings

(1) Enter the Maintenance Setup screen.
From the SETUP screen ,Touch the upper-left and lower-left portions on the Setup screen simultaneously over 1 sec. to enter the Maintenance Setup screen.
(2)
Make the host controller settings on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen and the HOST SETUP screen.
After the settings are complete, touch OK on the upper-right position on the screen to return to the READY screen. Now you can operate the Printlink controller with the renewed settings. In order to make other settings, touch the arrow key to change the screen, then continue making the settings. By touching the arrow key, the settings are finalized. After making the setting for each parameter, go to the SETUP 2/2 screen, and click ON for the HOST CONTROL.
Fig. 17.14 SETUP screen
AUTO PRINT Must be OFF when using Host Control.
17-9

Host setup setting contents (common items) Table 17.6 HOST TYPE SETUP/HOST SETUP Settings (This changes depending on the type of ROM of the host controller.) SECURITY Settings of the diagnostic device that serves as the host controller. This should be matched to the type of the diagnostic device. Settings of the limitations of the operable keys 1. All the keys are operable. 2. The STORE key is not operable. 3. The STORE and PRINT keys are not operable. 4. The STORE, PRINT, and PREV keys are not operable. Set the interval of the store reception from the diagnostic device to the store transmission to the imager. (Unit: 100ms) Set to ON when the all the outputs to the imager are set to "rotate". Set to OFF when the all the outputs to the imager are not set to "rotate". Select ON/OFF for the setting command of the print conditions (Contrast, Density, Lut, Nega/Posi, Trim, Border) from the diagnostic device. ON: Disables (The settings of the controller are enabled.) OFF: Enables (The settings of the controller are disabled.) Select the ON/OFF for the setting command of the film size from the diagnostic device. ON: Disables OFF: Enables Set whether or not ignore the film size and the type specified from the diagnostic device. ON: Ignores (Disables) OFF: Follows the film size and the type specified from the diagnostic device. (Enables) Set whether or not send a magazine error notice to the diagnostic device. (OFF is set under normal conditions.) ON: Sends a notice. OFF: Does not send a notice.
HOST TYPE SETUP
HOST SETUP
DELAY
ROTATE
HOST OPTION IGNORE
FILM SIZE IGNORE
FILM SIZE TYPE IGNORE
MAGAZINE ERROR FATAL
17-10

17.4.1 Printlink host I/F Toshiba (Ver. 1.10) settings
Fig. 17.15 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen Communication conditions Baud rate 9600 Stop bit Data bit Parity 1 7 even
Fig 17.16 HOST SETUP Screen
Applied model X-Force X-Peed X-X Vigon X-X isio AUKLET FLEXAERT VISART
}
}
Set the CT.
Set the MR.
Host setup Set the Delay value to 03.
17-11

17.4.2 Printlink host I/F X-TENSION (Ver. 1.10) settings
Applied model Toshiba X-TENSION ... Set the X-TENSION. -CT
17-12

17.4.3 Printlink host I/F Hitachi (Ver. 1.10) settings
Applied model W-2000 W-3000 W-950SR
17-13

17.4.4 Printlink host I/F SHIMADZU (Ver. 1.10) settings
Fig. 17.21 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen Communication conditions Baud rate 2400 Stop bit Data bit Parity 2 8 odd
Applied model SCT-3000,4000 -CT SCT-4800 SCT-5000 IDR-1000 -CT -CT -RF
Set the SIMADZU.
17-14

17.4.5 Printlink host I/F YOKOGAWA - GE (Ver. 1.10) settings
Fig. 17.23 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen Communication conditions Baud rate 1200 Stop bit Data bit Parity 2 8 odd
Applied model Prospeed Lemage Vertex Lumimex E
Set the YOKOGAWA.
17-15

17.4.6 Printlink host I/F Siemens (Ver. 1.10) settings
Fig. 17.25 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen
Fig 17.27 HOST SETUP 2 Screen HOST SETUP 2 Screen You can convert the setting of Sharp/Medium Smth/Smooth of the device to the Smooth value of the controller. For example, when you set the Sharp to 2, Medium Smth to 3, Smooth to 4, and you set the Medium Smth from the device, the Smooth value of the controller will be 3. Likewise, when the Sharp is set to 2, the Smooth value will be 4. When Df is set, the setting value of the controller always takes effect. ROTATE Takes effect when the FILM SIZE IGNORE is set to ON. ON ... ROTATE for all. OFF ... Disables ROTATE for all. MAGAZINE ERR TO HOST Set whether or not to send a notice of the errors associated with the magazine such as the film empty, etc. ON ... Sends a notice. OFF ... Does not send a notice. PRINT COPY INTERVAL The default setting is 20 sec. The settings above are set to the default when the applied model is selected on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen.
17-16

Communication conditions Baud rate 2400 Stop bit Data bit Parity 2 7 odd
Communication conditions (PICKER/SHIMADZU POLARIS/ECLIPSE) Baud rate 9600 Stop bit Data bit Parity 1 8 NONE
Applied model MAG/PLS4 ... MAGNETOM series SOMATOM series SOMATOM-AR series SOMATOM-PLUS4 MAGIC-VIEW
Set the MAG/PLS4.
FLUROSPT ... FLUROSPT series ... Set the FLUROSPT. SOM-PLUS ... SOMATOM-PLUS (old type) ... Set the SOM-PLUS. PICKER ... PICKER/SHIMADZU ECLIPSE Note: When the host controller is started up with this version, the RESET key is displayed on the SETUP key on the READY screen. This key changes the HOST from OFF to ON on the SETUP screen automatically (re-connection of the communication circuit). The communication with the host cannot be made when the RESET key is highlighted. (This key is not used under normal conditions.)
17-17

17.4.7 Printlink host I/F KONICA (Ver. 1.10) settings
Communication conditions (MIU, REGIUS, FO-20) Baud rate 9600 Stop bit Data bit Parity 1 8 even
Communication conditions (SCT-7000, DAR3000 (DIGTEX-PRO)) Baud rate 2400 Stop bit Data bit Parity 1 7 even
Applied model MIU DICOM PRO REGIUS FO-20 ... Set the MIU. ... Set the MIU. ... Set the REGIUS - Konica CR ... Set the FO-20. SHIMADZU SCT-7000 ... Set the SCT-7000. If you wish to set the ROTATE with this setting, select the ROTATE (1x1) on the format setting screen in advance. SHIMADZU DAR-3000 ... Set the DAR-3000. (DIGITEX-PRO) If you wish to set the ROTATE with this setting, select the ROTATE (1x1) on the format setting screen in advance. Printlink-OD ... Set the PRINTLINK. Li-62P ... Set the BKUP-62P.
17-18

17.4.8 Printlink MP host I/F 232C (Ver. 1.10) / 422A (Ver. 1.10) settings 3M
Fig 17.32 HOST SETUP 2 Screen Communication conditions Baud rate 1200 Stop bit Data bit Parity 1 8 even
FORMAT IMAGE ... When set to ON, the image will be in landscape orientation. LANDSCAPE This function converts from 3 x 4 to 4 x 3, and the format of 4 x 3 is taken effect with the install software. ASYNC ERROR ... Set whether or not to send a notice of asynchronous error to the device. When set to ON, a notice is sent. SEND TO HOST RQS STATUS ALWAYS RDY SEPARATOR FMT FILM JOURNAL ... Set whether or not to fix the reply for the RQS command to "RDY". When set to ON, "RDY" is always selected. ... Leave it at its default setting. ... Refer to Section 17.4.9. ... In order to switch into the JOURNAL DATA screen (14.6), touch the ERROR/OPERATE.
17-19

Applied models ... GE Advantage Windows V1.2.6 Signa Horizon Hispeed Signa Advantage Signa Contour/Profile Horizon LX Advantage Windows SG Advantex DRS, DSX, DLX Hispeed Advantage SG QXI ADVANCE PET SHIMADZU MP831 ... Toshiba Hitachi MPPHI ... PHILIPS Hitachi GE SHIMADZU MPHSA MPOTH ADW2.0 ...GE ...GE ...GE PRISM 2000/3000 EPS DRS-1000X EASY VISION GYROSCAN DFA-ViR AIRIS II Precio DRS, DSX CTS-20SP DYNAVISION Hispeed Advantage RP/SP Advantage Windows EK version Advantage Windows Ver.2.0 / 3.1 Advantage Workstation DR 2000 ...Hitachi DR-2000 (HIPACS) Note: Set DR2000 only when Li-62P and DICOM are connected. When the connection of the Printlink-ID-> Printlink-OD-> Li-62P is made, MP952 should be selected.
MP952
17-20

17.4.9 Hitachi HIPACS/DR2000H Host Controller Settings
(1) Preliminary checking
Confirm the image size, the number of the frames, and the ON/OFF of gray scale (GS) of the device with a user. According to those, select the necessary custom format files from Table 17.7 in the installation settings of the Printlink. Table 17.7 Custom Format and File Name Custom format File name DR1.DAT(ID,GS) DR2.DAT(ID) DR3.DAT(ID,GS) DR4.DAT (ID) DR5.DAT(IS,GS) DR6.DAT (ID) DR7.DAT(ID,GS) DR8.DAT(ID) Image size Image size 256B,320B,512B 1024B 1,2,4,6,12,20 4,6,12,20 6,9,12,20 4,6,9,12,20 1,2,4,6,12,20 1,2,4,6,9,12,20 1,2,4,6,9,12,20 1,2,4,6,9,12 Image size 2048B 1,2,4,6 1,2,4,6,9 1,2,4,6,9 1,2,4,6,9
*ID,GS
*ID
Image area
Image area
ID
GS
ID
Fig 17.33 Data Area of Image File For example, when the image size is set to 512, the number of frame is set to 1, 2, 4, and 6, and the gray scale is set to ON, you should select "DR1.DAT" as a file name. Note that any combination of the formats other than the above cannot be set.
17-21

(2) Settings with Printlink install software
i) ii) Set the "Connect Imager" to "Li-62P DICOM" in the Change Channel Data dialog box. Click the DEFAULT in the Set Custom Format Data dialog box, then click Browse, and select the target custom format file name (e.g. DR1.DAT). iii) Select the PC->Printlink in the File menu and transfer the data to the Printlink.
(3)
Setting the controller

i) Enter the Maintenance Setup screen (by touching upper-left and lower left portions on the Setup screen simultaneously over 1 sec.). Select DR2000 on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen.
17-22

ii) Set the FMT SETUP on the HOST SETUP screen.
Fig. 17.35 HOST SETUP Screen Set the FMT SETUP according to the target custom format file name. In the example, since "DR1.DAT" is selected, "01" should be set in the FMT SETUP field with "-" and "+". It is not necessary to set others. iii) Finally, set the HOST to ON on the SETUP screen, then the setting of the host controller will be complete.
(4)
Cautions
If the file name set with the Printlink install software and the number set on the controller do not match, an error will occur or abnormal image will be obtained. Therefore, be sure to set correct data. After setting, output all the formats and confirm that they are set properly.
17-23
Blank page

This section describes the system layout example, assuming that the three input and four output systems are connected.
Diagnostic device SOMATOM Diagnostic device Printlink GCA901 controller Printlink controller Digital signal Video signal Diagnostic device FLEXART Printlink -ID Printlink -IN Printlink network controller
Printlink-installed PC Printlink -IV 192.168.2.20 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.14 Printlink -OD 192.168.2.11
192.168.2.12 192.168.2.15
192.168.2.13 192.168.2.16 192.168.2.17
Li-21 controller
Li-62p DICOM
Li-1417DH
Filing system
Li-21
Fig. 18.1 System Layout Example
18-1
18.1 Set the Route for Input Printlink, Imager, and Filing Device
This section describes how to determine the imagers or filing devices into which the input diagnostic device (in the example, GCA901, SOMATOM, FLEXART) outputs the data. The output destination should be the imagers: one is used under normal conditions and the other that serves as backup. In the example on the previous page, the imagers that receive the image sent from GCA901 should be as follows: Normal conditions For backup For filing Normal conditions For backup Normal conditions For backup : Li-21 (Printlink-OD) : Li-62P (DICOM), Li-1417DH : Filing device : Li-62P (DICOM) : Li-21 (Printlink-OD), Li-1417DH : Li-1417DH : Li-21 (Printlink-OD), Li-62P (DICOM)
The imagers that receive the image sent from SOMATOM should be as follows:
The imagers that receive the image sent from FLEXART should be as follows:
The table below shows the results above. Name Printlink-IV 192.168.2.10 Input Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Printlink-ID 192.168.2.11 Input Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Printlink-IN 192.168.2.12 Input Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Printlink-OD Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output GCA901 Li-21 Li-62P Li1417DH Filing SOMATOM Li-21 Li-62P Li1417DH FLEXART Li-21 Li-62P Li1417DH GCA901 SOMATOM FLEXART Li-21 Protocol VIDEO_IN DICOM_PRINT_OUT DICOM_PRINT_OUT HSTP_OUT DICOM_STORAGE_OUT DIGITAL_IN DICOM_PRINT_OUT DICOM_PRINT_OUT HSTP_OU TOSHIBA_IN DICOM_PRINT_OUT DICOM_PRINT_OUT HSTP_OU DICOM_PRINT_IN DICOM_PRINT_IN DICOM_PRINT_IN DIGITAL_OUT 192.168.2.14 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.16 192.168.2.13 192.168.2.14 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.16 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.11 192.168.2.12 6100 6101 6102 6102 6102 6101 6101 192.168.2.14 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.16 192.168.2.17 6100 6100 6100 IP address Port No.
18-2

For Printlink -IV, the setting should be made as follows: Name Printlink-IV 192.168.2.10 Input Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 GCA901 Li-21 Li-62P Li-1417DH Filing Protocol VIDEO_IN DICOM_PRINT_OUT DICOM_PRINT_OUT HSTP_OUT DICOM_STORAGE_OUT 192.168.2.14 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.16 192.168.2.17 6100 6100 6100 IP address Port No.
1. Click [1] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. 2. Enter "GCA901" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name]. 3. Click the [VIDEO IN] on the list in the [Protocol Name] box. 4. Enter the default data that is printed on the film in the [Stamp Message] box. Ex) A hospital name and a diagnostic device name
Fig. 18.2 Change Channel Data Dialog Box The above settings can be made for only the input modalities. A maximum of 52 characters (single-byte) can be entered. The stamp description set here will be displayed on the Printlink controller. The stamp description set in the install software cannot be changed on the ID input screen of the Printlink controller. The number of characters that can be entered on the Printlink controller is (32characters) (the number of characters set in the install software). In the above example, since 15 characters (Konica Hospital) are entered, the number of input characters on the Printlink controller will be 17 characters ((32characters) (15characters)). Note that the stamp description set here cannot be transferred to the Li-10A as the Li-10A cannot receive it. The stamp description set in the Li-10A will be output.
18-3

If you wish to set the LUT of the imager to the linear and perform the LUT processing with the Printlink, click the [ON] for the [Convert LUT]. Click the [OFF] if you wish to select the basic operation. When set to [ON], multiple imagers can be connected, which makes it easier to set the LUT upon backup. For more detailed information, refer to the later part of this section. OCR Default NAME (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON): Enter the default name of the result of the character recognition. OCR Default ID (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON): Enter the default ID of the result of the character recognition. OCR Study (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON): Set the ON/OFF setting of Study by the Character Recognition. OCR Study Timeout (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON) Set the Study Timeout by the Character Recognition. During Study, this is a waiting time for the next store. Register the queue in Timeout. 5. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM2] of the [Serial Port].
Fig. 18.3 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box For settings of the other video input parameters, refer to Chapter 8. 6. Click the [OK].
18-4

7. Likewise, set channels 2 to 5. Click [2] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Click the [DICOM PRINT OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click the [Li-21] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box.
Fig. 18.4 Change Channel Data Dialog Box Click [3] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Click the [DICOM PRINT OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click the [Li-62P DICOM] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box. Click [4] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Click the [HSTP OUT (Li-1417)] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click the [Li-1417] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box. Click [5] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Click the [DICOM STORAGE OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click the [Li-21] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box.
For setting output protocol, refer to "12. Setting the Output I/F". Since the Printlink-ID and -IN are the input devices, make the settings for them in the same way as for Printlink-IV.
18-5

Since the Printlink-OD is an output device of the Printlink, it serves a print server with multiple inputs and one digital output. For Printlink -OD, the setting should be made as follows: Name Printlink-OD 192.168.2.14 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output GCA901 SOMATOM FLEXART Li-21 Protocol DICOM_PRINT_IN DICOM_PRINT_IN DICOM_PRINT_IN DIGITAL_OUT IP address 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.11 192.168.2.12 Port No. 6100 6101 6102
1. Click [1] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. 2. Enter "GCA901" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name]. 3. Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] on the list in the [Protocol Name] box. 4. Since the [Stamp Message] is set with the input device of the Printlink, it is not necessary to set. 5. It is not necessary to set the [Convert LUT], [OCR Study], [OCR Study Timeout], [OCR Default ID], [OCR Default NAME], like [Stamp Message]. 6. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM2] of the [Serial Port]. For settings of the other DICOM parameters, refer to Chapter 12. 7. Click the [OK]. 8. Likewise, set channels 2 to 4. Click [2] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Enter "SOMATOM" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name] box. Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click [3] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Enter [FLEXART] of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name] box. Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click [4] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE]. Click the [DIGITAL OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box. Click the [Li-21] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box.
9. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM1] of the [Serial Port]. For settings of the other DIGITAL OUT parameters, refer to Chapter 12.
18-6
18.2 Route ID Settings

This section describes how to set the Route ID. The Route ID means the data flow from an input channel to an output channel defined by the channel number of the input/output and the IP address. 1. When the diagnostic image is output from the GCA901 to the Li-21 in the example, the input/output channels are 1 and 2. INPUT: 1 OUTPUT1: 2 192.168.2.14 OUTPUT2: 0 The channels above are the route by which the image is output from the GCA901 to the Li-21. Multiple output imagers from the input modality can be defined. Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-62P INPUT: 1 OUTPUT1: 3 192.168.2.15 OUTPUT2: 0 Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-1417DH INPUT: 1 OUTPUT1: 4 192.168.2.16 OUTPUT2: 0 Likewise, from GCA901 to Filing INPUT: 1 OUTPUT1: 5 192.168.2.17 OUTPUT2: 0 Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-21 and Filing 2 output INPUT: 1 OUTPUT1: 2 192.168.2.14 OUTPUT2: 5 192.168.2.17 2. From the output imagers determined in Step 1, select one to be set as the default after installation, and make its route an "active route". 3. Name each route determined in Step 1. A maximum 8 characters (single-byte) can be set for the route name. This name will appear as "OUTPUT Imager" when the output destination is switched on the Printlink controller. Therefore, the name that is easy to understand for a user (the name of the output imager, etc.) should be given. In the example, the output imager name is given to the route name.
18-7
Fig 18.5 Set Route Data Dialog Box
Fig 18.6 Change Route Data Dialog Box
18-8

Set the Route ID for the Printlink-OD. 1. Multiple input devices can be defined for an output imager. From GCA901 to Li-21 INPUT: 1 192.168.2.10 OUTPUT1: 4 OUTPUT2: 0 From SOMATOM to Li-21 INPUT: 1 192.168.2.11 OUTPUT1: 4 OUTPUT2: 0 From FLEXART to Li-21 INPUT: 1 192.168.2.13 OUTPUT1: 4 OUTPUT2: 0 2. From the input modalities determined in Step 1, select one to be set as the default after installation, and make its route an "active route". 3. Name each route determined in Step 1. A maximum 8 characters (single-byte) can be set for the route name. This name will appear as "INPUT Modality" when the input device is switched on the Printlink controller. Therefore, the name that is easy to understand for a user (the name of the modality, etc.) should be given. In the example, the modality name is given to the route name.
Fig. 18.7 Change Route Data Dialog Box 4. Send the setting data above to the Printlink. This will complete the setting of the system.
18-9
Blank page

19.1 Character Recognition
The character recognition means that the name and ID described on the film that is read from the input modality such as the video, digital and network, or the information (Other 1 and 2) that can be set with the DICOM STORAGE, are read from the image data. The read data is affected on the stamp on the film, and is used as the directory name for saving images in the system or as a search key for searching the image.
19.2 Algorithm of Character Recognition

In order to perform the character recognition, it is necessary to register the bit patterns of the alphanumerics, symbols, and Kana characters as a dictionary file in advance. (The Kana characters are for the Japanese version only.) Since the background and characters have to be separated on an image, a pixel value (threshold) for separating those should be also registered. This is called a binary logic, and the background and the characters are converted into the data values of 0 and 255 using this threshold. The character recognition routine is performed as 8-bit data. Therefore, a 12-bit image is converted into an 8-bit image. There are some methods to separate characters from the image data. Basically, when there is a spacing of more than one pixel between characters, the spacing is recognized as a character. When the bit patterns on the input image data is matched to those in the dictionary, characters are recognized properly. Since the positions of characters on the film are fixed, it is necessary to register this position data in advance. The file that contains the data to be registered in advance for the character recognition is called the character recognition install data (mji file). This file is set with the character recognition install software, and is transferred with the Printlink maintenance software.
19.3 Limitations of Character Recognition

Some errors may occur upon the character recognition due to the following reasons: characters cannot be separated from other images because of overlapping; similar characters such as ' I 'and ' 1 ' are set to the same bit pattern; there is noise of video signals. Basically, the character string to be recognized is one line. Therefore, the character recognition may not be performed properly when a character string has multiple lines. In order to make the character recognition properly, these limitations should be considered, and the preliminary research such as the type of font, position, and the usage of the character recognition results should be conducted.
19-1
19.4 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data

19.4.1 Character recognition install data (mji file)
The character recognition install data is configured as shown in the figure below. The modality data and the dictionary data can be saved individually. If the saved data is kept in a library, it can be used when the same system and modality are set for the character recognition. Entire install data The comment, the number of modalities, the number of dictionaries and others for Printlink-ID and -IV Data of CH01 Image size, the position of the frame to be recognized, the position of the character string to be recognized, the dictionary to be used, and comments, etc. x n pcs. (Max: 5)
Modality data This portion and all the dictionary data can be written and kept in a library.
Supports each dictionary.
Dictionary 1 Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments, etc. Dictionary 2 Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments, etc. Dictionary 3 Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments, etc.
Dictionary data Image size, name, and ID Dictionaries can be changed for each of Other 1 and 2. The dictionary data can be written on the dictionary data directory and kept in a library.
Fig. 19.1 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data Since there are multiple dictionaries, it is possible to set different dictionaries for each of image size, name, ID, and Other 1 and 2. Conversely, even when the image size, name and ID are different, there is only one dictionary in the install data if the fonts are the same. The install data is set for referring to only one dictionary.
19-2

19.4.2 Modality data and dictionary data
It is necessary to set the following parameters. Modality data: It is possible to register 5 items: Image size, the position of the frame to be recognized, the position of names, the position of ID, Other 1 and 2, the dictionary to be used. These are called character recognition patterns. Dictionary data: The status of the font is registered.
(50, 10) (70, 200) Name TARO
(510, 10) (530, 200)
OTHER 1 (Birthday)
90.01.15
Font dictionary 1 2
Frame to be recognized
1 film OTHER 2 (Sex) F Font dictionary ID
ID1234
(50, 1000) (70, 1200) X
(500, 1000) (520, 1200)
13
ID1234
Binary threshold (Character / Background)

Fig 19.2 Character Recognition Setting Parameters
19-3
19.5 Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software Operation Description

19.5.1 Main window
Starting up OCRinst.exe will display the main window.
Fig. 19.3 Main window Settings (S) Stored directory No. Modality Name Settings (Next screen) Directory of PC 01-16 Character strings xx/xx Goes to the Settings window, The data can be selected if there is any data being edited. Displays the stored directory that is currently selected. Displays the channel number. By clicking, the channel to be edited can be changed. Displays the description and the name of modalities. Displays the current data setting registration (the number of registration / the size). When the NAME-ID is set to recognition in the Settings window, "1" is added to the value of numerator. The size: Coordinates xx/xx It shows the size for each modality. Displays the current coordinate data setting registration (the number of registration / the size). The number of registration: When the coordinates of NAME-ID are set in the Coordinates window, "1" is added to the value of numerator. The size: Size of image Size-directory Character strings Character strings Character strings It shows the size for each modality. Set the image size of the modality. A maximum of 5 image sizes can be registered. Displays the directory configuration. Displays the dictionary name for each of NAME, ID, OTHER 1 and 2.
The number of registration:
Dictionary of modality and size
19-4

19.5.2 Menu of main window
The contents of the pull-down menu on the upper portion of the main window show as follows: File (F) menu File-Open-Overwrite (O) File-Open-New (N) File-Close (C) File-Save (S) File-Print (P) File-Environment Settings (K) File-Exit (E) Reads the saved data file. Use an existing directory configuration. Reads the saved data file. Create a new directory configuration. Cancels the data file saved in the memory, and returns the status just after startup. Saves the data file in the memory. Prints out the saved data file. (Not support.) Sets the operation environment parameters for the software. Ends the OCR install software.
Image (G) menu Image-Stored Directory (D) Image-Import Image (T) Sets the directory to store the image data. Receives the image data from the Printlink. It is necessary to set the image directory in advance. Item (I) menu Item-Add Size (A) Item-Delete Size (D) Item-Delete Modality (M) Adds patterns. Deletes patterns. Deletes modalities.
Help (H) menu Help-Search Topic (T) Help-Version Information (A) Search a topic. (Not support.) Displays the version information.
19-5

19.5.3 Detailed Settings - Settings window
Clicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Settings] on the upper portion of the window will display the [Settings] window.
Fig. 19.4 Settings Window No. Size of image Select no. modalitys name Location Study Frame Direction No rotation 1-8, 9-16 9999x9999 << >> Character strings NAME, ID OTHER1, OTHER2 NAME, ID Set a character string as a key of Study. Either Name or ID can be set. Set the frame number to be recognized. A maximum of two places can be set. Set the orientation of the characters to be recognized. They are selected for each of Name and ID. Dictionary comment Character strings Coordinates Initialize(A) Change modality name(H) Modality library -Read(R) Modality library -Write(W) Modality library -Delete(E) (99,99)-(99,99) Displays the dictionary name for each of Name and ID. Displays the display position on the film (Upper-left coordinate) (Lower-right coordinate) for each of Name and ID. Deletes only the saved data of the current channel and size, and initializes. Changes the modality name of the current channel. Reads the modality information saved before into the current channel. Saves the saved data of the current channel as a modality information file. Deletes the modality information file. Set the channel number to be edited. Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered. Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16. Displays the modality name. Set character strings to be recognized. They are selected for each of Name and ID.
19-6

19.5.4 Detailed Settings - Coordinates window
Clicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Coordinates] on the upper portion of the window will display the [Coordinates] window.
Fig. 19.5 Coordinates Window No. Size of image Select no. modalitys name Display area magnification Select image Location operation Coordinates 1-8, 9-16 9999x9999 << >> Character strings Set the channel number to be edited. Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered. Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16. Displays the modality name. Displays the display area of the image data being currently edited. Displays the green frame of the recognized area when the positions of the Name and ID are set. x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display. 99/99 NAME, ID Select the image file (the display image / the number of files of all images). Set the character frame to be recognized. Select between Name and ID. mouse or entering from the keyboard). (99,99)-(99,99) Displays the (Upper-left coordinate) (Lower-right coordinate) of the character frame to be recognized. Displays according to the settings of the [Location].
Mouse, Keyboard Set the method of selecting the character frame to be recognized (enclosing with the
19-7

19.5.5 Detailed Settings - Dictionary window
Clicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Dictionary] on the upper portion of the window will display the [Dictionary] window.
Fig. 19.6 Dictionary Window No. Size of image Select no. Modality's name Location Hide frame Display image Next,prev. char. Magnification Threshold level Select image Display result <, > 1-255 99/99 Character strings 1-8, 9-16 9999x9999 <<, >> Character strings NAME(N), ID(I) Set the channel number to be edited. Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered. Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16. Displays the modality name. Changes the clipped image to be displayed. Changes the display of the frame of the clipped characters. Displays the clipped image. Displays according to the settings of the [Location]. Moves to the next character. Changes the binary threshold of the characters Select the image file (the display image / the number of files of all images). Areas to display the recognized and entered characters. Name of the dictionary being currently used. Displays according to the settings of the [Location]. Advanced(V) Char. code Goes to the [Advanced setting] dialog box. Alphanumerics, symbols, Kana (Kana is for the Japanese version only.) The table of characters that can be registered. Allocate the bit pattern on the image to the character by clicking the concerned character. x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display.
OTHER(O)1, OTHER(P)2
Dictionary comment Character strings
19-8

Create new (A) Change comment(H) Delete text (S) Save Bitmap(B) Dictionary library -Read(R) Dictionary library -Write(W) Dictionary library -Delete(E) Create a new dictionary. The existing dictionary will be deleted. Change the comments and template size of the dictionary being currently used. Switches into the mode for deleting the set characters. (The character deletion will end.) Saves the bit pattern of the characters that are registered in the currently used dic tionary as a bit map file. Writes the dictionary file that has been saved on the currently used dictionary. Saves the data into the dictionary file being currently edited. Deletes the dictionary file.
19-9

19.5.6 Detailed Settings - Dictionary - Advanced settings dialog box
Clicking the [Advanced (V)] in the [Dictionary] window will display the [Advanced] dialog box.
Fig. 19.7 Advanced Settings Dialog Box Pattern hit ratio Recognition of space character Set the hit ratio. It is not necessary to change under normal conditions. Set the space character. None.: Does not insert a space. One space in the maximum.: Inserts one space. Two spaces in the maximum.: Inserts two spaces. Set the character color. Set to Auto. under normal conditions, but set to ON when images are inserted into the recognition area. Set the method of recognizing a smaller region. Not treat as a character.: Does not treat the small area as a character. It treats as a character.: Treats the small area as a character. Set the cutting method. Normal.: Used when there is a character space. Fixed width.: Used when there is no character space and the width of characters is constant. Specify the width in the [columns]. Character's width: Used when there is no space between characters (no space of 1 dot or over between characters) and the width of characters is not constant. The default setting of the [Fusion] is 0 and it is not needed to change. Set the method of processing the divided characters. Nothing.: Used when Katakana is not used. Exist in dictionary.: Used when Katakana is used. Set the maximum strokes of characters in the [Number of division]. (This item is for the Japanese version only.) Set the method of excluding the bigger region on the edge. It does not exclude it.: Does not exclude the image. Left edge.: Excludes the image on the left edge. Right edge.: Excludes the image on the right edge.
Recognition of character color
Recognition of smaller region
A cutting method
Divied characters
Excludes bigger region on the edge
19-10

19.5.7 Detailed Settings - Check window
Clicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Check] on the upper portion of the window will display the [Check] window.
Fig. 19.8 Check Window No. size of image Select no. modality's name Display image 1-8, 9-16 9999x9999 <<, >> Character strings Set the channel number to be edited. Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered. Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16. Displays the modality name. Displays the image data being currently edited. Displays the green frame of the recognized area when the positions of the Name and ID are set. magnification Select image Display result threshold level x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display. 99/99 Character strings 1-255 Select the image file (the display image / the number of files of all images). Displays the recognized results in the current image file. Displays the binary threshold of the character data.
19-11
19.6 Procedure for Settings of Character Recognition

Follow the procedure below to make the settings of the character recognition. Outline of the preliminary research of the character strings to be recognized and the settings of the character recognition system (Refer to Section 19.7.)
Settings for the Printlink (Refer to Section 19.8.)
Settings of the environment of the character recognition (OCR) install software (Refer to Section 19.9.)
Settings of the data with the character recognition (OCR) install software (Refer to Section 19.10.)
Returning the environment of the Printlink (Refer to Section 19.11.)
Setting and operating the controller (Refer to Section 19.12.)
End of settings
Fig. 19.9 Procedure for Settings of Character Recognition
19-12
19.7 Outline of Preliminary Research of Character Strings To Be Recognized and Settings of Character Recognition System
19.7.1 Preliminary research of character strings to be recognized
(1) Confirmation items with the server when performing the DICOM STRAGE output to the server, etc.
Refer to the chapter of Storage.
(2)
Confirmation items with a hospital

a) Confirmation items on ID, Name, Other 1 and 2 b) What parameter to be character-recognized ? Ex) ID only ? Both ID and Name ?, etc. The number of characters ? What type of characters ? Ex) Number + hyphen for ID, and alphabets only for Name, etc.
Confirming of the frame positions to be recognized Can the frame to be recognized easily be specified ? Or can the image be taken so that it is easily recognized ? The frame that is recognized easily means the one in which the image does not go into the recognized area, or the image rarely goes into the recognized area. Therefore, if the image does not go into the recognized area, this will improve the recognized ratio of specifying the frame.
(3)
Confirmation items with a diagnostic device

a) Are the output sizes the same ? The size of WS and others may change. When the sizes changes, the font may change. b) c) Position of the ID, Name, Other 1 and 2 data corresponding to the image size above Font corresponding to the image size above Alphanumerics only ? Is there Kana ? (Kana is for the Japanese version only.) Since it is necessary to register the bit patterns of all the characters, check if it is possible to load all the characters to be used for ID, Name, Other 1 and 2 in the modality into the image data easily. d) Alphanumerics, symbols, Kana only ? Kanji cannot be registered. (This is for the Japanese version only.) e) Are images and characters overlapped each other ? (Recognizing with the maximum number of the characters) When images and characters overlapped each other, can they be separated ? f) Does a character string have one line ? Does a character string start from the left ? When a character string has multiple lines, only one of the lines can be recognized. If a character string start from the right, an unnecessary character, "?", may be inserted preceding the recognized result. g) h) Are multiple patterns needed ? A maximum of 5 recognized patterns can be registered. This includes the patterns for the other image sizes. Is there video noise ? Does the video noise change with the time ? If there is video noise, characters may not be recognized. So, be sure to adjust it so that jitter does not appear. An error will occur when the bit pattern of the character differs with each store. Be careful for the change of the video noise with the time.
19-13

i) Method of using the recognition result Currently, the recognition result is printed on the stamp area of the film, or it is used as name and ID data upon the DICOM output and a tag for others. j) Confirming the study method Set whether or not to use the study function. If it is used, select Name or ID as the target parameter for the study function. k) Default name, ID in printing without the character recognition Set the confirmed contents with the Printlink install software.
19-14

19.7.2 Outline of the settings of the character recognition system
Fig. 19.10 shows the system example that consists of one channel of digital input, one channel of video input, two channels of DICOM output (imager, filing system). In the example, the characters of the image data input from the digital and video channels are recognized, and are output to the imager and filing system. Making various settings other than the character recognition settings and obtaining the IP address are assumed to be already completed. (Refer to Chapter 5.) The digital and video input channels of the Printlink-ID and -IV should be usually set to the first channel. The same PC and IP address that are used for installing the Printlink are used for installing the character recognition software. The settings of character recognition need to be made only for the input devices, Printlink-ID and -IV. It is not necessary to make the settings for the output device, Printlink-OD.
Diagnostic device Printlink controller
Diagnostic device Printlink controller
Digital The same PC used for installing the Printlink are used for installing the character recognition software Character recognition
Video
PrintlinkID
PrintlinkIV
192.168.2.20 192.168.2.15
192.168.2.11 192.168.2.17
192.168.2.12
No settings for output device DICOM imager Filing system
Fig. 19.10 System Example
19-15
19.8 Settings for Printlink

In the example, the settings of the system is assumed to be already made.
Diagnostic device (e.g. Regius) Printlink controller
Diagnostic device
Printlink controller
Digital Additional output to the Li-1417D
Video
PrintlinkID
PrintlinkIV
192.168.2.11 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.17
192.168.2.12 192.168.2.20
DICOM imager
Filing system
Li-1417D (Character recognition -software-installed PC)
Fig. 19.11 System at the Installation of the Character Recognition
19.8.1 Change of settings of the Printlink main unit

Make the following settings on the [Change Channel Data] dialog box in the Printlink install software. (1) Make the settings associated with the character recognition with the input channel. 1. Check if the LINEAR setting exists in the LUT. If it does not, set the Convert LUT to OFF. If it is already set to OFF, do not change it. Note: When the Convert LUT is set to OFF, return it to the original position after setting the character recognition. 2. Set the parameters. OCR Default Name and ID When the character recognition is set to OFF on the controller, set the Name and ID used for transferring the image to the next system. Enter the name, such as "Printlink test film" and "Konica HP", that is easy to understand that the character recognition is not performed yet. Ask a user of the modality at each institution what name and ID should be given. OCR Study Set to ON when the Study function is set to valid. Select the target parameter for the Study from Name and ID with the character recognition install software.
19-16

OCR Study Timeout When the next page is not determined in the set timeout, printing starts. The unit of the timeout is "second". Ask a user of the modality for this timeout, and set it. (2) Set the character recognition software-installed PC as the output device for the Printlink-ID and-IV. The same protocol of the character recognition software is used as that of the Li1417D. Therefore, select the HSTP (Li-1417) for the output protocol. Set other settings to the default. Important: Be sure to adjust the signals for the model that requires the adjustment of the input signal, such as Printlink-IV. If the adjustment is not proper, this will decrease the recognition rate.
19.8.2 Change of the settings of Printlink controller

1. Change the output device to the OCR output.
19-17
19.9 Settings of Environment of Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software

19.9.1 Startup environment
1. Although the character recognition install software operates under the same environment as the Printlink install software, a mouse is needed. Since using only the keyboard is limited to some operations, be sure to check that a mouse is connected. 2. The necessary files are the following four files. Place them in the same directory. OCRInst.exe Entire character recognition install software OCRRecv.exe Image data reception software (This does not operate by itself, and it should be used from the OCRInst.exe.) OCRfcv.exe Change the character recognition install software from Ver. 1.0X to 1.1X. OCR.ini Character recognition install software setting file Note: The installer does not exist. Copy the software with the Explorer upon distribution.
19.9.2 Directory configuration

The directory configuration is set as shown in the figure below. (The configuration is already set before distribution.) Select a drive with the most free space (approx. 200 to 300 MB is needed) as a destination (when operating with C drive). C:\OCR
All the character recognition install software is installed in this directory. Copy the necessary 4 files into the directory.
Modality
This directory is for saving modality data and keeping it in a library. This directory is for saving dictionary data and keeping it in a library. This directory is for character recognition install software. This directory is for image file data, and install software.
Dic
Mji
Data Konica HP_ID
This directory is for data operation for each hospital, Printlink-ID, -IV. Each Printlink has one directory.
Konica HP_IV
Yamada HP This is created automatically upon the reception of the image. Hashima HP The reception image is stored in this directory.
CH01 1024_1024 Directory for store 512_512
Channel 1 directory Reading image directory (1024 x 1024) Reading image directory (512 x 512)
Fig. 19.12 Character Recognition Install Directory Configuration
19-18

The directories below OCR \ Data can be created with the character recognition install software. One directory should be allocated to each of Printlink-ID and -IV. This directory is called a store directory. The directories above the store directory are created with the Explorer, and those below the store directory are automatically created with the character recognition install software. (The store directory can be created with both the Explorer and the character recognition install software.) For the relation among the character recognition install data, modality data, and dictionary data, refer to Section 19.4.
19-19

19.9.3 Settings before startup of the character recognition install software
This section describes the settings of the OCR.ini file.
Fig.19.13 Settings of OCR.ini It is not necessary to change the [FILE EXTENSION NAME] and [ETCETRA PARAMETER]. Set the [DIRECTORY] if necessary. [DIRECTORY] MODALITY Specify the modality data directory. From the character recognition install data, only the setting data of the modality can be placed in the library. Specify the directory for saving the data at that time. [DIRECTORY] DICTIONARY Specify the dictionary data directory. From the character recognition install data, only the setting data of the dictionary can be placed in the library. Specify the directory for saving the data at that time. The [DIRECTORY] is a relative directory setting at shipment. Under normal conditions, this is not needed to change. This works even with an absolute directory setting. However, if the character recognition install software is copied on another PC, since the directory configurations of individual PC are different, the software will not start up. In such case, check the settings and set properly again.
19-20

19.9.4 How to start up
Execute the OCRInst.exe in the directory that contains the four files needed for startup. (Refer to Section 19.9.1.) Ex) Working with C drive c: \OCR\OCRInst.exe (return) Or, by double-clicking the file above with the Explorer, the character recognition install software starts up.
Fig. 19.14 Main Window of Character Recognition Install Software
19-21
19.10 Settings of Data with Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software

With the character recognition install software, the data other than the described can be created. Be sure to follow the description and procedure in this manual for installation. Note: During operations, messages such as "Warning error" may appear. After checking it, click the [OK] to continue the operations. In the system example (refer to Fig. 19.11.), the character recognition install software should be installed on the Printlink-ID and -IV individually. Therefore, it is necessary to make various settings that are associated with the installation individually. If multiple modalities are connected, the settings should be made for them individually. Follow the flow chart below to install the software and make the settings properly. Checking the system (the type of modalities) at installation. When the position and type of the font is determined if the modality image size is set;
Yes New system ? (Refer to Section 19.10.1.)
No
The dictionary of the same modality is created at another institution. Want to use that saved data ?
Yes (Refer to Section 19.10.3.)
No
Want to use the saved data for another system at the same institution ?
Fig. 19.15 Modality Checking Flow Chart Is there any data whose image size is the same, but position of name and ID or font is different in the modality ?
Are position and font different for the same image size ? No
(Refer to Sections 19.10.1 to 19.10.4.) Fig. 19.16 Modality Checking Flow Chart
19-22

19.10.1 For new system
Ex) When the image size is set to 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512 at Konica hospital; Other conditions are as shown in Fig. 19.13 and in this example, the character recognition is set in the Printlink-ID. Only alphabetic characters (capital) are used for name, and only numbers for ID. For the image of size of 512 x 512, the different fonts are used for Name and ID (Font A, B). For the image of size of 1024 x 1024, the same font is used for Name and ID. (1) (2) Enter "Konica HP_ID" for the store directory. Start up the character recognition install software.
Fig. 19.17 Startup Window (Main Window) of the Character Recognition Install Software Cautions at startup of the install software During the operations, the dialog box confirming "OK" and "CANCEL", etc. may appear. In such case, be sure to confirm them in the dialog box, then perform another operation. Although the window frame may be skewed, the internal device operates normally. If you wish to correct the skewed frame, enter the [CHECK] window, then return to the Main window.
19-23

(3) Enter the name of the store directory. Select the [Stored directory (D)] from the [Image (G)], then enter the name. In this example, since the store directory is "Konica HP_ID", select "c:\Ocr\Data\Konica HP_ID". If "Konica HP_ID" does not exist, enter the directory name.
Fig. 19.18 Store Directory Setting Dialog Box (4) Read the image data. Select the [Import imager (T)] from the [Image (G)] and click [OK]. This will make the status in which the image can be read. "Image not Ready" on the Printlink controller will disappear in approx. one minute.
Fig. 19.19 Image Reading Mode Dialog Box
19-24

(5) Follow the procedure below to store the image from the modality. 1. Set the image size in the modality. In this example, the image size is set to 1024 x 1024. 2. In this example, first read the font used for name. When only ID is recognized, read the font of the ID. 3. In this example, the font of the name is set to alphanumerics and symbols only. 4. Enter the characters of the data above with the modality. 5. Since the character recognition is not completed in only one time, the following procedure should be repeated until all the necessary fonts are read. Input the image with the modality (several times).
Output the image.
Read the image with the character recognition install software. Fig. 19.20 Procedure for Reading Fonts The image should be stored repeatedly until all the characters are sent. For example, for the first time "ABCDEFGHIJK" are sent, and for the second time, "LMNOPQRSTUV", and for the third time, "WXYZ....". Be sure to enter the maximum number of the characters that can be entered for one time. This allows the device to check the character input area that can be recognized in the image. In the example, although only alphanumerics and symbols are entered, all the Kana can be read with the character recognition install software if necessary. (This is for the Japanese version only.) When the image data is read, the directory with a name of the image size will be automatically created. If the size is 1024 x 1024, the directory of "1024 x 1024" is created. In the example, the directory of "Konica HP_ID\CH01\1024_1024" is created. Cautions on reading images Check if there is a character space (more than 1 dot) after reading the image one time. If there is not, the registration cannot be made as individual character cannot be recognized. Therefore, output the image with a space to the output device. 6. After reading all the characters used for the name, read the font of ID. Follow Steps (3) to (5) to do so. However, if the size and position of the name and ID are different but their fonts are same, it is not necessary to send the font again. Enter characters at maximum only one time and send them. This is for checking the difference of the position of character strings and the maximum area. 7. After transferring the image with the name and ID, perform Steps 1 to 6 for other image sizes. 8. When the reading of all the different size data is completed, the image reading ends. Click the [Quit Import] to return to the Main window.
19-25

For example, after reading the image in order to recognize the characters on the image of size of 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512, the main window will appear. The captured size will be displayed in the [Size-directory] on the right side of the window.
Fig. 19.21 Main Window after Reading Images (CH01 and the captured image size are displayed.) Add the captured image size by selecting the [Add Size (A)] from the [Item (I)] or double-clicking the blank field of the [Size of image].
Fig. 19.22 Main Window with Image Added to the [Size of image]
19-26

(6) Create the font dictionary for each image size. First, create the font dictionary with the image size of 512 x 512. To do so, click the 512 x 512 in the [Size of image] and click the [Settings] on the upper left of the main window to display the [Settings] window.
Fig. 19.23 Settings Window (7) Set the parameters. In the [Location], select the item to be character-recognized from Name, ID, and Other 1 and 2. (Multiple items can be selected.) Before setting this parameter, confirm with a user (the person in charge at a hospital) which item is character-recognized. In the example, the Name and ID are set to be recognized. In the [Study], select the Name or ID of the recognized result to make the Study function valid. Confirm this with a user of each modality (the person in charge at a hospital) including whether or not to use the Study function. In this item, the parameters to see when the Study function is set can be set. The ON/OFF of the Study function is set with the install software of the Printlink. In the example, the Study will be valid with the ID. In the [Frame], set the frame of the film in which the character recognition is performed. Confirm this with a user of each modality (the person in charge at a hospital). If the image that is easy to recognize can be output into the same frame number all the time, specify that number. If it cannot, or the image is inserted into the recognized area, set the "Multi frame". This function can recognize all the frames in one format. The default is set to the "Multi frame". The "Last frame" and "Last frame-1" can be also set in this item. The [Last frame] executes the character recognition when the last frame in a film is stored. For example, in the 12th frame format, the character recognition is made in the 12th frame, and in the fourth frame format, the character recognition is made in the fourth frame.
19-27

The [Last frame-1] executes the character recognition when the frame preceding the last one in a film is stored. For example, in the 12th frame format, the character recognition is made in the 11th frame, and in the fourth frame format, the character recognition is made in the third frame. These settings are convenient when a user always output the frame with the characters in the end although the format always changes. There are two fields for setting, be sure to set the [No recognition] in the right field. Specify the number of frame in the left field. In the example, the character recognition is executed in the first frame. (8) Click the [Change modality name (H)] and enter the modality name. Since the modality name is a guide for selecting the data when the modality data is kept in the library, enter a name that is easy to understand later. Although the field for a channel number appears when the modality name is entered, do not change the channel number. In the example, "Konica HP Regius" is entered as the modality name.
Fig. 19.24 Settings Window After Settings (The modality name is displayed in the upper-center of the window.) (9) Click the [Initialize (A)] to return the modality data of the all image sizes to the default settings. Do not use this function under normal conditions. Be careful not to click by mistake. The [Modality library] is used after the dictionary data is set. Refer to Section 19.10.3 for the [Modality library].
19-28

(10) Click the [Coordinates] on the upper portion of the window to display the [Coordinates] window.
Fig. 19.25 Coordinates Window (11) Set the maximum number of the name and ID character strings. First, set the maximum number of the name character. The characters have to be entered at its maximum. Click the [NAME (N)]. (This cannot be clicked if the [NAME] is not set to the target character recognition in the [Settings] window.) Then, click the [Mouse (M)]. It will be displayed in gray. Using the scroll bar on the image display area, move the character strings to the center. Click the upper-left portion of the image, drag to the lower-right portion, and release the mouse button so that the entered character strings are enclosed. When enclosing the characters, allow the margin of 2 to 3 pixels in the upper and lower, the right and left from the characters. Too much margin will not be a problem, but do not set the character frame with no margin. Allow a sufficient margin in the right from the character as the length of the displayed characters changes depending on each character. (e.g. "IIIII" and "WWWWW" have the same number of characters but the length of the displayed area is different.) When setting the character frame, do not include the diagnostic image area within the frame. (Refer to Fig.19.26.)
19-29
Fig. 19.26 Setting Character String Frame (12) After setting the character frame, the [Mouse (M)] displayed in gray returns to the normal display. In order to set the character frame again, click the [Mouse (M)] and repeat Step (11). Right-clicking before setting the frame returns the [Mouse (M)] displayed in gray to the normal display. In such case, the character frame setting is not renewed. After setting the frame for Name, execute the same procedure for the ID. Clicking the [NAME (N)] and [ID (I)] after setting the character frame displays the set frame at the center of the screen immediately.
Fig. 19.27 Setting Character String Frame with Name and ID
19-30

(13) Click the [Dictionary] on the upper portion of the window to display the [Dictionary] window.
Fig.19.28 Dictionary Window (14) (15) The selected character strings and the clipped those characters (enclosed with a red or green frame) are displayed on the window. Create a dictionary file (dic file). First, change the dictionary name. The dictionary name, [NAME (N)], of the image size of 512 x 512 in Fig. 19.29 shows the default setting, "dic comment 01-512-512-NAME". Since the dictionary name is a guide when it is used as the library, enter the name that is easy to understand later. In the figure below, the dictionary name is "Regius-512512-NAME" which means the modality name + image size + type (NAME or ID). Click the [Change comment (H)] on the lower portion of the screen, and set the dictionary name. The changed data appears in the set dictionary name dialog box. So, confirm if it is displayed properly.
Fig.19.29 Setting Dictionary Name Dialog Box

19-31

(16) Register the bit pattern of the character. The characters enclosed with the red frame in the character display area can be registered. In the figure below, "A" is a target character to be registered. The recognized result appears under the character display area. In the figure below, since no character exists in the dictionary, "?" is displayed. Then, select the same character as the target character from the character icon at the center of the window. In the example below, "A" icon on the window should be clicked. By clicking the [A], "?" is changed into "A". (Refer to Fig. 19.30.)
Fig. 19.30 Registering Bit Pattern "A" Then, the next character (e.g. "B") becomes the target character (enclosed with the red frame). Likewise, register the bit pattern of all the characters in the character display area. (Refer to Fig. 19.31.)
Fig. 19.31 Registering All the Bit Patterns
19-32

Note: Do not register more than one character as the same bit pattern. Suppose that "1" icon is clicked for the registered target character "l" by mistake, then without deleting it, "l" icon is clicked for the registered target character "l". In such case, "1" icon and "l" icon are registered for the registered target character "l". When recognizing bit pattern "l" using this dictionary, the recognized result will be "1", which is first registered. The icon that is registered later does not affect the recognized result. If you set incorrect icon by mistake, click the [Delete Text (S)] to delete the registered character. (Refer to (23) for the [Delete Text (S)]. (17) Register the bit pattern in the character display area in the dictionary. Click the [Register (J)] at the right-center of the window. This will correspond the bit pattern in the character display area to the character strings in the frame under it, and will register it in the dictionary. The registered characters in the dictionary will be highlighted. (Refer to Fig. 19.32.)
Fig. 19.32 Registering Bit Pattern of All Characters in the First Page. Note: Be sure to execute this procedure. Even if the character pattern is read into the character recognition install software but it is not registered in the dictionary, the character recognition is not performed. (18) After registration, register the characters for the images in the following pages in the same manner, and register all the characters.
19-33

(19) In the example, only capital alphabetic characters are used for the Name. Fig.19.33 shows the window in which all the bit patterns are registered. After entering all the bit patterns, be sure to click the [Write (W)] in the [Dictionary library]. This will save the dictionary with name "Regius-512512-NAME" in the library. Now you can call it whenever you want.
Fig. 19.33 Registering All Capital Alphabetic Characters (NAME) (20) Check the registered characters. Clicking the [Save Bitmap (B)] makes the registered character pattern bit-mapped. Enter a file name that is easy to understand later. If the mji file exists, the character pattern can be bit-mapped again. So, it is not needed to save. The contents of the saved bit-mapped file can be confirmed by opening with the Microsoft paint. (The characters appear in the order of the character code, instead of the order of registration.)
Fig. 19.34 Bit-Mapped Character Data
19-34

(21) Register the characters for ID in the same manner if necessary. In order to change the target character to be registered to ID, click the radio button of the [ID (I)] at the left-center of the window. In the example below, "Regius-512512-ID" is set as the dictionary name of ID. Enter the name that is easy to understand later, like other data. In the example, the characters used for ID are numbers only. Fig. 19.35 shows the window in which all the bit patterns are registered.
Fig. 19.35 Registering All Numbers (ID) (22) (23) Register the dictionary of ID in the library. Be sure to execute this procedure. When deleting the registered character or registering another bit pattern, click the [Delete text (S)] on the lower portion of the screen. Then, click the character to be deleted.
Fig. 19.36 Deleting Character "0"
19-35

(24) After the dictionary registration and library registration for both name and ID are complete, click the [Settings] on the upper portion of the window.
Fig. 19.37 Settings Window After Dictionary Registration of 512 x 512 (25) Perform the character string frame settings and dictionary registration for the image of size of 1024 x 1024 in the same manner. Click the [1024 x 1024] on the left, then click the [Coordinates] and [Dictionary] to allow you to make the settings for 1024 x 1024. (26) In the example below, since the font for the name and ID is the same, it is easy to affect the registered dictionary for Name on the ID. In the example, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is entered as the name, and it is registered in the dictionary library. In this case, click the [ID (I)] at the left-center of the same window to display the character strings for ID. (Refer to Fig. 19.38.)
Fig. 19.38 Displaying ID for 1024 x 1024
19-36

(27) Click the [Read (R)] in the [Dictionary library] to display the library of the dictionary files that have been registered. (shown in Fig. 19.39.) In the example, since the font of ID is the same as that of name, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is selected. When returning to the [Settings] window shown in Fig. 19.40, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is displayed for both Name and ID, which means that the dictionary data is shared. If you change the contents of registered dictionary (e.g. changing the bit patterns of the character, etc.), this change will affect the dictionary of the name as the dictionary file is shared. So, be careful with changing the data when the dictionary is shared.
Fig. 19.39 Reading "Regius-10241024-NAME" Dictionary as ID Dictionary
Fig. 19.40 Settings Window After Registering Dictionary of 1024 x 1024
19-37

(28) After the settings for both image sizes are complete, return to the [Settings] window. Then, select the [Write (W)] from the [Modality library], and register the modality library. In the example, "CH01 Konica HP Regius" that is displayed on the upper portion of the window is registered as the name of the modality library. Enter a name that is easy to understand later, like other data. The modality library in the example includes the dictionaries for images of size of 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512 in the "Regius". (29) Click the [Close (C)] on the upper-right portion of the window to return the Main window at startup. On the Main window, you can check the modality name and the dictionary name.
Fig. 19.41 Main Window After Settings (30) Save the settings in the file. Selecting the [Save (S)] from the [File (F)] displays the file name input dialog box. Enter a file name that is easy to understand later (e.g. the hospital name + the set Printlink). In the example, as the Printlink-ID is used, "Konica HP Printlink-ID" is entered as the file name.
Fig.19.42 File Name Input Dialog Box
19-38

(31) Clicking the [OK] in the file name input dialog box displays the file save dialog box. Specify the same file name as the named file and save it. You can give another file name, but be sure to give a file name that is easy to understand later. Always put ".mji" following the file name.
Fig. 19.43 File Save Dialog Box (32) Send all the set data to the Printlink-ID.
Fig. 19.44 Sending Modality Library (mji file) with the Printlink Maintenance Software After sending the data, restart the Printlink-ID. Setting the [OCR] on the controller to [AT] or "1, 2, 3, 4, 5" will start the character recognition. This will complete the install settings of the character recognition.
19-39

19.10.2 Setting the parameter of the character recognition
Set Step (1) in the [Dictionary] window (refer to Fig. 19.6.), and set Step (2) or later in the [Advanced settings] dialog box (refer to Fig. 19.7.).
(1)
Setting thresholds
The threshold separates the background from the characters in the image. Change of the threshold is needed when the image is inserted into the character recognition area. A guide for setting the threshold is as follows. The default value is 128. When images are not within the character recognition area; Leave the threshold at its default. Note : The default value may not separate the characters from the background when the entire density of the image is low, such as RI. In such case, change the threshold so that it can separate the characters from the background. When images are inserted into the character recognition area, or they are likely to be inserted into the character recognition area; Change the threshold. a) When the pixel value of the characters is constant, such as digital input and the network input; Set the threshold to the character pixel value. The character pixel value is the boundary between the character to be recognized and the character not to be recognized. Find a character pixel value by changing the threshold. 1. Find a maximum value from the values at which the characters can be recognized.
Fig. 19.45 Dictionary Window with Threshold being 249
19-40

2. Find a minimum value from the values at which the characters cannot be recognized. When an error occurs upon the character recognition, the dialog box below will be displayed.
Fig. 19.46 Changing Threshold to 250 (This dialog box appears when an error occurs upon the character recognition.) 3. In this case, at threshold 249, the characters can be recognized, but at 250 they cannot. So, set the threshold to 249. b) When the pixel value of the characters is not constant, such as video; Set the threshold to (the minimum value of the character pixel - 10). This is for the jitters of the video signal. Find a minimum value of the character pixel as follows: 1. Read the image of 10 frames. 2. Click the checkbox in the [Hide frame] at the left-center of the window to hide the frame. 3. Find a value at which the characters are garbled and not garbled by changing the threshold by 5. Check all the read frames (10 frames). 4. Find a value at which the characters are not garbled.
Fig. 19.47 Characters not Garbled (Threshold: 240)

19-41

5. Find a value at which the characters are garbled.
Fig. 19.48 Garbled Characters (Threshold: 245) 6. In this case, the minimum value of the character pixel is 240. Subtract 10 from that value, and set the threshold to 230. * Considering the jitters of the video signals, 10 is subtracted from the minimum value of the character pixel. However, if the amount of the jitters is large at some institutions, adjust the threshold. Note: It is necessary to set the threshold again when the character pixel value is changed with the change of LUT in the modality.
(2)
Pattern hit ratio

It is not necessary to change this ratio under normal conditions. This ratio may be changed when few characters are registered. The default value is 97.
(3)
Recognition of space character

This setting is for inserting a space between characters. If there is one place to be recognized, the widest space between the characters is recognized as a space, and if there are two, the widest space and the second-widest place are recognized. After setting the space, check the recognized result of the space in the [Check] window (by clicking the [Check]). The [Dictionary] window does not display the space.
The recognized result including the space is displayed.
Fig. 19.49 Recognized Result of Space (Check Window)
19-42

(4) Recognition of character color
This setting specifies the color of character. Basically, you can set to "Auto", but if images are inserted into the recognition area, make this setting.
(5)
Recognition of smaller region

Select the following conditions to treat smaller regions. The smaller region means the region that is smaller than the width of registered characters. Not treat as a character It treats as a character
Set to " It treats as a character" when registering characters, and set to " Not treat as a character" for other operations. Note: The reason that " It treats as a character" should be selected when registering characters: The window as shown in the figure below may appear. This is because "N" and "I" are smaller than the width of the registered characters when the first character, "K" is registered while " Not treat as a character" is set. In such case, before registering characters, set to " It treats as a character".
Fig. 19.50 Frame Does Not Appear
19-43

(6) A cutting method
This setting is used when there is no space between characters. Ex) Normal: Select when there is a space between characters. Fixed width: Select when there is no space between characters (no space of 1 dot or over between characters) and the width of characters is constant. Specify the width with the [Columns].
Fig. 19.51 Recognizing Multiple Characters as One Character Without Space (The width of characters is constant.) When the width of characters (Character size is 10 for this font.) is constant, specify the width of characters in the [Columns].
Fig. 19.52 Recognizing One Character by One Character Character's width: This is used when there is no space between characters (no space of 1 dot or over between characters) and the width of characters is not constant. The default setting of the [Fusion] is 0 and it is not needed to change.
19-44
Fig. 19.53 Recognizing Multiple Characters as One Character Without Space (The width of characters is not constant.) When setting to "Character's width", the window is as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 19.54 Recognizing One Character by One Character
(7) Divided characters

(This item is for the Japanese version only.) Set this when using Katakana. Nothing: Used when Katakana is not used. Exist in dictionary: Used when Katakana is used. Set the maximum strokes of characters in the [Number of division].
Fig. 19.55 Japanese character, Katakana "
" (Number of strokes: 4)
19-45

For Katakana, one character consists of multiple parts. Those parts are called strokes. In case of " is 4. (Refer to Fig. 16.57.) Set the maximum number of strokes of concerned characters. Registering divided Katakana The settings of the [Divided characters] are assumed to be made. Follow the procedure below to register the character that consists of multiple parts. This section describes the registration, taking " " (number of strokes: 4) for example. ", the number of strokes
The character that is not registered is displayed as follows:
Fig. 19.56 Unregistered Character (Dictionary Window)
19-46

Select the most-left part of the character, and click " " in this example.
Fig. 19.57 Selecting the Most-left Stroke (Dictionary Window) Select each of all the remaining parts and click " " on the lower-right of the window each time.
Fig. 19.58 Selecting "
" (Dictionary Window)
19-47

Press "Register" to register all the parts as one character.
Fig. 19.59 Register Parts as One Character (Dictionary Window) Note: If the registered parts is not displayed as one character, the settings of [Divided characters] may not be matched to the number of strokes. Check the settings again.
19-48

(8) Excludes bigger region on the edge
This setting is used when it is likely that a image that is larger than the width of the registered characters is inserted into the right and left edges of the recognition area. It does not exclude it: Left edge: Excludes the left edge of an image.
If an image is inserted into the character area when " It does not exclude it" is set, the image will also be treated as a target to be character-recognized as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 19.60 Image in the Left Edge When setting the [Left edge], the image in the left edge is ignored as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 19.61 Not Recognizing Image in the Left Edge as Characters Right edge: Excludes the right edge of an image.
19-49

19.10.3 Using the dictionary creating data at another institution
Ex) Suppose this situation. An institution, "Konica hospital", created the dictionary data for the images of size of 1024 x 1024 and 640 x 512 in the Regius. Another institution, "KMS hospital", tries to use the data created at the "Konica hospital", and they have the Regius in which the character recognition can be made for the image size of 1024 x 1024 and 1280 x 1024. The "KMS hospital" has the Regius dictionary data (file name: "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji") and other conditions are as shown in Fig. 19.11. Now, create a new dictionary file in the Printlink-ID at the "KMS hospital". 1. Set the store directory to "KMS HP_ID". 2. Start up the character recognition install software, and set the IP address and the store directory for the Printlink-ID. 3. Read the image data of size of 1024 x 1024 and 1280 x 1024 from the Printlink-ID. Check that the following directories are created.
C:\OCR
Modality
Dic
Mji
Data Konica HP_ID
Konica HP_IV
Yamada HP This is created automatically upon the reception of the image. KMS HP_ID
CH01 1024_1024 Directory for store 1280_1024
Channel 1 directory Reading image directory (1024 x 1024) Reading image directory (1280 x 1024)
Fig. 19.62 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Directories 4. Read the saved data file. Select the [Open-Overwrite (O)] from the [File (F)] and read "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji". (Refer to Fig. 19.63.) 5. Since the dictionary file for the images of size of 1024 x 1024 and 640 x 512 is registered in "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji", read this file. In this case, since 640 x 512 is not needed, delete it by selecting the [Delete (D)] in the [Item (I)] menu.
19-50

6. Since the modality name of the read file is "Konica HP Regius", change the modality name to "Konica HP Regius" on the [Settings] window. If the modality name is not changed, the original data, "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji", is overwritten when this modality is placed in the library. So, be sure to change the modality name. (Refer to Fig.19.64.)
Fig. 19.63 Reading Saved Data Dialog Box
Fig. 19.64 Changing Modality Name Dialog Box
19-51

7. In the example, although the read data has the dictionary file for the image of size of 1024 x 1024, the detailed settings, such as the target parameters for the character recognition (Name, ID, Other 1 and 2) and the position of character strings on the image, may be different between "Konica Hospital" and "KMS Hospital". So, check the recognition results of character strings on the [Dictionary] window if they are recognized properly. If re-settings or adjustment are needed, refer to Sections 19.10.1 and 19.10.2 to set them again. 8. No setting has been made for the dictionary file for the image of size of 1280 x 1024 yet. Make the settings from beginning by referring to Section 19.10.1. 9. Save the set data after the necessary settings are complete. In the example, the set data is saved with the modality name being "KMS HP Printlink-ID" and the character recognition file name being "KMS HP Printlink-ID.mji". 10. Send the saved data to the Printlink-ID, and this will complete the settings of the character recognition.
Fig. 19.65 File (F) Menu in Maintenance Window
19-52

19.10.4 How to read the set data from Printlink
In the example shown in Fig. 19.10, the set data can be read into the installed PC using the Printlink install software. Note: In order to open the set data, the OCR install software is required. Before opening the set data, select the [Stored Directory (D)] from the [Image (G)] menu, and specify the directory.
Fig. 19.66 Selecting Ocr Printlink -> PC (M) in File (F) menu in Maintenance Window
19-53

19.10.5 Settings when character string position and font are different for the same image size
When there are two patterns of character string position and font for an image of size of 1024 x 1024 in the Printlink-ID in the system shown in Fig. 19.11;
Pattern 1 Name TARO
Pattern 2
ID12
Y=1024 ID34
Y=1024
X=1024 ID
X=1024
Fig. 19.67 Two Patterns of Character String Position and Font for Same Image Size 1. Register two patterns of the same size.
Fig. 19.68 Registering Second Pattern
19-54
19.11 Returning Environment of Printlink

Fig. 19.69 shows the systems that perform the character recognition including the Printlink immediately after the character recognition is set. At this time, the character recognition installed PC is not required any more. So, remove it from the network. Li-1417D output (the character recognition installed PC) is set in the Printlink-ID and -IV. So, return it to the original setting. If you have changed the ConvertLUT at the installation, return it to the original setting. This will compete the setting of the character recognition.
Diagnostic device (e.g. Regius) Printlink controller
Diagnostic device
Printlink controller
Digital Additional output to the Li-1417D
Video
PrintlinkID
PrintlinkIV
192.168.2.11 192.168.2.15 192.168.2.17
192.168.2.12 192.168.2.20
DICOM imager
Filing system
Li-1417D (Character recognition -software-installed PC)
Fig. 19.69 System After Setting Character Recognition
19-55
19.12 Setting and Operating Controller

19.12.1 Correcting character recognition result
EDIT ON/OFF ON: OFF: Corrects the character recognition result. Make the correction on the ID INPUT screen. Does not correct the character recognition result. Does not allow you to enter the ID INPUT screen.
The recognition result is displayed following the install character strings on the ID display area on the upper portion of the basic screen of the controller. Note: The network controller does not have this function. The recognition result is not displayed.
19.12.2 Selecting character recognition operation

OCR OFF/AT/1,2,3,4,5 OFF: AT: Does not recognize characters. Recognizes characters with the pattern of matching the input image size to all the patterns set with the OCR install software. 1,2,3,4,5: Corresponds to pattern 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and operates only one pattern.
Fig. 19.70 FUNCTION Screen
19-56

(1) There are different image sizes in one modality;
The data of the character recognition install is set as shown in the figure below.
Pattern 1 TARO ID1234 TARO
Pattern 2 ID12
Y=512 Y=1024 X=512
Patterns 3 to 5 are not registered. X=1024

Fig. 19.71 Character Recognition Install Data Setting Example Table 19.1 Different Image Sizes in One Modality Image size (Pixel) 1024x1024 512x512 Others Controller settings AT Recognizes with pattern 1. Recognizes with pattern 2. Does not recognize. 1 Recognizes with pattern 1. Does not recognize. Does not recognize. 2 Does not recognize. Recognizes with pattern 2. Does not recognize. 3~5 Does not recognize. Does not recognize. Does not recognize.
19-57

(2) There are different font and recognition position for the same image size in one modality;
The data of the character recognition install is set as shown in the figure below.
Pattern 1 TARO ID1234 TARO
Pattern 2 ID12
Y=512 Y=1024 X=512
X=1024 Pattern 3 Patterns 4 and 5 are not registered.
Y=512
TARO X=512
ID12
Fig. 19.72 Character Recognition Install Data Setting Example Table 19.2 Different Font and Recognition Position for Same Image Size in One Modality Image size (Pixel) 1024x1024 Controller settings AT Recognizes with pattern 1. Recognizes with pattern 2 and 3 twice, displays the most reliable result. Does not recognize. 1 Recognizes with pattern 1. Does not recognize. 2 Does not recognize. Recognizes with pattern 2. 3 Does not recognize. Recognizes with pattern 3. 4, 5 Does not recognize. Does not recognize.
512x512
Others
Does not recognize.
Does not recognize.
Does not recognize.
Does not recognize.
19-58

19.12.3 Forcefully ejecting STUDY queue
NEXT STUDY When setting the OCR STUDY to ON in the install software, the [STUDY OFF] of the controller will be changed to the [NEXT STUDY]. Touching it will eject the study queue forcefully. The STUDY registers the queue when the recognition result of the item (NAME or ID) set in the [STUDY] in the OCR install software is different from the one in the previous page. The registered queue is called STUDY queue. Note: The page that has STUDY queue is not counted as PRINT QUEUE on the FUNCTION screen. If the recognized data that has been ejected forcefully or the recognized data in the current page are different from that in the previous page, it is counted. Note: The network controller does not have this function.
Fig. 19.73 Ejecting Queue Screen
19.12.4 Selecting the display item of the recognized result

SELECT ID INPUT ID/NAME ID NAME : Displays the recognized result of ID on the controller. : Displays the recognized result of NAME on the controller.
Note: The network controller does not have this function.
19.12.5 Enabling or disabling the recognized result

ANOTHER ID INPUT RESULT / CLEAR RESULT: Enables the recognized result of the item that is not selected in the SELECT ID INPUT. CLEAR: Disables the recognized result of the item that is not selected in the SELECT ID INPUT. Note: The network controller does not have this function.
19-59

19.12.6 Affecting on film stamp
FILM STAMP NAME OFF ON FILM STAMP ID OFF ON OFF/ON : Does not affect the recognized result of NAME on the stamp. : Affects the recognized result of NAME on the stamp. OFF/ON : Does not affect the recognized result of ID on the stamp. : Affects the recognized result of ID on the stamp.
Note: Basically, only the recognized result of the item (NAME or ID) that is selected in the [SELECT ID INPUT] is affected on the stamp. However, it is possible to affect the recognized result of both NAME and ID on the stamp by setting both the NAME and ID to ON on the screen below. The order of the stamp is ID first, then NAME. From the SETUP screen, enter the Maintenance screen -> GENERAL SETUP screen-> ADDITION SETUP screen, and set the MANUAL STAMP ENABLE to ON. Note: The network controller has the same function in the screen below. From the SETUP screen, enter the Maintenance screen -> GENERAL SETUP screen -> KEYPAD screen -> ID SETUP screen. The contents are the same as those of controller.
19.12.7 Timing for displaying the controller

FRAME NUMBER ON OCR OFF/1 to 64 Specify the timing for the controller's receiving the recognized result from the Printlink main unit by a frame number. When the image of the frame number set here is stored, the result of the recognition is affected on the controller. Match the number to be specified here to the recognized frame number set with the OCR install software. Specify "2" or "3" for the multi frame settings.
Select ID or NAME to be recognized.
Set whether or not affect the character recognized result on the film stamp. Set ID or NAME, and ON/OFF.
Set the frame in which characters are recognized.
Note: The network controller does not have this function.
19-60
Blank page
Blank page
20. Upgrading Printlink

20.1 Printlink Software Overview
Configuration of distributed software of Printlink
VX.XX
ContVX.XX drivers VX.XX Mainte VX.XX MainVX.XX OcrVX.XX
... Controller software ... Driver software ... Maintenance software ... Printlink Main software ... OCR install software
DeskTopDelivery ... Remote tool software
20.2 Upgrading/Downgrading Printlink Software

20.2.1 Upgrading Printlink software
The methods of upgrading the Printlink software are different between Ver.1.05 or earlier and Ver.1.10 or later. Follow the procedure below to upgrade each version.
(1)
The methods of upgrading the Printlink software of Ver.1.05 or earlier

a) Upgrading Printlink Service software The Service software can be upgraded on the [Printlink Maintenance] window from Mainte Ver.1.04 or later. For Ver. 1.03 or earlier, it is necessary to upgrade manually. 1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select the [Server Connection (B)].
Fig. 20.1 File (F) Menu of Printlink Maintenance Window
20-1

2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the Printlink main unit to be installed, and click the [SET].
Fig. 20.2 Change Server Connection Dialog Box 3. When the connection is made, select the [Service Upgrade (G)] (see Fig. 20.1) from the [File (F)] menu. Then, select a file of new service version (Service VX.XX folder) from the directory tree box (see Fig. 20.3), and click the [SET]. Upgrading the version will start.
Fig. 20.3 SERVICE & DRIVER File Upgrade Dialog Box 4. When upgrading the version is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear.
Fig. 20.4 Confirmation Dialog Box Note: The Service software of Ver. 1.03 or earlier does not support the upgrading. The message shown in Fig. 20.5 will appear. In such case, follow the procedure below to upgrade the software.
Fig. 20.5 Service Version Lower Dialog Box When the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.5 is displayed, connect a display, a keyboard, and a mouse to the Printlink main unit, and double-click D:\Itr\Itr\ServiceUp\ServiceVerUp.exe. Then, upgrading the version will start. Restart the Printlink main unit, and if it starts up properly, the upgrading of the software is completed.
20-2

b) Upgrading Printlink Main software 1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select the [Server Connection (B)]. 2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the Printlink main unit to be installed, and click the [SET]. 3. When the connection is made, the status bar (Connect Server [ ]) of the window shown in Fig. 20.6 will appear.
Status bar
Fig. 20.6 Printlink Maintenance Window Box 4. Select the [File (F)] again, then select the [Main Upgrade (U)]. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.7 will appear. Select a directory of new version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the version will start.
Display of the directory tree box
Specify the directory.
Fig. 20.7 Exce.File Upgrade Dialog Box 5. During upgrading, the data contents to be written are displayed in the dialog box. Upgrading:Copy from:C:\itr Copy to:Z:\ITR\~ 6. When upgrading the software is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.8 will appear.
Fig. 20.8 Confirmation Dialog Box 7. After upgrading the Printlink main software properly, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear. If an error occurs, repeat the procedure from Step 2. After upgrading the software, the Printlink will automatically restart. After restarting, the upgraded software starts to be executed. The software before upgrading is copied in the backup area.
20-3

(2) The methods of upgrading the Printlink software of Ver.1.10 or later
a) Upgrading Printlink software For the Printlink software of Ver.1.10 or later, the Main software and Service software can be upgraded at the same time. For upgrading, select the [Main/Service Upgrade (G)]. 1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.9 will appear. Then, select the [Server Connection (B)].
Fig. 20.9 File (F) Menu of Printlink Maintenance Window 2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.10. Set the IP address of the Printlink main unit (host name) to be installed, and click the [SET].
Fig. 20.10 Change Server Connection Dialog Box 3. Select the [File (F)] again, then select the [Main/Service Upgrade (G)]. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.3 will appear. Select a directory of new version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the software will start. 4. When upgrading the software is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear. Important: After upgrading to Ver. 1.10, you cannot downgrade to Ver. 1.05 or earlier.
20-4

20.2.2 Downgrading Printlink software
This section describes how to downgrade the software if a problem occurs with the Printlink main software, etc. When the software is downgraded, the version of the Printlink main software area and of the software in the Printlink main software backup area become the same, and the software of current version will be lost. 1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select the [Server Connection (B)]. 2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the Printlink main unit to be installed, and click the [SET]. 3. Select the [Downgrade (T)] from the [File (F)] menu. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.11 will appear. Select a version to be used from the list box, and click the [SET]. Downgrading the software will start. (The software can be downgraded to two generations ago.)
Current version Version of one generation ago Version of two generations ago
Fig. 20.11 Exec.File Downgrade Dialog Box 4. During downgrading, the data contents to be written are displayed in the dialog box. Downgrading:Copy from:\Z:\ITR\~\~ Copy to:\Z:\ITR\~ 5. When downgrading the version is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.12 will appear.
Fig. 20.12 Confirmation Dialog Box 6. After downgrading the Printlink main software properly, the [Printlink Maintenance] dialog box will appear. If an error occurs, repeat the procedure from Step 3. 7. After downgrading the software, the Printlink will automatically restart. After restarting, the downgraded software starts to be executed. The software before downgrading is copied in the backup area.
20-5

20.2.3 Upgrading the Printlink controller (Keypad)
Before upgrading the controller, be sure to upgrade the Printlink software. Note: Since the settings of the controller are initialized after upgrading, record the settings before upgrading. Check the following points before upgrading. Be sure to power off the controller. a) b) Does the ROM exist in the Printlink controller ? The SW in the controller should be as follows: SW 1: [ON OFF OFF OFF] (from the first) SW 2: [OFF OFF ON ON] (from the first) 1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select the [Server Connection (B)]. 2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the Printlink main unit to be installed, and click the [SET]. 3. Select the [Controller Upgrade (T)] from the [File (F)] menu. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.13 will appear.
Specify the directory.
Display of the directory tree box
Fig. 20.13 Upgrade Controller Dialog Box 4.
Select a type of the controller (keypad).

For PRINTLINK-ID, IV, DV, or HG, select the [Controller] . For PRINTLINK-IN, or OD, select the [Network Controller] .
5. Select a directory of new service version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the controller will start.
Controller file name: Pcontvxxx.binor host connection file name Network controller file name: Pnetvxxx.bin (PRINTLINK-IN and -OD only)
xxx = version No. 6. During upgrading, "Upgrade:Connection Standby" is displayed on the dialog box, and "Now Down Loading xxx" is displayed on the controller. The time count is displayed on the controller. When this time count shows 0, the upgrading of the software will be complete. Note: Method of returning when an error occurs: If the time count on the controller stops during upgrading, or "FLASH ROM ERROR" is displayed, follow the procedure below to upgrade again. 1. Power the Printlink OFF, and set to mode C shown in Section 17.3.4 (ROM-> FLASH copy mode). 2. Power the Printlink ON, then copy the ROM on FLASH (when the interval of a beep becomes short, it will be completed.), and power the Printlink OFF. 3. Return the setting of DIPSW to mode B (download mode), then power the Printlink ON, and execute upgrading operation again.
20-6
Blank page
Blank page

21.1 Error Code Overview
The following shows the basic points on errors, and understanding and handling errors are based on them. The corrective actions for each error code are shown in the following page. When the first two digits of the error code is "00": the error from the imager (Li-10A, 21, 7, 7A, 8, 62P). It is necessary to check the connection between the Printlink-OD and the imagers. When the first one digit of the error code is "A": the error of the Printlink internal IF board. It is necessary to check the settings of the Printlink internal IF board, connection cable, and signals. When the first one digit of the error code is "B or E": the error of the Printlink main software or the error that occurs between Li-1417D/DH and Li-62P DICOM in the network. The errors on the Printlink are recorded on the error log file. The operations in Printlink are recorded on the event log file.
21.2 Error Log and Event Log

Write the error log and event log with the Printlink install software.
Fig. 21.1 File (F) Menu of the Printlink Maintenance Window Execute the Printlink install software and select the Printlink to be connected in the [Server Connection (B)].
21-1

Select the [Read Log (L)...] and click the [NEW STATUS] to display the history of the event log shown below. Click the [ID] of the time at the data to be saved. When you wish to select multiple times, specify them by pressing CTRL and clicking at the same time.
Fig. 21.2 Event Log & Error Log Dialog Box Click the [SAVE LOG]. Then, the screen shown below will appear. Specify the directory for saving the log data in the installed PC. After specifying the save directory, click the [SET].
Fig. 21.3 Save Directory Specifying Dialog Box The message below will appear after the reception of the log file is completed.
Fig. 21.4 Log File Reception End Dialog Box The error log file (Err_log.txt) and the event log file (Event_logxxx.txt) are created in the specified directory. "xxx" shows the specified log number. If the log number is not specified, the file is not created. If multiple log number are specified, multiple files are created.
21-2
21.3 Recorded Contents of Log

21.3.1. For Event Log
The event log is recorded as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 21.5 Event Log
21.3.2. For Error Log

The following items are recorded. Date of occurrence of errors Source of occurrence of errors Type of errors Error code Error IF No.
Errors can be handled by pressing the ERROR RESET button. When errors occur in the multiple concerned modalities for one cause, such as errors from the imager or the disconnection of the output device, after handling errors, resetting the error in one modality will automatically reset all the errors in the other modalities.
21-3

Note: The code number inside [ ] shows the error code for Li-10A. Error Code Description Error Message 0001[4161] IMAGER Check film size Film size error the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0005[41804181] IMAGER AQU not complete Improper acquiring of images 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. * Check the connection of the data cables. 000A[300A] IMAGER Supply unit err Suction Unit error 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 000B[300B] IMAGER Pinch roller Pinch-roller does not work properly. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 000C[300C] IMAGER Transfer unit open The transfer unit does not pinch a film. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 000D[300D] IMAGER Transfer unit close The transfer unit does not hold a film. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0014[3014] IMAGER Jam in supply-print A film stops between the supply and print sections. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0015[3015] IMAGER Jam before print A film stops at the inlet of the print section. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0016[30163018] IMAGER Jam in print unit A film stops when it is transferred. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0018[3023] IMAGER Jam in receive unit A film stops when it is received. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 0019[3019301A] IMAGER Supply MAG. set Supply magazine error 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink.
Corrective action 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of
21-4
Error Code Error Message 001B[301B301C] IMAGER Receive MAG. set
Description Receive magazine error
Corrective action 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink.
001D IMAGER Receive MAG. Full.
Receive magazine full error
1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink.
001E[301E] IMAGER Film empty
No film is in the supply magazine.
001F[301F] IMAGER Jam supply-print
A film stops between the supply section and the inlet of the print section.
1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink.
0020[3020] IMAGER Jam print-upper XFER
A film stops between the inlet of the print section and the outlet of the transfer unit.
0021[3021] IMAGER Jam in upper XFER
A film stops at the outlet of the transfer unit.
0023[3023] IMAGER Jam in receive unit
A film stops when it is received.
0024[3024] IMAGER Jam in print unit
A film stops when it is printed.
0028[3028] IMAGER Jam XFER-receive
A film stops between the transfer unit and the receive unit.
0032[3032] IMAGER Processor not ready
During preparation of the film processor
0033 IMAGER Sorter not ready
During preparation of the sorter
21-5
Error Code Error Message 0035[3035] IMAGER DOCK. unit err
Description Docking unit sensor error
0036[3036] IMAGER DOCK. unit err
Docking unit sensor error
0037[3037] IMAGER Jam in DOCK.unit.
A film stops at the docking unit.
0038[3038] IMAGER Jam in DOCK.unit
A film stops at the docking unit.
003C[303C] IMAGER Polygon err
A problem with the polygon mirror occurs.
003D[303D] IMAGER H. sync err
No horizontal synchronization for laser optical system
0040 IMAGER Print err
Improper print drum
0046 IMAGER I/F err
Abnormal initialization of the communication I/F
0047 IMAGER I/F err
Timeout of the communication I/F
0048 IMAGER I/F err
Abnormal signals for the communication I/F
0049 IMAGER I/F err
Timeout of the communication I/F
21-6
Error Code Error Message 004A IMAGER I/F err cation I/F
Description Abnormal signals for the communi-
004B IMAGER err
A problem with the laser power
004C IMAGER Not memory
Insufficient memory
1. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 2. Check the image size and the memory of the imager. 3. Consider the reduction of image size or the memory expansion.
0050 IMAGER Command err
Improper command
1. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink. 2. If the Printlink does not start up, power OFF the Printlink and the imager, then ON again.
0052 IMAGER err
A syntax error
0053 IMAGER Parameter err
Improper parameter range
0054 IMAGER Format err
Improper format
0055 IMAGER Store err
Improper position of store / erase
0056 IMAGER Store err
Full position of store
0057 IMAGER Format err 0058 IMAGER Wait Format err 005A IMAGER Disk err
Improper change of format (The format that cannot be output to the imager is selected.) Improper change of format (The format that cannot be output to the imager is selected.) Improper disk
1. Install the Printlink properly.
1. Install the Printlink properly.
1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager.
21-7
Error Code Error Message 0062 IMAGER cannot _ copy stop_ 0063 IMAGER err 00a0 Film empty 8 x 10 00a1 Film empty 8 x 10 clear 00a2 Film empty 8 x 10 blue 00a3 Film empty 8 x 10 DR 00a4 Film empty 8 x 10 DR clear 00a5 Film empty 8 x 10 DR blue 00a6 Film empty 10 x 12 00a7 Film empty 10 x 12 clear 00a8 Film empty 10 x 2 blue 00a9 Film empty 10 x 12 DR 00aa Film empty 10 x 12 DR clear 00ab Film empty 10 x 12 DR blue 00ac Film empty 11 x 14 00ad Film empty 11 x 14 clear 00ae Film empty 11 x 14 blue 00af Film empty 11 x 14 DR 00b0 Film empty 11 x 14 DR clear 00b1 Film empty 11 x 14 DR blue 00b2 Film empty 14 x 14 00b3 Film empty 14 x 14 clear 00b4 Film empty 14 x 14 blue
Description "Copy stop" cannot be accepted. Other errors 8 x 10 film is not set. 8 x 10 CLEAR film is not set. 8 x 10 BLUE film is not set. 8 x 10 DR film is not set. 8 x 10 DR CLEAR film is not set. 8 x 10 DR BLUE film is not set. 10 x 12 film is not set. 10 x 12 CLEAR film is not set. 10 x 12 BLUE film is not set. 10 x 12 DR film is not set. 10 x 12 DR CLEAR film is not set. 10 x 12 DR BLUE film is not set. 11 x 14 film is not set. 11 x 14 CLEAR film is not set. 11 x 14 BLUE film is not set. 11 x 14 DR film is not set. 11 x 14 DR CLEAR film is not set. 11 x 14 DR BLUE film is not set. 14 x 14 film is not set. 14 x 14 CLEAR film is not set. 14 x 14 BLUE film is not set.
Corrective action 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery ("copy stop"). 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 1. Set an 8 x 10 film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 8 x 10 CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 8 x 10 BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 8 x 10 DR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 8 x 10 DR CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 8 x 10 DR BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 DR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 DR CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 10 x 12 DR BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 DR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 DR CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set an 11 x 14 DR BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 14 film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 14 CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 14 BLUE film into the supply magazine.
21-8
Error Code Error Message 00b5 Film empty 14 x 14 DR 00b6 Film empty 14 x 14 DR clear 00b7 Film empty 14 x 14 DR blue 00b8 Film empty 14 x 17 00b9 Film empty 14 x 17 clear 00ba Film empty 14 x 17 blue 00bb Film empty 14 x 17 DR 00bc Film empty 14 x 17 DR clear 00bd Film empty 14 x 17 DR blue 00c1 Cover Open 00c2 Check Chemistry
Description 14 x 14 DR film is not set. 14 x 14 DR CLEAR film is not set. 14 x 14 DR BLUE film is not set. 14 x 17 film is not set. 14 x 17 CLEAR film is not set. 14 x 17 BLUE film is not set. 14 x 17 DR film is not set. 14 x 17 DR CLEAR film is not set. 14 x 17 DR BLUE film is not set. The cover is open. Check chemistry
Corrective action 1. Set a 14 x 14 DR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 14 DR CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 14 DR BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 DR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 DR CLEAR film into the supply magazine. 1. Set a 14 x 17 DR BLUE film into the supply magazine. 1. Close the cover of the magazine. 1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of the imager. 2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the Printlink.
00c3 Chemicals Empty
Chemicals empty
AA00 V_IN I/F Device nothing AA01 V_IN I/F Duplicate open AA02 V_IN I/F Intr not happened
No I/F board driver device
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
I/F board driver duplicate open
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
I/F board driver no interruption
1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Connection of the cables Is the modality ready ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
AA03 V_IN I/F Intr detect failed
I/F board driver fails to detect interruption.
21-9
Error Code Error Message AA04 V_IN I/F Reg access failed AA05 V_IN I/F Interrupt PCI abort AA06 V_IN I/F PCI abort happened AA07 V_IN I/F Header in timeout
Description I/F board driver board register access error I/F board driver PCI abort interruption I/F board driver PCI abort error
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
I/F board driver header input timeout
AA08 V_IN I/F Header out timeout
I/F board driver header output timeout
AA09 V_IN I/F Phy mem get failed AA0A V_IN I/F Phy mem free failed AA0B V_IN I/F Phy mem get dupli AA0C V_IN I/F Phy mem illegal free AA0D V_IN I/F Parameter error
I/F board driver fails to allocate Physical memory. I/F board driver fails to free Physical memory. I/F board driver board allocates Physical memory in duplicate. I/F board driver fails to allocate and free Physical memory. I/F board driver parameter error
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following point. Is proper installation made ? 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AA0E V_IN I/F Illegal parameter
I/F board driver demands an improper operation parameter.
1. Check if there are any problems in the following point. Is proper installation made ? 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AA0F V_IN I/F Illegal DMA
I/F board driver demands an improper DMA transfer.
21-10
Error Code Error Message AA10 V_IN I/F DMA time out
Description I/F board driver DMA timeout
Corrective action 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Connection of the cables Is the modality ready ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
AA11 V_IN I/F Image type illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify one/multiple frames.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AA12 V_IN I/F Last Flag illegal AA13 V_IN I/F Trans size illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify the last frame flag. I/F board driver fails to transfer size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? Is the header data correct ? 2. Press the store switch.
AA14 V_IN I/F Illegal header req
I/F board driver demands an improper header input/output.
AA15 V_IN I/F Illegal image in
I/F board driver demands an improper image input.
AA16 V_IN I/F Illegal image out
I/F board driver demands an improper image output.
AA17 V_IN I/F Image in timeout
I/F board driver header input timeout.
21-11
Error Code Error Message AA18 V_IN I/F Image out timeout timeout.
Description I/F board driver header output
AA19 V_IN I/F signal unrecognized
I/F board driver fails to recognize video signals.
1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Are video signals output correctly ? Are video signals adjusted correctly ?
AA1A V_IN I/F A/D time out
I/F board driver A/D end timeout.
AA1F V_IN I/F Failed AA20 V_IN I/F read size illegal
I/F board driver other errors. I/F board driver fails to specify size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? Is the header data correct ? 2. Press the store switch.
AA21 V_IN I/F read addr illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify address.
1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? Is the header data correct ? 2. Press the store switch.
AB00 D_V I/F Device nothing AB01 D_V I/F Duplicate open AB02 D_V I/F Intr not happened
I/F board driver fails to find a device. I/F board driver opened more than once. I/F board driver no interruption
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Connection of the cables Is the modality ready ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
AB03 D_V I/F Intr detect failed
21-12
Error Code Error Message AB04 D_V I/F Reg access failed AB05 D_V I/F Interrupt PCI abort AB06 D_V I/F PCI abort happened AB07 D_V I/F Header in timeout
Description I/F board driver board register access error I/F board driver PCI abort interruption I/F board driver PCI abort error
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AB08 D_V I/F Header out timeout
AB09 D_V I/F Phy mem get failed AB0A D_V I/F Phy mem free failed AB0B D_V I/F Phy mem get dupli AB0C D_V I/F Phy mem illegal free AB0D D_V I/F Parameter error
AB0E D_V I/F Illegal parameter
AB0F D_V I/F Illegal DMA
21-13
Error Code Error Message AB10 D_V I/F DMA timeout
Description I/F board driver DMA timeout
AB11 D_V I/F Image type illegal AB12 D_V I/F Last Flag illegal AB13 D_V I/F Trans size illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify one/multiple frames. I/F board driver fails to specify the last frame flag. I/F board driver fails to transfer size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? Is the header data correct ? 2. Press the store switch.
AB14 D_V I/F Illegal header req
I/F board driver demands an improper image input/output.
AB15 D_V I/F Illegal image in
AB16 D_V I/F Illegal image out
AB17 D_V I/F Image in timeout
21-14
Error Code Error Message AB18 D_V I/F Image out timeout timeout
AB19 D_V I/F signal unrecognized
AB1A D_V I/F A/D timeout
AB1F D_V I/F Failed AB20 D_V I/F illegal video IMG IN
I/F board driver other errors. I/F board driver inputs video of improper size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Are video signals output correctly ? Are video signals adjusted correctly ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
AB21 D_V I/F IMG GET timeout
I/F board driver image acquiring end timeout.
AB22 D_V I/F read size illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify size.
AB23 D_V I/F read addr illegal
AC00 V_HG I/F Device nothing AC01 V_HG I/F Duplicate open
I/F board driver fails to find a device. I/F board driver duplicate open.
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
21-15
Error Code Error Message AC02 V_HG I/F Intr not happened
Description I/F board driver no interruption
AC03 V_HG I/F Intr detect failed
AC04 V_HG I/F Reg access failed AC05 V_HG I/F Interrupt PCI abort AC06 V_HG I/F PCI abort happened AC07 V_HG I/F Header in timeout
I/F board driver board register access error I/F board driver PCI abort interruption I/F board driver PCI abort error
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AC08 V_HG I/F Header out timeout
AC09 V_HG I/F Phy mem get failed AC0A V_HG I/F Phy mem free failed AC0B V_HG I/F Phy mem get dupli AC0C V_HG I/F Phy mem illegal free AC0D V_HG I/F Parameter error
21-16
Error Code Error Message AC0E V_HG I/F Illegal parameter
Description I/F board driver demands an improper operation parameter.
Corrective action 1. Check if there are any problems in the following point. Is proper installation made ? 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AC0F V_HG I/F illegal DMA
AC10 V_HG I/F DMA timeout
I/F board driver DMA timeout
1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AC11 V_HG I/F Image type illegal
AC12 V_HG I/F Last Flag illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify the last frame flag.
ACB3 V_HG I/F Trans size illegal
I/F board driver fails to transfer size.
AC14 V_HG I/F Illegal header req
AC15 V_HG I/F Illegal image in
AC16 V_HG I/F Illegal image out
21-17
Error Code Error Message AC17 V_HG I/F Image in timeout out 21-18
Description I/F board driver header input time-
AC18 V_HG I/F Image out timeout
AC19 V_HG I/F signal unrecognized
AC1A V_HG I/F A/D time out
AC1F V_HG I/F Failed AC20 V_HG I/F illegal video IMG IN
I/F board driver other errors. I/F board driver inputs video of improper size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Are video signals output correctly ? Are video signals adjusted correctly ?
AC21 V_HG I/F read size illegal
AC22 V_HG I/F read addr illegal
AD00 D_IN I/F Device nothing AD01 D_IN I/F Duplicate open AD02 D_IN I/F Intr not happened
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
21-18
Error Code Error Message AD03 D_IN I/F Intr detect failed ruption.
Description I/F board driver fails to detect inter-
AD04 D_IN I/F Reg access failed AD05 D_IN I/F Interrupt PCI abort AD06 D_IN I/F PCI abort happened AD07 D_IN I/F Header in timeout
AD08 D_IN I/F Header out timeout
AD09 D_IN I/F Phy mem get failed AD0A D_IN I/F Phy mem free failed AD0B D_IN I/F Phy mem get dupli AD0C D_IN I/F Phy mem illegal free AD0D D_IN I/F Parameter error
AD0E D_IN I/F Illegal parameter
21-19
Error Code Error Message AD0F D_IN I/F Illegal DMA
Description I/F board driver demands an improper DMA transfer.
AD10 D_IN I/F DMA time out
AD11 D_IN I/F Image type illegal
AD12 D_IN I/F Last Fla illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify the last frame flag.
AD13 D_IN I/F Trans size illegal
I/F board driver fails to transfer size.
AD14 D_IN I/F Illegal header req
AD15 D_IN I/F Illegal image in
AD16 D_IN I/F Illegal image out
21-20
Error Code Error Message AD17 D_IN I/F Image in timeout out
Description I/F board driver header input time-
AD18 D_IN I/F Image out timeout
I/F board driver header output timeout.
AD19 D_IN I/F signal unrecognized
AD1A D_IN I/F A/D timeout
AD1F D_IN I/F Failed AD21 D_IN I/F read size illegal
I/F board driver other errors.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.
AD22 D_IN I/F read addr illegal
AE00 D_OUT I/F Device nothing AE01 D_OUT I/F Duplicate open AE02 D_OUT I/F Intr not happened
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Connection of the cables Is the modality ready ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
21-21
Error Code Error Message AE03 D_OUT I/F Intr detect failed ruption.
Description I/F board driver fails to detect inter-
AE04 D_OUT I/F Reg access AE05 D_OUT I/F Interrupt PCI abort AE06 D_OUT I/F PCI abort happened
AE07 D_OUT I/F Header in timeout
AE08 D_OUT I/F Header out timeout
AE09 D_OUT I/F Phy mem get failed AE0A D_OUT I/F Phy mem free failed AE0B D_OUT I/F Phy mem get dupli AE0C D_OUT I/F Phy mem illegal free AE0D D_OUT I/F Parameter error
I/F board driver fails to allocate Physical memory. I/F board driver fails to free Physical memory. I/F board driver board allocates Physical memory more than once. I/F board driver fails to allocate and free Physical memory. I/F board driver parameter error
AE0E D_OUT I/F Illegal parameter
21-22
Error Code Error Message AE0F D_OUT I/F Illegal DMA
Description I/F board driver demands an improper DMA transfer.
Corrective action 1. Check if there are any problems in the following point. Is proper installation made ? 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.
AE10 D_OUT I/F DMA timeout
AE11 D_OUT I/F Image type illegal AE12 D_OUT I/F Last Flag illegal AE13 D_OUT I/F Trans size illegal
I/F board driver fails to specify one/multiple frames. I/F board driver fails to specify the last frame flag. I/F board driver fails to transfer size.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Is proper installation made ? Is the header data correct ? 2. Press the store switch.
AE14 D_OUT I/F Illegal header req
AE15 D_OUT I/F Illegal image in
AE16 D_OUT I/F Illegal image out
AE17 D_OUT I/F Image in timeout
21-23
Error Code Error Message AE18 D_OUT I/F Image out timeout timeout.
AE19 D_OUT I/F signal unrecognized AE1A D_OUT I/F A/D timeout
I/F board driver fails to recognize video signals. I/F board driver A/D end timeout.
1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Are video signals output correctly ? 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Connection of the cables Is the modality ready ? Is proper installation made ? 2. Press the store switch.
AE1F D_OUT I/F Failed B001 Disk full B002 Frame header full B003 Page header full B004 I/F Image size error B010 Disk error B011 Disk full (cannot recover)
I/F board driver other errors. Fails to acquire a next page. Frame control data is full. Page control data is full. Images of different size are stored in one page. Disk access error (Fails to access the work file.) Disk access error (Fails to access the image file.)
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. Does an imager start up ? Is the connection with the imager correct ? Are there enough space in the concerned channel ? 2. Press the ERROR RESET.
B021 Cannot change supply mag B106 Cannot change imager B108 No Previous page B109 No Previous page B10A Previous page used B10B Previous page printing
The supply magazine is changed while the output images remain. The route of the destination imager is not defined. The previous page does not exist. (Not wait for the previous page.) The previous page is a blank page. The previous page is demanded while it is processed. During outputting the previous page.
1. Return the imager to the original supply magazine. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Is the installation correct ? 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Wait for a while and execute Previous again.
21-24
Error Code Error Message B200 IMAGER busy B201 Film size B202 Fomat illegal B300 dictionary file not found
Description Imager busy Film size error Format problem No dictionary file
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Is the installation correct ? 1. Is the installation correct ? When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
B301 Image data error
The characters are not clipped.
When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
B302 Image data size error
Improper image size
B303 dictionary data error
Improper dictionary data
B304 no memory
Fails to allocate memory needed for character recognition.
B305 Image data read error
Fails to read the original image.
When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Increase the value of "ID_LIMIT=" with the terminal software. Or Set to "0 (infinite)", and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
B306 Time out
Recognized timeout
B307 OCR header read error
Fails to read the header information (Character recognition).
B308 OCR Not found modality
Fails to find the modality (Character recognition).
21-25
Error Code Error Message B309 OCR entry dictionary
Description Fails to register the dictionary data (Character recognition).
Corrective action When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
B310 OCR open parameter error
The dictionary is opened. Improper parameter (Character recognition).
When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF. When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
B311 OCR Not read dictionary file
Not read the dictionary yet (Character recognition).
B312 OCR character dic open error
An error occurs in the character recognition function (set_dic_data) (Character recognition).
B313 OCR Not open dictionary
Not open any dictionaries yet (Character recognition).
B314 OCR character dic recog error
An error occurs in the character recognition function (Recog) (Character recognition).
B315 OCR open image file error
Fails to open the specified image file (Character recognition).
B316 OCR Pixel Wide error
The specified pixel width is incorrect (Character recognition).
B317 OCR read image file error
Fails to clip and read the characters in the image file (Character recognition).
B318 OCR load file error
An error occurs in the dictionary file reading function (Character recognition).
B319 OCR Nothing dictionary
Fails to open the dictionary as the dictionary data is not registered in the specified coordinate of the size (Character recognition).
21-26
Error Code Error Message B320 OCR Dictionary data read error
Description Fails to read the dictionary data.
Corrective action When the concerned page is output without character recognition every time; 1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.
D001 TTO-empty D002 SF not present D003 Jammed D004 Fatal error D005 Off-line D006 Sheet resend D007 Sheet reject D008 IMAGER Error D103 PDU Receive Error D104 PDU Send Error D106 ASSOCIATE Error
Receives "TTO Empty" in the status check. Receives "SF not present" in the status check. Receives "Jammed" in the status check. Receives "Fatal Error" in the status check. Receives "Off-line" in the status check. Or Fails to communicate with the imager. Receives "SHEET_RESEND" or no response in 3 min. or more as the replay of sheet data. Receives "SHEET_REJECT" as the replay of the sheet demand. Fails to transfer the image due to timeout, etc. Fails to receive PDU data. Fails to transmit PDU data. Fails to establish the association.
1. Exchange the finishing roll. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Check the sheet feeder. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Remove the jammed film. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again. 1. Make the Li-1417D online. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again. 1. Check Ethernet, cables, and transceiver. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. IP address of connected devices Are the IP address, port number, AE title of the Printlink set properly ?
D109 Illegal command received D10C Dcm sop class D10D Dcm sop instance D10E dcm tag E000 Environment variable E001 Get Thread ID E002 Get Process ID E003 Mutex create
Receives improper command. Receives improper SOP class. Fails to find SOP instance. Improper tag data Fails to set the environment variables. Fails to obtain the thread ID. Fails to obtain the process ID. Fails to create mutex.
1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 2. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.
21-27
Error Code Error Message E004 Mutex name illegal E005 Mutex already create E006 Mutex not create self E007 Mutex using E008 Mutex inst over timeout E009 Mutex get E00A Mutex timeout E00B Mutex End Thread before release E00C Mutex no get E00E Mutex getting E00F Process illegal info E010 Process illegal title E011 Process illegal command line E012 Process execute E013 Process wait failed E014 Process open E015 Process terminate E016 Thread illegal info. E017 Thread Priority E018 Thread resume E019 Thread suspend E01A Thread terminate E01B Thread execute
Description Improper mutex name Mutex has been already created. Mutex is not created on this object. Mutex is used on others. Improper waiting time for mutex is specified. Fails to obtain mutex privilege. Timeout of waiting for mutex Mutex used thread ends before releasing mutex. Not obtain Mutex. Mutex has been already obtained. Improper process startup information Improper process title Command line character string is incorrect at the startup of process. Fails to start up process. Fails to wait for the end of process. Fails to obtain process handle. Fails to end process forcefully. Improper thread information Fails to set thread priority. Fails to resume thread. Fails to suspend thread. Fails to terminate thread forcefully. Fails to start up thread.
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.
21-28
Error Code Error Message E01C Thread illegal func pointer E020 Sharedmemory not create E021 Sharedmemory create E022 Sharedmemory exist E023 Sharedmemory no exist E024 Sharedmemory read E025 Sharedmemory write E026 Sharedmemory open E027 Sharedmemory already open E028 Sharedmemory close E029 Sharedmemory already close E02A Sharedmemory used E02B Sharedmemory not open E02C Sharedmemory file size E02D Sharedmemory file map E02E Sharedmemory no detatch E02F Sharedmemory creat file E030 Sharedmemory file read E031 Sharedmemory file write E032 Sharedmemory file name E033 Sharedmemory file R/W size E034 Sharedmemory mutex E035 Sharedmemory create default
Description Improper thread function pointer Shared memory is not created. Fails to create shared memory. Name of shared memory to be set exists. Name of shared memory to be deleted does not exist. Fails to read shared memory. Fails to write on shared memory. Fails to open shared memory. Shared memory is already open. Fails to close shared memory. Shared memory is already closed. Shared memory is being used. Shared memory is not open. Fails to obtain file size. Fails to map in memory. Shared memory is not released. Fails to open the file to be expanded in the shared memory. Fails to read from the file. Fails to write on the file. Transmitted file name is incorrect. The size is not matched in reading and writing from/on the file. Fails to create the privilege. Create the shared memory at the default value.
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.
21-29
Error Code Error Message E036 Sharedmemory no used file E037 Errorlog control struct name E038 Errorlog control define file E039 Errorlog control create file E03A Errorlog control file write E03B Errorlog control file size E03C Control struct name E03D T-Ethernet struct name E03E Route control struct name E03F DICOM struct name E040 Modality I/F struct name E041 Log control struct name E042 HSTP struct name E043 PAGE control struct name E044 Channel control struct name E045 Process control struct name E046 Customformatmemory struct name E047 Frame control struct name E048 Frame control info. struct name E049 Errorcode memory struct name E04A Format memory struct name
Description Shared memory is created and the file is not used. Improper structure name Improper file name Fails to open the file. Fails to write on the file. The number of bytes is not matched in reading and writing from/on the file. Improper structure name Printlink control data Improper structure name Toshiba Ether setting data Improper structure name Route data Improper structure name DICOM setting data Improper structure name Modality IF setting data Improper structure name Log control data Improper structure name HSTP setting data Improper structure name Page control data Improper structure name Channel control data Improper structure name Process control data Improper structure name Format setting data Improper structure name Frame control data Improper character string name (Frame control data used information) Improper character string name (Error code converting data saved file) Improper character string name (Format data)
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.
21-30
Error Code Error Message E050 Serial open E051 Serial setup comm E052 Serial get commstate E053 Serial set commstate E054 Serial get timeout E055 Serial set timeout E056 Serial no open E057 Serial already open E058 Serial send E059 Serial send size E05a Serial receive E05B Serial receive size E05C Serial receive NG comm. E05D Serial receive timeout E05E Serial send timeout E05F Serial parameter E060 File close E061 File already close E062 File open E063 File already open E064 File used E065 File read E066 File write
Description Fails to open the serial port. Fails to set the serial port. Fails to obtain the operation information of the serial port. Fails to set the operation information of the serial port. Fails to obtain the timeout value of the serial port. Fails to set the timeout value of the serial port. The serial port is not open. The serial port is already open. Fails to make serial port transmission. Improper serial port transmission size Fails to make serial port reception. Improper serial port reception size Serial port I/O error Serial port reception timeout Serial port transmission timeout Fails to specify parameter function at serial port. Fails to close the file. The file is already closed, Fails to open the file. The file is already open. The file is being used on others. Fails to read the file. Fails to write on the file.
21-31
Error Code Error Message E067 File delete E068 File directory E069 Not File name E06A Not Mutex name E06B Not Buffer E06C Buffer size E06D Offset E06E Data No. E06F Sharedfile destroy E070 Character E071 Get file size E072 File size E073 Version file open E074 Version file read E075 Version file copy E076 Version file write E077 Version file version NULL E078 Version file serial NULL E07A Image file open E07B Image file read E07C Image file write E07D Image file create E07E Version file syscode NULL
Description Fails to delete the file. Fails to obtain the directory. File name does not exist. Mutex name does not exist. Buffer does not exist. Buffer size is negative. Offset is negative. Impossible file number You have tried to delete Mutex that was not created. Characters "\\" are not found. Fails to obtain file size. The specified offset value exceeds the file size. Fails to open the file. Fails to read the file. Fails to store the character strings. Fails to write on the file. No VERSION is in the version information file. No SERIAL is in the version information file. The image file is not open. Fails to read the image file. Fails to write on the image file. Fails to prepare for creating the image file. No system code is in the version information file.
21-32
Error Code Error Message E080 Send Thread message E081 Receive Thread message E082 Thread message send E083 Thread message get E084 Thread message wait E085 Thread message not Equal E086 Thread message receive timeout E090 Socket startup E091 Socket version E092 Socket server E093 Socket Client address E094 Socket Listen E095 Socket Client E096 Socket server IP E097 Socket connect E098 Socket send E099 Socket close E09A Socket receive E09B Socket accept E09C Socket timeout E09D Socket force close E09E Socket no change E09F Socket select exception
Description Thread message transmission error Thread message reception error Fails to transmit thread message. Fails to receive thread message. Waiting for thread message reception. Thread message and ID are not matched. Thread message reception timeout Fails to initialize socket. Socket versions are not matched. Fails to create the socket at the server. Fails to allocate the address to the socket at the client. Fails to announce the reception of connection request. Fails to create the socket at the client. Fails to obtain the IP address of the server. Fails to connect the socket of the server. Fails to transmit the message. The socket is already closed. Fails to receive the message. Fails to accept the connection. Socket timeout The socket waiting for the connection is forcefully closed. No change of socket status Waiting the change of status except socket transmission and reception.
21-33
Error Code Error Message E0A0 Socket select send E0A1 Socket select receive E0A2 TCPIP unsupported OS E0A3 TCPIP netcard reg.open E0A4 TCPIP netcard reg. Query E0A5 TCPIP illegal netcard reg.name E0A6 TCPIP reg.open E0A7 TCPIP reg.query E0A8 TCPIP reg.set E0A9 TCPIP bad IP address E0AA Remote file IP address E0AB Remote file filename E0AC Remote file open E0AD Remote file read E0AE Remote file write E0AF Remote file close E0B0 Remote file receive E0B1 Remote file network E0B2 ALL data read E0B3 ALL data write E0B4 Versionup directory E0B5 Versionup copyfile E0B6 Versionup copy sion.
Description Fails to wait for socket transmisFails to wait for socket reception. Called with unsupported OS. Fails to open the network board registry. Fails to obtain the network board registry contents. Network board name to be set in registry is incorrect. Fails to open TCP-IP registry. Fails to obtain TCP-IP registry. Fails to set the TCP-IP registry settings. The specified IP address is incorrect. Improper IP address Improper file name Fails to open the file. Fails to read the file. Fails to write on the file. Fails to close the file. The data that is required to obtain cannot be used. Fails to allocate the network drive. There are insufficient files needed for reading all the setting files. There are insufficient files needed for writing all the setting files. Improper directory for reading the file There are insufficient files needed for upgrading the software. Fails to copy the file.
21-34
Error Code Error Message E0B7 Search filelist E0B8 Search filename E0B9 Next pointer E0BA Versiondown directory E0BB Versiondown copyfile E0BC Versiondown copy E0BD Versiondown No Version E0BE Versiondown delete file E0D0 Win.logon get privileges E0D1 Win.logon get privileges value E0D2 Win.logon set privileges E0D3 Win.logon exit E0D4 Win.logon no instruct power off E0D5 Win.logon map device. drv.mem E0D6 Win.logon open device driver E0D7 Win.logon multi instance E0D8 Win.logon set local time E0D9 System date E0DA System time E0DC Times get privileges E0DD Times get privileges value E0DE Times set privileges E0DF Times not numeric
Description There is no FILELIST description in the itrsetup.itr file. Fails to find the file name (Reaching to the end of the file). Fails to search for the file. Improper directory for the file to be read There are insufficient files needed for downgrading the software. Fails to copy the file. Improper version of the module Fails to delete the working file. Fails to obtain the process privilege token. Fails to obtain the identifier of the process privilege. Fails to set the process privilege. Fails to end Windows. Fails to find power OFF. Fails to map the UPS device driver memory. Fails to open the UPS device driver. The instance of the UPS driver operation logic is being executed. Fails to set the system local time. Improper system date Improper system time Fails to obtain the process privilege token. Fails to obtain the identifier of the process privilege. Fails to set the process privilege. Includes characters other than numbers in the character string for time.
21-35
Error Code Error Message E100 Install service file name E101 Install service cntrl. Manager E102 Install service handle E103 Remove service cntrl. manager E104 Remove service handle E105 Remove service control E106 Remove service delete E107 Stop service control E200 Output queue append E201 Output queue delete E202 Output queue get E203 Study queue append E204 Study queue delete E205 Study queue get E300 Command timeout
Description Fails to obtain a file name in installing the service software. Fails to connect with the service control manager in installing the service software. Fails to create the service object in installing the service software. Fails to connect with the service control manager in uninstalling the service software. Fails to obtain the service handle in uninstalling the service software. Fails to stop the service in uninstalling the service software. Fails to delete the service in uninstalling the service software. Fails to stop the specified service. Fails to add output queue. Fails to delete output queue. Fails to obtain output queue. Fails to add study queue. Fails to delete study queue. Fails to obtain study queue. Timeout between commands (The data of Toshiba Ether is not transmitted.)
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality.
E301 Image timeout
Timeout between frames (The data of Toshiba Ether is not transmitted.)
E302 Illegal user name
Improper user name is specified with USER command (It is likely that the modality does not work properly after the connection).
E303 Not login
Not login (It is likely that the modality does not work properly after the connection).
21-36
Error Code Error Message E304 Telegram illegal format
Description Improper format of received socket message (It is likely that the modality does not work properly after the connection).
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 3. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Check the modality. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 1. Press the ERROR RESET.
E305 Illegal data mode
The data reception mode is set outside of the range (It is likely that the modality does not work properly after the connection).
E306 Command sequence
Improper order of commands (It is likely that the modality does not work properly after the connection).
E307 Access position full E308 Illegal channel number E309 NEMA code receive error E30A NEMA code error data E30B NEMA code error data size E30C Illegal data E400 Illegal command E401 Previous page used E403 Nonexistent Route E404 Nonexistent Custom format E405 Test pattern File E500 DICOM COM Illegal Status E501 DICOM COM Status check missing E600 Receive illegal errcode
The number of modalities exceeds the maximum. The channel number is set outside of the range. NEMA code reception error (receiving improper data from the modality). NEMA code error data (receiving improper data from the modality). NEMA code error data size (receiving improper data from the modality). The data is set outside of the range (receiving improper data from the modality). Improper command (receiving improper data from the modality). The previous page is demanded while the previous page is processed. Route does not exist. No custom format Fails to create the test pattern file. Receives an undefined value in the status of the DICOM command. Receives an undefined value in the status of the DICOM command. Receives an undefined error code from the imager.
1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the imager, then ON again.
21-37
Error Code Error Message E601 Receive ahync illegal errcode EE00 Illegal parameter EE01 Channel not used EE02 Protocol not used EE03 Illegal Channel number EE04 Illegal Route number EE05 Illegal Page number EE06 Illegal Frame number EE07 Illegal Message code EE08 Illegal Message data EE09 Memory alloc EE0A Illegal Image size EE0B Not stored EE0C Image size EE0D Get file data not found EF00 Server Error EFFF Other error F000 IMAGER not ready
Description Receives an asynchronous error from the imager. Startup parameter error The specified channel is not used. The specified protocol is not used. The channel number is set outside of the range. The route number is set outside of the range. The page number is set outside of the range. The frame number is set outside of the range. Receives the telegram of the improper message code. Improper data is in the telegram. Fails to allocate memory. The size of the frame control data and the actual image size do not match. There is no frame stored in the page. H and V size of image is set outside of range. Fails to obtain the data from the data file. Printlink internal error (for DICOM) Other Printlink errors Preparing for the image
Corrective action 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the imager, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Re-install the same version. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Press the ERROR RESET. 2. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again. 1. Check if there are any problems in the following points. The connection with the imager keypad. Is the imager powered ON ? 2. Press the ERROR RESET.
0000 NOT_ERROR
No error
21-38
Blank page
Blank page
22. Troubleshooting
22.1 Troubleshooting on Startup and Connection
22.1.1 The Printlink does not get powered ON.
Is the breaker switch for the power on the back of the Printlink turned ON ? -> Turn the breaker switch for the power ON, if it is not.
22.1.2 The Printlink shuts down.

Is the power cable connected ? -> Insert the power cable, if it is not.
22.1.3 The Printlink does not start up.

The Printlink does not start up, and "Konica" remains on the controller. The display on the controller does not change until the communication between the controller and the Printlink is established. -> Check the harness. -> Check the controller. -> Check the operation of the I/F. -> Check the installation. The settings of the I/F channel and the install software. -> Check the H/D. Is access made at startup ? -> Check the main board.
22.2 Troubleshooting on Operations

22.2.1 The film is not printed out.
PRINT STOP may be set. Is the test pattern printed out by the imager itself ? "IMAGER not ready" is displayed on the controller of the Printlink. The imager does not start up. A problem occurs with the communication between the imager and the Printlink. -> Change the setting on the "FUNCTION" screen of the controller if it is set. -> If it is not, a problem occurs in the imager.
22.2.2 An error occurs in specifying the format from the Printlink to the imager
The format that cannot be selected in the connected imager is set to selectable in the Printlink. -> Check the format that the imager supports (including image size). -> Check the format data of the installation of the Printlink.
22.2.3 An error occurs in storing the image from the Printlink to the imager
Check the connection of D37 cable. Is the variable mode set in the imager, or does the imager support ROM ? (Size of the frame memory ?) Check the set contents of the header in the imager.
22-1
22. Troubleshooting
22.3 Troubleshooting on Image Quality

22.3.1 Image quality problem (Analyzing the causes)
Are problems occur on the films of all the modalities, or on the films of some modalities ? (Main board, H/D, Output I/F, Imager) -> If the problems occur on the films of some modalities, the Printlink I/F has an abnormality (re-adjustment, re-setting). Check the test pattern of the imager. Check the test pattern of the Printlink. -> If it is normal, the I/F of the imager or the Printlink has an abnormality. -> If it is normal, the transfer from the I/F to the H/D has an abnormality. -> If it is abnormal, the output I/F or the imager has an abnormality. -> If the problems occur on the films of all the modalities, any device other than the Printlink I/F has an abnormality.
22.3.2 Abnormal print conditions

Check that the information specified on the Printlink controller and the settings of the imager controller that are output into the imager are matched. (While stopping operating other modalities and operating only the concerned modality, check the controller settings in the imager when the image is read into the imager.)
22.4 Using Backup Imager

It is necessary to set that the LUT, image size, the number of format frames, and film size can be shared when multiple imager are defined as output devices. LUT: Set that the same density is set in the same LUT number between the different imagers. Format: The format that cannot be selected due to the image size or the frame memory size of the imager should be set to Not selectable in the Printlink. (The format that cannot be selected in one imager should be set to Not selectable in the other imagers.) Film size: Set the film size of the used imager in the backup imager.
Note: An error will occur and cannot be reset if you try to output images in the settings that the output imagers do not support. Even if you power off the Printlink, this error cannot be reset. In order to reset the error, execute COLD START (Printlink reset) in the Printlink install software.
22.5 Others
The settings will be reset if the power is turned OFF, and then ON again. The battery for the memory backup of the controller has a problem. -> Check that JP2 is set to ON. -> Check the voltage of the battery. If it is 3.4 to 3.6V, it is normal, but if it is below that, the battery is exhausted. Exchange the board.
22-2
22. Troubleshooting
How to collect Log
Errors (on anything other than images) Collect Log with the maintenance software. If an error occurs on one device, collect Log of that device. If the error may be associated with other devices according to the records of the transmission/reception of data, collect Log of the other devices. Collect the files that are created approx. one hour before/after the occurrence of the error. Errors on images (e.g. Previous is not output, loss of frame, the presence of noise, etc.) Turn the power off/on and copy the following three folders. Folder Name: ENV, DATA , LOG Note: Be sure to use the copied folders above; otherwise if you use "cut", the Printlink is frozen.
Fig. 22.1 Collecting Error Log on Images Note: Change to the detail Log setting after collecting Log. This will facilitate the analysis of the error next time the error occurs.
22-3
Blank page
Appendix
Internal Control Cables
Part No. Cable length : 012385040A : 1.05 m (For the power: 0.3m) Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Board side (Molex 5102-15)

(RXD) (TXD) (DSR) (DTR) (SG) (NC) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (SG) (+12V) (+12V) (+12G) (+12G) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (Molex 5102-04) 1 4 3 2 4 5
Controller side (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D1) D-sub 25-pin female)

Shield section 1 3 2 6 20 7 16 17 14 15 23 24 21 22 17 10 11 18 19 (FG) (RXD) (TXD) (DSR) (DTR) (SG) (NC) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (SG) (+12V) (+12V) (+12G) (+12G)
App-1
Appendix
Printlink 12-bit Internal Cables

Part No. Cable length : 030985000A01 : 1.2 m
Board side (3M 7940-6500SC)

(F.G.) (RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQUEST+) (REQUEST-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STROBE+) (STROBE-) (DATA7+) (DATA7-) (DATA6+) (DATA6-) (DATA5+) (DATA5-) (DATA4+) (DATA4-) (DATA3+) (DATA3-) (DATA2+) (DATA2-) (DATA1+) (DATA1-) (DATA0+) (DATA0-) (DATA11+) (DATA11-) (DATA10+) (DATA10-) (DATA9+) (DATA9-) (DATA8+) (DATA8-) 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Modality side (JAE DD-50S-N D-sub 50-pin female)

1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 24 41 25 42 26 43 27 44 28 45 29 46 30 47 31 48 20 37 21 38 22 39 23 40 (F.G.) (RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQUEST+) (REQUEST-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STROBE+) (STROBE-) (DATA7+) (DATA7-) (DATA6+) (DATA6-) (DATA5+) (DATA5-) (DATA4+) (DATA4-) (DATA3+) (DATA3-) (DATA2+) (DATA2-) (DATA1+) (DATA1-) (DATA0+) (DATA0-) (DATA11+) (DATA11-) (DATA10+) (DATA10-) (DATA9+) (DATA9-) (DATA8+) (DATA8-)
App-2
Appendix
MIU 12-Bit Cables 15, 30, 50, 100M

Part No. Cable length : 027385000A 027485000A 027585000A 027685000A : 15, 30, 50, 100 m
Imager side (JAE DD-50PF-N D-sub 50-pin male)

(RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQ+) (REQ-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STRB+) (STRB-) (D11+) (D11-) (D10+) (D10-) (D09+) (D09-) (D08+) (D08-) (D07+) (D07-) (D06+) (D06-) (D05+) (D05-) (D04+) (D04-) (D03+) (D03-) (D02+) (D02-) (D01+) (D01-) (D00+) (D00-) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20 37 21 38 22 39 23 40 24 41 25 42 26 43 27 44 28 45 29 46 30 47 31 48
Modality side (JAE DD-50PF-N D-sub 50-pin male)

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20 37 21 38 22 39 23 40 24 41 25 42 26 43 27 44 28 45 29 46 30 47 31 48 (RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQ+) (REQ-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STRB+) (STRB-) (D11+) (D11-) (D10+) (D10-) (D09+) (D09-) (D08+) (D08-) (D07+) (D07-) (D06+) (D06-) (D05+) (D05-) (D04+) (D04-) (D03+) (D03-) (D02+) (D02-) (D01+) (D01-) (D00+) (D00-)
App-3
Appendix
Internal Control Cable D371N

Part No. Cable length : 029785000A : 1.3 m

(F.G.) (RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQ+) (REQ-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STRB+) (STRB-) (D07+) (D07-) (D06+) (D06-) (D05+) (D05-) (D04+) (D04-) (D03+) (D03-) (D02+) (D02-) (D01+) (D01-) (D00+) (D00-) 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Modality side (DDK 17JE-13370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin female)

1 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 8 27 9 28 10 29 11 30 12 31 13 32 14 33 15 34 (F.G.) (RETRANS+) (RETRANS-) (REQ+) (REQ-) (MODE+) (MODE-) (STRB+) (STRB-) (D07+) (D07-) (D06+) (D06-) (D05+) (D05-) (D04+) (D04-) (D03+) (D03-) (D02+) (D02-) (D01+) (D01-) (D00+) (D00-)
App-4
Appendix
Imager Host Internal Cables

Part No. Cable length : 012185000A : 1.15 m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Board side (Molex 5102-15)

(FG) (RXD) (TXD) (DSR) (DTR) (SG) (NC) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (SG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Controller side (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D1) D-sub 25-pin female)

Shield section 1 3 2 6 20 7 22 9 8 21 25 13 12 24 17 (FG) (RXD) (TXD) (DSR) (DTR) (SG) (NC) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (SG)
App-5
Appendix
Internal Cable D37OUT


Modality side (DDK 17JE-23370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin female)

App-6
Appendix
Internal Cable D37OUT


Modality side (DDK 17JE-23370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin male)

App-7
Appendix
Host Internal Cable 422

Part No. Cable length : 016885000A :2m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Controller board side (Molex 5102-09)

(TXD+) (TXD-) (RXD+) (RXD-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (SG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Modality main unit side (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin female)

Shield section 1 16 17 14 15 23 24 21 22 7 (FG) (TXD+) (TXD-) (RXD+) (RXD-) (DTR+) (DTR-) (DSR+) (DSR-) (SG)
App-8
Appendix
Host Internal Cable 232C

Part No. Cable length : 018385000A :2m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Controller board side (Elco 60-8263-3108-15000)

(TXD) (RXD) (SG) (DTR) (DSR) (EXl1) (EXl2) (EXl3) (SG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Modality main unit side (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D4A) D-sub 25-pin female)

Shield section 1 2 3 7 6 20 14 15 16 17 4 5 (FG) (RXD) (TXD) (SG) (DSR) (DTR) (EXT1)Not use (EXT2)Store switch (EXT3)Print switch (GND)
App-9
Appendix
Controller (keypad) Cable 232C (Extension)

Cable length : 5 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA05) : 10 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA10) : 15 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA15) Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Controller board side (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D4A) D-sub 25-pin female)

(FG) (RXD) (TXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (+12V) (+12V) (+12G) (+12G) 1 3 2 4 5 7 10 11 18 19
PRINTLINK unit side (DDK 17JE-23250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin male)

1 3 2 4 5 7 10 11 18 19 (FG) (RXD) (TXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (+12V) (+12V) (+12G) (+12G)
Shield section
App-10 Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service USA Ver. 1.1 2001.3
Appendix
Host Cable 422A (for GE)

Part No. Cable length : 016985000A : 15 m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Diagnostic device side (DDK 17JE-23370-02(D8A) D-sub 37-pin male)

(FG) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-) 1 20 2 21 3
Host controller side (DDK 17JE-23250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin male)

1 16 17 14 15 (FG) (RXD+) (RXD-) (TXD+) (TXD-)
Shield section
Remark:A 25-37 pin converting cable is supplied with DASMVDB when Konica laser imager is connected. If this cable is not supplied, connect the cables assigned to the pins shown below between the DASMVDB and the controller 422 internal cable directly to make it possible to communicate.
Diagnostic device side

(RXD+) (TXD+) (RXD-) (TXD-) 8 9 21 22
Host controller side

16 14 17 15 (RXD+) (TXD+) (RXD-) (TXD-)
App-11
Appendix
Toshiba Host Cable

Part No. Cable length : AS3207-HSTCRS1-CA** : **=02 2 m **=15 15 m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Diagnostic device side (DDK 17JE-23250-02 D-sub 25-pin male)

(FG) (TXD) (RXD) (SG) (DSR) (DTR) 1 2 3 7 5 20
Host controller side (DDK 17JE-23250-02 D-sub 25-pin male)

1 2 3 7 6 20 (FG) (RXD) (TXD) (SG) (DTR) (DSR)
Shield section
App-12 Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0
2000.12
Appendix
3M Host Cable

(FG) (TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (DSR) (DTR) 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 20

1 2 3 4 5 7 6 20 (FG) (TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (DSR) (DTR)
Shield section
App-13
Appendix
Hitachi Host Cable


(FG) (TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (DSR) (DTR) 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 20

1 2 3 4 5 7 6 20 (FG) (TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (DSR) (DTR)
Shield section
2000.12
Appendix
9/25 Pin Converting Cable

Part No. Cable length : AS3207-HSTCRS5-CA** : **=05 5 m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Diagnostic device side (DDK 17JE-13090-02 D-sub 9-pin female)

(TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) 2 3 4 5 7

2 3 4 5 7 6 20 (TXD) (RXD) (RS) (CS) (SG) (DSR) (DSR)
App-15
Appendix
Imager Cable
Part No. Cable length : 043185000A01M01 :2m Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.
Printlink main unit side (DDK 17JE 13090-02 (D8A))

Shield section (TXD) (RXD) (SG) (DTR1) (DSR1) (RTS1) (CTS1) 2 3 5 4 6 7 8
Imager side (DDK 17JE23250-02 (D8A))

2 3 7 4 5 6 20 (TXD) (RXD) (SG) (RTS) (CTS) (DSR) (DTR)
2000.12
Appendix
DICOM PRINT and STORAGE

DICOM STORAGE is a protocol for sending image data to the image server and the image viewer. DICOM PRINT is a protocol for instructing the print of the image to the imager. Table Appendix.1 Operations of DICOM STORAGE PRINT Print data (format, trim, etc.) Patient data Method of transmission Sends for each film. None, basically After sending the film data, the image data is transmitted at the number of times needed. STORAGE No data. No concept of film and page. Adds for each image. Only sends for each image.
Image control (identifying) Association, port, AE title Network cable, environment
Controls images for each film at the reception side. No special identifier Adds an unique UID for each image. for images. Same. Same. Can be shared. No problem for using at the same time.
For STORAGE, as shown in Table above, the patient name and ID may be added as an identifier as only the image data is transmitted. Or other patient information that are obtained from HIS/RIS may be added.
App-17
Appendix
Specifying Diagnostic Device Type

Defined terms that can be used in the modality Defined term CR MR US BI DD ES MA PT ST XA RTIMAGE RTSTRUCT RTRECORD DX IO GM XC Description Computed Radiography Magnetic Resonance Ultrasound Biomagnetic Imaging Duplex Doppler Endoscopy Magnetic resonance Angiography Positron emission Tomography (PET) Single-photon emission computed Tomography (SPECT) X-Ray Angiography Radiotherapy Image Radiotherapy Structure Set Radiotherapy Treatment Record Digital Radiography Intra-oral Radiography General Microscopy External-Camera Photography RF RTDOSE RTPLAN HC MG PX SM Radio Fluoroscopy Radiotherapy Dose Radiotherapy Plan Hard Copy Mammography Panoramic X-Ray Slide Microscopy Defined term CT NM OT CD DG LS MS RG TG Description Computed Tomography Nuclear Medicine Other Color flow Doppler Diaphanography Laser surface Scan Magnetic resonance Spectroscopy Radiographic imaging (conventional film/screen) Thermography
Defined terms that cannot be used in the modality Defined term DS DF AS EC FA DM (retired) Digital Fluoroscopy (retired) Angioscopy Echocardiography Fluorescein Angiography Digital Microscopy VF CS LP CP FS Videofluorography (retired) Cystoscopy Laparoscopy Culposcopy Fundoscopy Description Digital Substruction Angiography Defined term CF Description Cinefluorography (retired)
Note: The XA modality merges with the retired modality DS. The RF modality merges with the retired modalities CF, DF and VF. The modalities listed in the modality data may not be matched to the IOD names. For example, the SOP instance from XA IOD may be described as RF modality when the RF-equipped modality produces the XA object.
2000.12
Blank page
0296-55010B
KONICA MEDICAL IMAGING INC.

411 Newark Pompton Turnpike, Wayne, NJ 07470, U.S.A. TEL.973-633-1500
KONICA CANADA INC.

1329 Meyerside Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C9, CANADA TEL.905-670-7722
KONICA EUROPE GMBH

Friedrich-Bergius-Str. Gewerbegebiet, 85662 Hohenbrunn, GERMANY TEL.8102-8040
KONICA FRANCE S.A.

Paris Nord II, 305 rue de la Belle Etoile, B.P. 50077, 95948 ROISSY C.D.G. CEDEX, FRANCE TEL.1-4938-6550
KONICA U.K. LTD.

Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, Middlesex TW13 7HD, U.K. TEL.1-81-751-6121

P - Link I - Install&Service - Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

P - Link I - Install&Service - Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Konica Print Management System Printlink

Precautions on Service and Installment of Printlink

1. Precautions upon servicing Printlink

2. Precautions against electric shock

3. Precautions upon installing Printlink

Precautions Upon Installation and Usage

5. Precautions upon using the controller LCD

Precautions Upon Installation and Usage

1) Warning and Caution indication

(Caution or Warning Mark)

This denotes a compulsory order or a direction. (Compulsory order)

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

2. Cabinet (Detaching Covers)

3. Power Unit and Internal Boards

4. Setting the Imager

6. Using the Installation Software

7. Setting the Input I/F

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

8. Setting the Video I/F

9. Setting the Digital I/F

10. Setting the Digital Video I/F

11. Setting the Video HG I/F

12. Setting the Output I/F

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

13. Additional Functions

14. Setting the Route 15. Saving and Sending Data

16. Controller (keypad) Settings

17. Host Controller Settings

18. System Layout Example

19. Setting the Character Recognition

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

21. Error Code Table

Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 2

Printlink -ID Printlink -OD Imager Controller

Printlink Controller Diagnostic Device 3

Diagnostic Device 5 Printlink -IN Printlink Network Controller

Printlink Network Controller

Fig. 1.1 Printlink System

1.3 Block Diagram

1.3.2 Block diagram of the entire system

LAN Card 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Fig. 1.2 Printlink-IV, -ID, -HG, -DV Block Diagram

LAN Card 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Power Source 100VAC

Fig. 1.3 Printlink-IN Block Diagram

IDE Network Controller

LAN Card 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Imager Controller Serial

Power Source 100VAC

Fig. 1.4 Printlink-OD Block Diagram

1.4 Circuit Boards and Cables

2. Cabinet (Detaching Covers)

(2) RESET Button

(1) Ventilation Slot

(3) E_STOP Button

(4) Front Cover

Fig. 2.1 Front Panel (1)

Fig. 2.2 Front Panel (2)

(6) Cooling Fan

(5) Breaker Switch for Power Source (7) AC Input Terminal

(8) Host Controller Output Terminal (10) Ethernet Terminal

(9) Printlink Controller Input Terminal